Zafira-C, v.34 (rev 2), en-GB · 6 In brief In brief Initial drive information Vehicle unlocking...

Owner's Manual

Introduction .................................... 2In brief ............................................ 6Keys, doors and windows ............ 20Seats, restraints ........................... 36Storage ........................................ 66Instruments and controls ............. 96Lighting ...................................... 130Infotainment system ................... 140Climate control ........................... 190Driving and operating ................. 198Vehicle care ............................... 259Service and maintenance .......... 304Technical data ........................... 308Customer information ................ 323Index .......................................... 332

Contents

2 Introduction

Introduction

Introduction 3

Vehicle specific dataPlease enter your vehicle's data onthe previous page to keep it easilyaccessible. This information isavailable in the sections "Service andmaintenance" and "Technical data"as well as on the identification plate.

IntroductionYour vehicle is a designedcombination of advanced technology,safety, environmental friendlinessand economy.This Owner's Manual provides youwith all the necessary information toenable you to drive your vehiclesafely and efficiently.Make sure your passengers areaware of the possible risk of accidentand injury which may result fromimproper use of the vehicle.You must always comply with thespecific laws and regulations of thecountry that you are in. These lawsmay differ from the information in thisOwner's Manual.Disregarding the description given inthis manual may affect your warranty.

When this Owner's Manual refers to aworkshop visit, we recommend yourOpel Service Partner. For gasvehicles we recommend an OpelRepairer authorised for servicing gasvehicles.All Opel Service Partners providefirst-class service at reasonableprices. Experienced mechanicstrained by Opel work according tospecific Opel instructions.The customer literature pack shouldalways be kept ready to hand in thevehicle.

Using this manual● This manual describes all options

and features available for thismodel. Certain descriptions,including those for display andmenu functions, may not apply toyour vehicle due to modelvariant, country specifications,special equipment oraccessories.

● The "In brief" section will give youan initial overview.

● The table of contents at thebeginning of this manual andwithin each section shows wherethe information is located.

● The index will enable you tosearch for specific information.

● This Owner's Manual depicts left-hand drive vehicles. Operation issimilar for right-hand drivevehicles.

● The Owner's Manual uses theengine identifier code. Thecorresponding sales designationand engineering code can befound in the section "Technicaldata".

● Directional data, e.g. left or right,or front or back, always relate tothe direction of travel.

● Displays may not support yourspecific language.

● Display messages and interiorlabelling are written in boldletters.

4 Introduction

Danger, Warnings andCautions

9 Danger

Text marked 9 Danger providesinformation on risk of fatal injury.Disregarding this information mayendanger life.

9 Warning

Text marked 9 Warning providesinformation on risk of accident orinjury. Disregarding thisinformation may lead to injury.

Caution

Text marked Caution providesinformation on possible damage tothe vehicle. Disregarding thisinformation may lead to vehicledamage.

SymbolsPage references are indicated with 3.3 means "see page".Page references and index entriesrefer to the indented headings givenin the section table of content.We wish you many hours ofpleasurable driving.Adam Opel GmbH

Introduction 5

6 In brief

In brief

Initial drive information

Vehicle unlocking

Press c to unlock the doors and loadcompartment. Open the doors bypulling the handles. To open thetailgate, push the touchpad switchbelow the handle.Radio remote control 3 21, Centrallocking system 3 22, Loadcompartment 3 25.

Seat adjustmentLongitudinal adjustment

Pull handle, slide seat, releasehandle. Try to move the seat back andforth to ensure that the seat is lockedin place.Seat position 3 38, Manual seatadjustment 3 39, Power seatadjustment 3 41.

In brief 7

Backrest inclination

Pull lever, adjust inclination andrelease lever. Allow the seat toengage audibly.Seat position 3 38, Manual seatadjustment 3 39, Power seatadjustment 3 41.

Seat height

Lever pumping motionup : seat higherdown : seat lower

Seat position 3 38, Manual seatadjustment 3 39, Power seatadjustment 3 41.

Seat inclination

Lever pumping motionup : front end higherdown : front end lower

Seat position 3 38, Manual seatadjustment 3 39, Power seatadjustment 3 41.

8 In brief

Head restraint adjustment

Press release button, adjust height,engage.Head restraints 3 36.

Seat belt

Pull out the seat belt and fasten in beltbuckle. The seat belt must not betwisted and must fit close against thebody. The backrest must not be tiltedback too far (maximum approx. 25 °).To unfasten belt, press red button onbelt buckle.Seat position 3 38, Seat belts3 50, Airbag system 3 54.

Mirror adjustmentInterior mirror

To adjust the mirror, move the mirrorhousing in the desired direction.Manual anti-dazzle interior mirror3 30, Automatic anti-dazzle interiormirror 3 30.

In brief 9

Exterior mirrors

Select the relevant exterior mirror byturning the control to the left (L) orright (R). Adjust respective mirror bytilting the four-way control.Convex exterior mirrors 3 29,Electric adjustment 3 29, Foldingexterior mirrors 3 29, Heatedexterior mirrors 3 30.

Steering wheel adjustment

Unlock the lever, adjust the steeringwheel, then engage the lever andensure it is fully locked.Do not adjust the steering wheelunless the vehicle is stationary andthe steering wheel lock has beenreleased.Airbag system 3 54, Ignitionpositions 3 199.

10 In brief

Instrument panel overview

In brief 11

1 Power windows ..................... 312 Exterior mirrors ..................... 293 Cruise control ..................... 220

Speed limiter ....................... 222

Adaptive cruise control ....... 223

Forward collision alert ......... 2304 Turn and lane-change

signals, headlight flash,low beam and high beam,high beam assist ................ 135

Exit lighting ......................... 138

Parking lights ...................... 136

Buttons for DriverInformation Centre .............. 117

5 Instruments ........................ 1036 Driver Information Centre .... 1177 Steering wheel controls ....... 978 Windscreen wiper,

windscreen washersystem, headlight washersystem, rear wiper, rearwasher system ...................... 98

9 Info-Display ........................ 121

10 Central locking system .......... 22

Hazard warning flashers .... 135

Sport mode ........................ 219

Tour mode .......................... 219

Fuel selector ....................... 105

Control indicator for airbagdeactivation ........................ 112

11 Anti-theft alarm systemstatus LED ........................... 26

12 Centre air vents .................. 19613 Side air vents ...................... 19614 Glovebox .............................. 6615 Climate control system ........ 19016 USB input .............................. 10

Power outlet ........................ 10117 Selector lever, manual

transmission ....................... 213

Automatic transmission ...... 21018 Traction Control system ..... 217

Electronic Stability Control . 218

Lane departure warning ..... 24519 Electric parking brake ......... 214

20 Manual parking brake ......... 21421 Parking assist systems ....... 235

Eco button for stop-startsystem ................................. 202

22 Ignition switch withsteering wheel lock ............ 199

23 Horn ..................................... 98

Driver airbag ........................ 5724 Bonnet release lever .......... 26125 Fuse box ............................ 279

Storage compartment ........... 6826 Light switch ........................ 130

Headlight rangeadjustment ......................... 132

Front fog lights ................... 135

Rear fog light ...................... 136

Instrument illumination ....... 13727 Steering wheel adjustment . . 97

12 In brief

In brief 13

Exterior lighting

AUTO : automatic light controlswitches automaticallybetween daytime runninglight and headlight

8 : sidelights9 : headlights

Automatic light control 3 131.Fog lightsPress light switch:> : front fog lightsr : rear fog light

Lighting 3 130.

Headlight flash, high beam andlow beam

headlight flash : pull leverhigh beam : push leverlow beam : push or pull lever

High beam 3 131.Headlight flash 3 132.LED headlights 3 134.High beam assist 3 134.

Turn and lane-change signals

lever up : right turn signallever down : left turn signal

Turn and lane-change signals3 135, Parking lights 3 136.

14 In brief

Hazard warning flashers

Operated by pressing ¨.Hazard warning flashers 3 135.

Horn

Press j.

Washer and wiper systemsWindscreen wiper

HI : fastLO : slowINT : interval wiping or automatic

wiping with rain sensorOFF : off

For a single wipe when thewindscreen wiper is off, press thelever down to position 1x.Windscreen wiper 3 98, Wiperblade replacement 3 267.

In brief 15

Windscreen washer

Pull lever.Windscreen washer system 3 98,Washer fluid 3 265.

Rear window wiper

Press the rocker switch to activate therear window wiper:upper switch : continuous

operationlower switch : intermittent

operationmiddle position : off

Rear window washer

Push lever.Washer fluid is sprayed on the rearwindow and the wiper wipes a fewtimes.Rear window wiper/washer 3 99.

16 In brief

Climate controlHeated rear window, heatedexterior mirrors

The heating is operated by pressingÜ.Heated rear window 3 33.

Demisting and defrosting thewindows

Press V.Set the temperature control to thehighest level.Heated rear window Ü on.Climate control system 3 190.

TransmissionManual transmission

Reverse: with the vehicle stationary,depress clutch pedal, press therelease button on the selector leverand engage the gear.Manual transmission 3 213.

In brief 17

Automatic transmission

P : park positionR : reverseN : neutral modeD : automatic modeM : manual mode< : upshift] : downshift

The selector lever can only be movedout of P when the ignition is on andthe brake pedal is applied. To engageP or R, press the release button.Automatic transmission 3 210.

Starting offCheck before starting off● Tyre pressure and condition

3 283, 3 320.● Engine oil level and fluid levels

3 262.● All windows, mirrors, exterior

lighting and number plates arefree from dirt, snow and ice andare operational.

● Proper position of mirrors, seats,and seat belts 3 29, 3 38,3 51.

● Brake function at low speed,particularly if the brakes are wet.

Starting the engine

● Turn key to position 1.● Move the steering wheel slightly

to release the steering wheellock.

● Operate clutch and brake pedal.● Automatic transmission: operate

brake pedal and move selectorlever to P or N.

● Do not operate accelerator pedal.

18 In brief

● Diesel engines: turn the key toposition 2 for preheating and waituntil control indicator !extinguishes.

● Turn key to position 3 andrelease.

Starting the engine 3 200.

Stop-start system

If the vehicle is at a low speed or at astandstill and certain conditions arefulfilled, activate an Autostop asfollows:● Depress the clutch pedal.● Engage neutral gear.● Release the clutch pedal.

An Autostop is indicated by theneedle at the AUTOSTOP position inthe tachometer.To restart the engine, depress theclutch pedal again. A restart isindicated by the needle at the idlespeed position in the tachometer.

Stop-start system 3 202.

In brief 19

Parking

9 Warning

● Do not park the vehicle on aneasily ignitable surface. Thehigh temperature of theexhaust system could ignite thesurface.

● Always apply the parkingbrake. Activate the manualparking brake without pressingthe release button. Apply asfirmly as possible on a downhillslope or uphill slope. Depressbrake pedal at the same time toreduce operating force.For vehicles with electricparking brake, pull switch m forapprox. one second.The electric parking brake isapplied when control indicatorm illuminates 3 112.

● Switch off the engine.● If the vehicle is on a level

surface or uphill slope, engagefirst gear or set the selector

lever to position P beforeremoving the ignition key. Onan uphill slope, turn the frontwheels away from the kerb.If the vehicle is on a downhillslope, engage reverse gear orset the selector lever to positionP before removing the ignitionkey. Turn the front wheelstowards the kerb.

● Close the windows.● Remove the ignition key from

the ignition switch. Turn thesteering wheel until thesteering wheel lock is felt toengage.For vehicles with automatictransmission, the key can onlybe removed when the selectorlever is in position P.

● Lock the vehicle by pressing e onthe radio remote control.

● Activate the anti-theft alarmsystem 3 26.

● The engine cooling fans may runafter the engine has beenswitched off 3 261.

Caution

After running at high enginespeeds or with high engine loads,operate the engine briefly at a lowload or run in neutral forapprox. 30 seconds beforeswitching off, in order to protectthe turbocharger.

Keys, locks 3 20, Laying the vehicleup for a long period of time 3 260.

20 Keys, doors and windows

Keys, doors andwindows

Keys, locks ................................... 20Keys .......................................... 20Car Pass .................................... 21Radio remote control ................. 21Memorised settings ................... 22Central locking system .............. 22Automatic locking ...................... 24Child locks ................................. 25

Doors ........................................... 25Load compartment .................... 25

Vehicle security ............................ 26Anti-theft locking system ........... 26Anti-theft alarm system .............. 26Immobiliser ................................ 28

Exterior mirrors ............................ 29Convex shape ........................... 29Electric adjustment .................... 29Folding mirrors .......................... 29Heated mirrors ........................... 30

Interior mirrors ............................. 30Manual anti-dazzle .................... 30Automatic anti-dazzle ................ 30

Windows ...................................... 31Windscreen ............................... 31Manual windows ........................ 31Power windows ......................... 31Heated rear window .................. 33Sun visors .................................. 33Roller blinds ............................... 34

Roof ............................................. 34Glass panel ............................... 34

Keys, locksKeys

Caution

Do not attach heavy or bulky itemsto the ignition key.

Replacement keysThe key number is specified in theCar Pass or on a detachable tag.The key number must be quotedwhen ordering replacement keys as itis a component of the immobilisersystem.Locks 3 300.The code number of the adapter forthe locking wheel nuts is specified ona card. It must be quoted whenordering a replacement adapter.Wheel changing 3 291.

Keys, doors and windows 21

Key with foldaway key section

Press button to extend. To fold thekey, first press the button.

Car PassThe Car Pass contains securityrelated vehicle data and shouldtherefore be kept in a safe place.When the vehicle is taken to aworkshop, this vehicle data is neededin order to perform certain operations.

Radio remote control

Used to operate:● central locking system● anti-theft locking system● anti-theft alarm system● power windows

The radio remote control has a rangeof approx. 20 metres. It can berestricted by external influences. Thehazard warning flashers confirmoperation.Handle with care, protect frommoisture and high temperatures andavoid unnecessary operation.

FaultIf the central locking system cannotbe operated with the radio remotecontrol, it may be due to the following:● The range is exceeded.● The battery voltage is too low.● Frequent, repeated operation of

the radio remote control while notin range, which will require re-synchronisation.

● Overload of the central lockingsystem by operating at frequentintervals, the power supply isinterrupted for a short time.

● Interference from higher-powerradio waves from other sources.

Unlocking 3 22.

Basic settingsSome settings can be changed in theSettings menu in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Radio remote control batteryreplacementReplace the battery as soon as therange reduces.


Batteries do not belong in householdwaste. They must be disposed of atan appropriate recycling collectionpoint.

Key with foldaway key section

Extend the key and open the unit.Replace the battery (battery typeCR 2032), paying attention to theinstallation position. Close the unitand synchronise.

Key with fixed key sectionHave the battery replaced by aworkshop.

Memorised settingsWhenever the ignition is switched off,the following settings areautomatically memorised by theremote control unit:● lighting● Infotainment system● central locking system● Sport mode settings● comfort settings

The saved settings are automaticallyused the next time the ignition isswitched on with the memorised keyof the remote control unit 3 199.A precondition is that Personalisationby Driver is activated in the personalsettings of the Info-Display. This must

be set for each remote control unitwhich is used. The status change isavailable only after locking andunlocking the vehicle.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Central locking systemUnlocks and locks doors, loadcompartment and fuel filler flap.A pull on an interior door handleunlocks the respective door. Pullingthe handle once more opens the door.NoteIn the event of an accident in whichairbags or belt pretensioners aredeployed, the vehicle isautomatically unlocked.NoteA short time after unlocking with theremote control, the doors arerelocked automatically if no door hasbeen opened.


Unlocking

Press c.Two settings are selectable:● To unlock only the driver's door,

load compartment and fuel fillerflap, press c once. To unlock alldoors, press c twice.

● Press c once to unlock all doors,load compartment and fuel fillerflap.

The setting can be changed in theSettings menu in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

The setting can be saved for the keybeing used. Memorised settings3 22.

LockingClose doors, load compartment andfuel filler flap.

Press e.If the driver's door is not closedproperly, the central locking systemwill not work.

Unlocking and opening thetailgate

Press c when the ignition is off. Thetailgate is released to be unlockedand opened by pushing the touchpadswitch below the handle.

Central locking buttonsLocks or unlocks all doors, the loadcompartment and fuel filler flap fromthe passenger compartment.


Press e to lock.Press c to unlock.

Fault in radio remote controlsystem

Unlocking

Manually unlock the driver's door byturning the key in the lock. Switch onthe ignition and press c to unlock alldoors, load compartment and fuelfiller flap. By switching on the ignition,the anti-theft locking system isdeactivated.

LockingManually lock the driver's door byturning the key in the lock.

Fault in central locking system

UnlockingManually unlock the driver's door byturning the key in the lock. The otherdoors can be opened by pulling theinterior handle twice. The loadcompartment and fuel filler flapcannot be opened. To deactivate theanti-theft locking system, switch onthe ignition 3 26.

LockingPush inside locking knob of all doorsexcept driver's door. Then close thedriver's door and lock it from theoutside with the key. The fuel filler flapand tailgate cannot be locked.

Automatic lockingThis security feature can beconfigured to automatically lock alldoors, load compartment and fuelfiller flap as soon as a certain speedis exceeded.Settings can be changed in theSettings menu in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.


The settings can be saved for the keybeing used 3 22.

Child locks

9 Warning

Use the child locks wheneverchildren are occupying the rearseats.

Using a key or suitable screwdriver,turn the child lock in the rear door tothe horizontal position. The doorcannot be opened from the inside. Fordeactivation turn the child lock to thevertical position.

DoorsLoad compartmentTailgate

Opening

After unlocking, push the touchpadswitch under the tailgate mouldingand open the tailgate.Central locking system 3 22.

Closing

Use the interior handle.Do not push the touchpad switchunder the tailgate moulding whilstclosing as this will unlock the tailgateagain.Central locking system 3 22.


General hints for operatingtailgate

9 Danger

Do not drive with the tailgate openor ajar, e.g. when transportingbulky objects, since toxic exhaustgases, which cannot be seen orsmelled, could enter the vehicle.This can cause unconsciousnessand even death.

Caution

Before opening the tailgate, checkoverhead obstructions, e.g. agarage door, to avoid damage tothe tailgate. Always check themoving area above and behind thetailgate.

NoteThe installation of certain heavyaccessories onto the tailgate mayaffect its ability to remain open.

Vehicle securityAnti-theft locking system

9 Warning

Do not use the system if there arepeople in the vehicle! The doorscannot be unlocked from theinside.

The system deadlocks all the doors.All doors must be closed otherwisethe system cannot be activated.Unlocking the vehicle disables themechanical anti-theft locking system.This is not possible with the centrallocking button.

Activating

Press e on the radio remote controltwice within 5 seconds.

Anti-theft alarm systemThe anti-theft alarm system iscombined with the anti-theft lockingsystem.It monitors:● doors, tailgate, bonnet● passenger compartment

including adjoining loadcompartment


● vehicle inclination, e.g. if it israised

● ignition

Activation● Self-activated 30 seconds after

locking the vehicle (initialisationof the system).

● Directly by pressing e on theradio remote control once moreafter locking.

NoteChanges to the vehicle interior suchas the use of seat covers, and openwindows or sunroof, could impair thefunction of passenger compartmentmonitoring.

Activation without monitoring ofpassenger compartment andvehicle inclination

Switch off the monitoring ofpassenger compartment and vehicleinclination when animals are beingleft in the vehicle, because of highvolume ultrasonic signals or

movements triggering the alarm. Alsoswitch off when the vehicle is on aferry or train.1. Close tailgate, bonnet and

windows.2. Press o. LED in the button

illuminates for a maximum of tenminutes.

3. Close doors.4. Activate the anti-theft alarm

system.Status message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.

Status LED


Status LED is integrated into thesensor on top of the instrument panel.Status during the first 30 seconds ofanti-theft alarm system activation:LED illuminates : test, arming delayLED flashesquickly

: doors, tailgate orbonnet notcompletely closed,or system fault

Status after system is armed:LED flashesslowly

: system is armed

Seek the assistance of a workshop inthe event of faults.

DeactivationUnlocking the vehicle deactivates theanti-theft alarm system.

AlarmWhen triggered, the alarm hornsounds and the hazard warning lightsflash simultaneously. The numberand duration of alarm signals arestipulated by legislation.

The alarm can be silenced bypressing any button on the radioremote control or by switching on theignition.The anti-theft alarm system can bedeactivated only by pressing c or byswitching on the ignition.A triggered alarm, which has not beeninterrupted by the driver, will beindicated by the hazard warninglights. They will flash quickly threetimes when the vehicle is nextunlocked with the radio remotecontrol. Additionally, a warningmessage is displayed in the DriverInformation Centre after switching onthe ignition.Vehicle messages 3 122.If the vehicle's battery is to bedisconnected (e.g. for maintenancework), the alarm siren must bedeactivated as follows: switch theignition on then off, then disconnectthe vehicle's battery within15 seconds.

ImmobiliserThe system is part of the ignitionswitch and checks whether thevehicle is allowed to be started withthe key being used.The immobiliser is activatedautomatically after the key has beenremoved from the ignition switch.If the control indicator d flashes whenthe ignition is on, there is a fault in thesystem; the engine cannot be started.Switch off the ignition and repeat thestart attempt.If the control indicator continuesflashing, attempt to start the engineusing the spare key and seek theassistance of a workshop.NoteThe immobiliser does not lock thedoors. You should always lock thevehicle after leaving it and switch onthe anti-theft alarm system 3 22,3 26.

Control indicator d 3 116.


Exterior mirrorsConvex shapeThe convex exterior mirror containsan aspherical area and reduces blindspots. The shape of the mirror makesobjects appear smaller, which willaffect the ability to estimatedistances.Side blind spot alert 3 238.

Electric adjustment

Select the relevant exterior mirror byturning the control to left (L) or right(R). Adjust respective mirror by tiltingthe four-way control.In position 0 no mirror is selected.

Folding mirrors

For pedestrian safety, the exteriormirrors will swing out of their normalmounting position if they are struckwith sufficient force. Reposition themirror by applying slight pressure tothe mirror housing.

Electric folding

Turn control to 0, then push thecontrol down. Both exterior mirrorswill fold.Push the control down again - bothexterior mirrors return to their originalposition.If an electrically folded mirror ismanually extended, pressing downthe control will only electrically extendthe other mirror.


Heated mirrors

Operated by pressing Ü.Heating works with the enginerunning and is switched offautomatically after a short time.

Interior mirrorsManual anti-dazzle

To reduce dazzle, adjust the lever onthe underside of the mirror housing.

Automatic anti-dazzle

Dazzle from following vehicles atnight is automatically reduced.


WindowsWindscreenHeat-reflecting windscreenThe heat-reflecting windscreen has acoating which reflects solar radiation.Also data signals, e.g. from tollstations, might be reflected.

The marked areas on the windscreenare not covered with the coating.Devices for electronic data recordingand fee payment must be attached inthese areas. Otherwise datarecording malfunctions may occur.

Windscreen stickersDo not attach stickers such as tollroad stickers or similar on thewindscreen in the area of the interiormirror. Otherwise the detection zoneof the sensor and the view area of thecamera in the mirror housing could berestricted.

Windscreen replacement

Caution

If the vehicle has a front-lookingcamera sensor for the driverassistance systems, it is veryimportant that any windscreenreplacement is performedaccurately according to Opelspecifications. Otherwise, thesesystems may not work properlyand there is a risk of unexpectedbehaviour and/or messages fromthese systems.

Manual windowsThe door windows can be opened orclosed with the window cranks.

Power windows

9 Warning

Take care when operating thepower windows. Risk of injury,particularly to children.If there are children on the rearseats, switch on the child safetysystem for the power windows.Keep a close watch on thewindows when closing them.Ensure that nothing becomestrapped in them as they move.

Switch on ignition to operate powerwindows. Retained power off 3 200.


Operate the switch for the respectivewindow by pushing to open or pullingto close.Pushing or pulling gently to the firstdetent: window moves up or down aslong as the switch is operated.Pushing or pulling firmly to the seconddetent and then releasing: windowmoves up or down automatically withsafety function enabled. To stopmovement, operate the switch oncemore in the same direction.

Safety functionIf the window glass encountersresistance above the middle of thewindow during automatic closing, it isimmediately stopped and openedagain.

Override safety functionIn the event of closing difficulties dueto frost or the like, switch on theignition, then pull the switch to the firstdetent and hold. The window movesup without safety function enabled.To stop movement, release theswitch.

Child safety system for rearwindows

Press z to deactivate rear doorpower windows, the LED illuminates.To activate, press z again.

Operating windows from outsideThe windows can be operatedremotely from outside the vehicle.


Press and hold c to open windows.Press and hold e to close windows.Release button to stop windowmovement.If the windows are fully opened orclosed, the hazard warning lights willflash twice.

OverloadIf the windows are repeatedlyoperated within short intervals, thewindow operation is disabled forsome time.

Initialising the power windowsIf the windows cannot be closedautomatically (e.g. afterdisconnecting the vehicle battery), awarning message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.Vehicle messages 3 122.Activate the window electronics asfollows:1. Close doors.2. Switch on ignition.3. Pull switch until the window is

closed and keep pulling foradditional two seconds.

4. Repeat for each window.

Heated rear window

Operated by pressing Ü.Heating works with the enginerunning and is switched offautomatically after a short time.Depending on the engine type, theheated rear window comes onautomatically when the diesel particlefilter is being cleaned.

Sun visorsThe sun visors can be folded down orswivelled to the side to preventdazzling.


The cover of the mirrors should beclosed when driving.A ticket holder is located on thebackside of the sun visor.

Roller blinds

To reduce sunlight at the second rowseats, pull the blind upwards usingthe grip and engage it at the top of thedoor frame.

RoofGlass panelPanorama roof

Pull the slider to open the cover of thepanorama roof.Push the slider to cover the panoramaroof.

SunblindThe sunblind above the rear seats iselectrically operated.

G : openH : close

Press G or H gently to the firstdetent: the sunblind is opened orclosed as long as the switch isoperated.Press G or H firmly to the seconddetent and then release: the sunblindis opened or closed automatically. Tostop movement, operate the switchonce more.


Safety functionIf the sunblind encounters resistanceduring automatic closing, it isimmediately stopped and openedagain.

Function standbyIn ignition switch position 1 thesunblind is operational 3 199.

Initialising after a power failureAfter a power failure, it may only bepossible to operate the sunblind to alimited extent. Initialise the system asfollows:1. Turn key in ignition switch to

position 1.2. Press G (open) twice gently to the

first detent, the sunblind opensslightly.

3. Immediately press H (close)twice gently to the first detent, thesunblind closes slightly.After step 3 the sunblind is ininitialising mode without safetyfunction.

4. Press G (open) gently to the firstdetent until the sunblind iscompletely opened.

5. Press H (close) gently to the firstdetent until the sunblind iscompletely closed.

After this procedure, the sunblind isinitialised with safety functionactivated.When G or H is pressed firmly to thesecond detent during initialising, theprocedure is cancelled.

36 Seats, restraints

Seats, restraints

Head restraints ............................ 36Active head restraints ................ 37

Front seats ................................... 38Seat position .............................. 38Manual seat adjustment ............ 39Power seat adjustment .............. 41Armrest ...................................... 42Heating ...................................... 43

Rear seats ................................... 44Second row seats ...................... 44Third row seats .......................... 48

Seat belts ..................................... 50Three-point seat belt ................. 51

Airbag system .............................. 54Front airbag system ................... 57Side airbag system .................... 58Curtain airbag system ............... 58Airbag deactivation .................... 59

Child restraints ............................. 60Child restraint systems .............. 60Child restraint installationlocations ................................... 63

Head restraints

Position

9 Warning

Only drive with the head restraintset to the proper position.

The upper edge of the head restraintshould be at upper head level. If thisis not possible for extremely tallpeople, set to highest position, andset to lowest position for small people.

Adjustment

Head restraints on front seats

Height adjustmentPress release button, adjust height,engage.

Seats, restraints 37

Horizontal adjustment

To adjust horizontally, pull the headrestraint forwards. It engages inseveral positions.To return to its rearmost position, pullfully forwards and release.

Head restraints on rear seats

Height adjustmentPull the head restraint upwards orpress the catch to release and pushthe head restraint downwards.

RemovalPress both catches, pull the headrestraint upwards and remove.

Active head restraintsIn the event of a rear-end impact, thefront parts of the active headrestraints are moved slightly

forwards. Thus the head is supportedso that the risk of whiplash injury isreduced.NoteApproved accessories may only beattached if the seat is not in use.


Front seatsSeat position

9 Warning

Only drive with the seat correctlyadjusted.

9 Warning

Never adjust seats while driving asthey could move uncontrollably.

9 Danger

Do not sit closer than 25 cm to thesteering wheel, to permit safeairbag deployment.

9 Warning

Never store any objects under theseats.

● Sit with buttocks as far backagainst the backrest as possible.Adjust the distance between theseat and the pedals so that legsare slightly angled when pressingthe pedals. Slide the frontpassenger seat as far back aspossible.

● Set seat height high enough tohave a clear field of vision on allsides and of all displayinstruments. There should be atleast one hand of clearancebetween head and the roofframe. Your thighs should restlightly on the seat withoutpressing into it.

● Sit with shoulders as far backagainst the backrest as possible.Set the backrest rake so that it ispossible to easily reach thesteering wheel with arms slightlybent. Maintain contact betweenshoulders and the backrest whenturning the steering wheel. Donot angle the backrest too farback. We recommend amaximum rake of approx. 25°.

● Adjust seat and steering wheel ina way that the wrist rests on topof the steering wheel while thearm is fully extended andshoulders are on the backrest.

● Adjust the steering wheel 3 97.● Adjust the head restraint 3 36.● Adjust the height of the seat belt

3 51.● Adjust the thigh support so that

there is a space approx. twofingers wide between the edge ofthe seat and the hollow of theknee.

● Adjust the lumbar support so thatit supports the natural shape ofthe spine.


Manual seat adjustmentDrive only with engaged seats andbackrests.

Longitudinal adjustment

Pull handle, slide seat, releasehandle. Try to move the seat back andforth to ensure that the seat is lockedin place.


Pull lever, adjust inclination andrelease lever. Allow the backrest toengage audibly.

Seat height

Lever pumping motionup : seat higherdown : seat lower


Seat inclination

Lever pumping motionup : front end higherdown : front end lower

Lumbar support

Adjust lumbar support using the four-way switch to suit personalrequirements.Moving support up and down: pushswitch up or down.Increasing and decreasing support:push switch forwards or backwards.

Adjustable thigh support

Pull the lever and slide the thighsupport.


Power seat adjustment

9 Warning

Care must be taken whenoperating the power seats. Thereis a risk of injury, particularly forchildren. Objects could becometrapped.Keep a close watch on the seatswhen adjusting them. Vehiclepassengers should be informedaccordingly.

Longitudinal adjustment

Move switch forwards/backwards.

Seat height

Move switch upwards/downwards.

Seat inclination

Move front of switch upwards/downwards.


Turn switch forwards/backwards.


Lumbar support

Adjust lumbar support using the four-way switch to suit personalrequirements.Moving support up and down: pushswitch up or down.Increasing and decreasing support:push switch forwards or backwards.

Adjustable thigh support

Pull the lever and slide the thighsupport.

OverloadIf the seat setting is electricallyoverloaded, the power supply isautomatically cut-off for a short time.

ArmrestBase armrest

The armrest can be slid forwards.


FlexConsole armrest

The armrest can be moved in a centreconsole. Pull the handle to slide thearmrest.There are two storages, a storagedrawer and a movable cupholder inthe armrest console.Armrest storage 3 69.

Removing the armrestFlex console armrest can beremoved.

Press fastenings inward and folddown locking mechanism at the rearend of the armrest.

Pull the handle in front of the armrestand slide armrest rearwards out of theconsole.Installation in reverse order.

Heating

Adjust heating to the desired settingby pressing ß for the respective seatone or more times. The controlindicator in the button indicates thesetting.Prolonged use of the highest settingfor people with sensitive skin is notrecommended.


Seat heating is operational whenengine is running and during anAutostop.Stop-start system 3 202.

Rear seatsSecond row seats

9 Warning

When seats or backrests ofsecond and third seat row arebeing adjusted or folded, keephands and feet away from themoving area.Never store objects under theseats.Never adjust seats while driving asthey could move uncontrollably.Drive only with engaged seats andbackrests.

Base seats

Seat positioningEach seat of the second seat row canbe individually moved forward orbackward.

Pull handle, slide seat, releasehandle and allow seat to engage.The seats can be engaged inintermediate positions.

Seat backrestsThe backrest inclination of each seatcan be individually adjusted in threepositions.


Pull the loop, adjust inclination,release strap and allow backrest toengage.

9 Warning

Use vertical position of thebackrest only for increasedluggage volume and not asseating position.

Load compartment, folding down thebackrests 3 79.

Easy entry functionTo permit an easy entrance to theseats of the third row, the outer seatsof the second row can be tilted.

Pull release lever, fold backrest andmove the seat to the front.

Folding back easy entryFirst move seat to desired positionand then raise backrest.

9 Warning

When folding up, ensure that theseat is securely locked in positionbefore driving. Failure to do somay result in personal injury in theevent of hard braking or a collision.

Lounge seatsTwo types of use are possible:

Normal seats, all three seats areusable and individually adjustable.Lounge seats, only outer seats areusable but with most comfortableadjustment.

Seat positioning

In normal position, the three seats ofthe second seat row can beindividually moved in longitudinaldirection.Pull handle under the seat, slide seat,release handle and allow seat toengage.


In lounge position, the outer seats areadditionally movable in transversedirection when the centre seatbackrest is folded to an armrest.The seats can be engaged inintermediate positions.Change from normal seat position tolounge seat position● Push down head restraint of

centre seat by pressing the catch3 36.

● Fold down the centre backrest bypulling the loop.

● Push the left and right buttonsnear the centre head restraintand fold in the outer backrest

parts, to be used as an armrest.Engage backrest parts in armrestposition.

● Pull the handle under each outerseat and slide seats backwards.In the rear area the seats move intransverse direction. Allow seatto engage.This is the most comfortableseating position for the outerseats.

Caution

With seats in lounge position:● Do not use easy entry function

3 44.● Do not fold down backrests of

the outer seats.● Do not fold up centre backrest.● Do not fold up or down the

seats in the third row 3 48.This would damage the seats.


9 Warning

Move seats only to lounge positionif seats in the third row are notoccupied.

Change from lounge seat position tonormal seat position

● Pull the handle under each outerseat and slide seats to forwardposition.

● Push the left and right buttonsnear the centre head restraintand fold back both armrest partsto the centre backrest.

● Fold up centre backrest. Adjustposition by pulling the strap.

Caution

Before folding up the centre seatbackrest make sure that thearmrest parts are folded down.

Ensure that all positions are engagedcorrectly.

Seat backrestsThe backrest inclination can beindividually adjusted to threepositions.

Pull the loop, adjust inclination,release strap and allow backrest toengage.

9 Warning

Use vertical position of thebackrest only for increasedluggage volume and not asseating position.

Load compartment, folding down thebackrests 3 79.


Easy entry functionTo permit an easy entrance to theseats of the third row, the outer seatsof the second row can be tilted.Pull release lever, fold backrest andmove the seat towards the front.

Caution

With seats in lounge position:● Do not use easy entry function.● Do not pull strap to adjust

backrest inclination.This would damage the seats.

Folding back easy entryFirst move seat to desired positionand then raise backrest.

9 Warning

When folding up, ensure that theseat is securely locked in positionbefore driving. Failure to do somay result in personal injury in theevent of heavy braking or collision.

Third row seats

9 Warning

When seats or backrests ofsecond and third seat row arebeing adjusted or folded, keephands and feet away from themoving area.Never store objects under theseats.Never adjust seats while driving asthey could move uncontrollably.Drive only with engaged seats andbackrests.

Caution

Before setting up or folding downseats, all components must beremoved from the side rails andfrom the lashing eyes.Lashing eyes must be in storedposition.

The seats in the third row can befolded down to the vehicle floor if theyare not required, or for increasing thesize of the load compartment.The seats in the third row can only beused if the second seat row is not inthe lounge position.


Setting up the seats● Fold in interior protection mat

3 83 and remove loadcompartment cover 3 81.

● Insert the latch plate of the seatbelt on each side into the pocketthat is mounted at the belt.

● Pull up the seat by the upperloop, fold out and allow seat toengage in upright position.

Folding down the seats in thevehicle floor● Push down head restraint by

pressing the catch 3 36.● Insert the latch plate of the seat

belt on each side into the pocketthat is mounted at the belt.

● Pull the lower loop,simultaneously swing thebackrest forwards until the seat islowered into the vehicle floor.

● Install the interior protection mat3 83 and load compartmentcover 3 81.


Seat belts

The seat belts are locked duringheavy acceleration or deceleration ofthe vehicle, holding the occupants inthe seat position. Therefore the risk ofinjury is considerably reduced.

9 Warning

Fasten seat belt before each trip.In the event of an accident, peoplenot wearing seat belts endangertheir fellow occupants andthemselves.

Seat belts are designed to be used byonly one person at a time. Childrestraint system 3 60.Periodically check all parts of the beltsystem for damage, soiling andproper functionality.Have damaged componentsreplaced. After an accident, have thebelts and triggered belt pretensionersreplaced by a workshop.NoteMake sure that the belts are notdamaged by shoes or sharp-edgedobjects or trapped. Prevent dirt fromgetting into the belt retractors.

Seat belt reminderEach seat is equipped with a seat beltreminder, indicated for front seats bycontrol indicator X in the tachometer3 111, or for rear seats by symbolsX or > in the Driver InformationCentre 3 117.

Belt force limitersOn the front seats, stress on the bodyis reduced by the gradual release ofthe belt during a collision.

Belt pretensionersIn the event of a head-on or rear-endcollision of a certain severity, the frontseat belts are tightened.

9 Warning

Incorrect handling (e.g. removal orfitting of belts) can trigger the beltpretensioners.

Deployment of the belt pretensionersis indicated by continuous illuminationof control indicator v 3 111.Triggered belt pretensioners must bereplaced by a workshop. Beltpretensioners can only be triggeredonce.NoteDo not affix or install accessories orother objects that may interfere withthe operation of the beltpretensioners. Do not make anymodifications to belt pretensionercomponents as this will invalidatethe operating permit of your vehicle.


Three-point seat beltFasten

Withdraw the belt from the retractor,guide it untwisted across the bodyand insert the latch plate into thebuckle. Tighten the lap belt regularlywhilst driving by pulling the shoulderbelt.

Loose or bulky clothing prevents thebelt from fitting snugly. Do not placeobjects such as handbags or mobilephones between the belt and yourbody.

9 Warning

The belt must not rest against hardor fragile objects in the pockets ofyour clothing.

Seat belt reminder X, > 3 111,3 117

Height adjustment

1. Pull belt out slightly.2. Shift the height adjuster upwards

or press button to disengage andpush the height adjusterdownwards.


Adjust the height so that the belt liesacross the shoulder. It must not lieacross the throat or upper arm.Do not adjust while driving.

Unfasten

To release belt, press red button onbelt buckle.

Centre seat belt of the secondseat rowThe centre seat is equipped with aparticular three-point seat belt.Pull latch plates with the belt out ofbelt holder in the roof.

Remove lower latch plate fromretainer and click it into left-handbuckle (1) at the centre seat. Guidethe upper latch plate with the belt overthe lap area and the shoulder (do nottwist) and click into right-hand buckle(2) at centre seat.To unfasten the seat belt, first pressthe button on the right-hand buckle(2) and remove upper latch plate.Then press the button on the left-hand buckle (1) and remove lowerlatch plate. The seat belt retractsautomatically.


Push the top latch plate into theretainer. Fold over locked togetherlatch plates against the seat belt.

Insert in the seat belt holder in the roofwith the lower latch plate pointingforward.

Seat belts on the third seat rowThe seat belts on the third seat roware equipped with three point seatbelts.

When seat belts are not used or whenfolding the seats, insert the latch plateof the seat belt on each side into thepocket that is mounted at the belt.If the centre seat of the second seatrow is occupied and the seat belt isfastened, only persons with a body

height up to max. 150 cm are allowedto use the left seat of the third seatrow.There is a warning label on the rearside of the centre belt, when it ispulled out, to inform the passenger onthe left seat of the third seat row.

Using seat belts while pregnant

9 Warning

The lap belt must be positioned aslow as possible across the pelvisto prevent pressure on theabdomen.


Airbag systemThe airbag system consists of anumber of individual systemsdepending on the scope ofequipment.When triggered the airbags inflatewithin milliseconds. They also deflateso quickly that it is often unnoticeableduring the collision.

9 Warning

The airbag system deploys in anexplosive manner, repairs must beperformed by skilled personnelonly.

9 Warning

Adding accessories that changethe vehicle's frame, bumpersystem, height, front end or sidesheet metal, may keep the airbagsystem from working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing anyparts of the front seats, seat belts,

airbag sensing and diagnosticmodule, steering wheel,instrument panel, inner door sealsincluding the speakers, any of theairbag modules, ceiling or pillartrim, front sensors, side impactsensors or airbag wiring.

NoteThe airbag systems and beltpretensioner control electronics arelocated in the centre console area.Do not put any magnetic objects inthis area.Do not affix any objects onto theairbag covers and do not cover themwith other materials. Have damagedcovers replaced by a workshop.Each airbag is triggered only once.Have deployed airbags replaced bya workshop. Furthermore, it may benecessary to have the steeringwheel, the instrument panel, parts ofthe panelling, the door seals,handles and the seats replaced.Do not make any modifications tothe airbag system as this willinvalidate the vehicle operatingpermit.

Control indicator v for airbag systems3 111.

Child restraint systems on frontpassenger seat with airbagsystemsWarning according to ECE R94.02:

EN: NEVER use a rearward-facingchild restraint on a seat protected byan ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it;DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to theCHILD can occur.DE: Nach hinten gerichteteKindersitze NIEMALS auf einem Sitzverwenden, der durch einen davorbefindlichen AKTIVEN AIRBAG


geschützt ist, da dies den TOD oderSCHWERE VERLETZUNGEN DESKINDES zur Folge haben kann.FR: NE JAMAIS utiliser un sièged'enfant orienté vers l'arrière sur unsiège protégé par un COUSSINGONFLABLE ACTIF placé devant lui,sous peine d'infliger desBLESSURES GRAVES, voireMORTELLES à l'ENFANT.ES: NUNCA utilice un sistema deretención infantil orientado haciaatrás en un asiento protegido por unAIRBAG FRONTAL ACTIVO. Peligrode MUERTE o LESIONES GRAVESpara el NIÑO.RU: ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯустанавливать детскоеудерживающее устройство лицомназад на сиденье автомобиля,оборудованном фронтальнойподушкой безопасности, еслиПОДУШКА НЕ ОТКЛЮЧЕНА! Этоможет привести к СМЕРТИ илиСЕРЬЕЗНЫМ ТРАВМАМРЕБЕНКА.

NL: Gebruik NOOIT een achterwaartsgericht kinderzitje op een stoel meteen ACTIEVE AIRBAG ervoor, omDODELIJK of ERNSTIG LETSEL vanhet KIND te voorkomen.DA: Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendtautostol på et forsæde med AKTIVAIRBAG, BARNET kan komme iLIVSFARE eller komme ALVORLIGTTIL SKADE.SV: Använd ALDRIG en bakåtvändbarnstol på ett säte som skyddas meden framförvarande AKTIV AIRBAG.DÖDSFALL eller ALLVARLIGASKADOR kan drabba BARNET.FI: ÄLÄ KOSKAAN sijoita taaksepäinsuunnattua lasten turvaistuintaistuimelle, jonka edessä onAKTIIVINEN TURVATYYNY, LAPSIVOI KUOLLA tai VAMMAUTUAVAKAVASTI.NO: Bakovervendtbarnesikringsutstyr må ALDRI brukespå et sete med AKTIVKOLLISJONSPUTE foran, da det kanføre til at BARNET utsettes forLIVSFARE og fare for ALVORLIGESKADER.

PT: NUNCA use um sistema deretenção para crianças voltado paratrás num banco protegido com umAIRBAG ACTIVO na frente domesmo, poderá ocorrer a PERDA DEVIDA ou FERIMENTOS GRAVES naCRIANÇA.IT: Non usare mai un sistema disicurezza per bambini rivoltoall'indietro su un sedile protetto daAIRBAG ATTIVO di fronte ad esso:pericolo di MORTE o LESIONIGRAVI per il BAMBINO!EL: ΠΟΤΕ μη χρησιμοποιείτε παιδικόκάθισμα ασφαλείας με φορά προς ταπίσω σε κάθισμα που προστατεύεταιαπό μετωπικό ΕΝΕΡΓΟ ΑΕΡΟΣΑΚΟ,διότι το παιδί μπορεί να υποστείΘΑΝΑΣΙΜΟ ή ΣΟΒΑΡΟΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ.PL: NIE WOLNO montować fotelikadziecięcego zwróconego tyłem dokierunku jazdy na fotelu, przedktórym znajduje się WŁĄCZONAPODUSZKA POWIETRZNA.Niezastosowanie się do tegozalecenia może być przyczynąŚMIERCI lub POWAŻNYCHOBRAŻEŃ u DZIECKA.


TR: Arkaya bakan bir çocuk emniyetsistemini KESİNLİKLE önünde birAKTİF HAVA YASTIĞI ilekorunmakta olan bir koltuktakullanmayınız. ÇOCUK ÖLEBİLİRveya AĞIR ŞEKİLDEYARALANABİLİR.UK: НІКОЛИ не використовуйтесистему безпеки для дітей, щовстановлюється обличчям назад,на сидінні з УВІМКНЕНОЮПОДУШКОЮ БЕЗПЕКИ, інакше цеможе призвести до СМЕРТІ чиСЕРЙОЗНОГО ТРАВМУВАННЯДИТИНИ.HU: SOHA ne használjon hátrafelénéző biztonsági gyerekülést előlrőlAKTÍV LÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen,mert a GYERMEK HALÁLÁT vagyKOMOLY SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.HR: NIKADA nemojte koristiti sustavzadržavanja za djecu okrenut premanatrag na sjedalu s AKTIVNIMZRAČNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega,to bi moglo dovesti do SMRTI iliOZBILJNJIH OZLJEDA za DIJETE.SL: NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškegavarnostnega sedeža, obrnjenega vnasprotni smeri vožnje, na sedež z

AKTIVNO ČELNO ZRAČNOBLAZINO, saj pri tem obstajanevarnost RESNIH ali SMRTNIHPOŠKODB za OTROKA.SR: NIKADA ne koristiti bezbednosnisistem za decu u kome su decaokrenuta unazad na sedištu saAKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIMJASTUKOM ispred sedišta zato štoDETE može da NASTRADA ili da seTEŠKO POVREDI.MK: НИКОГАШ не користете детскоседиште свртено наназад наседиште заштитено со АКТИВНОВОЗДУШНО ПЕРНИЧЕ пред него,затоа што детето може ДА ЗАГИНЕили да биде ТЕШКО ПОВРЕДЕНО.BG: НИКОГА не използвайтедетска седалка, гледаща назад,върху седалка, която е защитеначрез АКТИВНА ВЪЗДУШНАВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА пред нея - може дасе стигне до СМЪРТ илиСЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ наДЕТЕТО.RO: Nu utilizaţi NICIODATĂ un scaunpentru copil îndreptat spre partea dinspate a maşinii pe un scaun protejatde un AIRBAG ACTIV în faţa sa;

acest lucru poate duce la DECESULsau VĂTĂMAREA GRAVĂ aCOPILULUI.CS: NIKDY nepoužívejte dětskýzádržný systém instalovaný protisměru jízdy na sedadle, které jechráněno před sedadlem AKTIVNÍMAIRBAGEM. Mohlo by dojít kVÁŽNÉMU PORANĚNÍ nebo ÚMRTÍDÍTĚTE.SK: NIKDY nepoužívajte detskúsedačku otočenú vzad na sedadlechránenom AKTÍVNYM AIRBAGOM,pretože môže dôjsť k SMRTI aleboVÁŽNYM ZRANENIAM DIEŤAŤA.LT: JOKIU BŪDU nemontuokite atgalatgręžtos vaiko tvirtinimo sistemossėdynėje, prieš kurią įrengta AKTYVIORO PAGALVĖ, nes VAIKAS GALIŽŪTI arba RIMTAI SUSIŽALOTI.LV: NEKĀDĀ GADĪJUMĀneizmantojiet uz aizmuguri vērstubērnu sēdeklīti sēdvietā, kas tiekaizsargāta ar tās priekšā uzstādītuAKTĪVU DROŠĪBAS SPILVENU, jopretējā gadījumā BĒRNS var gūtSMAGAS TRAUMAS vai IET BOJĀ.


ET: ÄRGE kasutage tahapoolesuunatud lapseturvaistet istmel, milleees on AKTIIVSE TURVAPADJAGAkaitstud iste, sest see võibpõhjustada LAPSE SURMA võiTÕSISE VIGASTUSE.MT: QATT tuża trażżin għat-tfal lijħares lejn in-naħa ta’ wara fuq sitprotett b’AIRBAG ATTIV quddiemu;dan jista’ jikkawża l-MEWT jewĠRIEĦI SERJI lit-TFAL.GA: Ná húsáid srian sábháilteachtalinbh cúil RIAMH ar shuíochán abhfuil mála aeir ag feidhmiú os achomhair. Tá baol BÁIS nó GORTÚDONA don PHÁISTE ag baint leis.Beyond the warning required byECE R94.02, for safety reasons aforward-facing child restraint systemmust only be used subject to theinstructions and restrictions in thetable 3 63.

9 Danger

Do not use a child restraint systemon the passenger seat with activefront airbag.

The airbag label is located on bothsides of the front passenger sun visor.Airbag deactivation 3 59.

Front airbag systemThe front airbag system consists ofone airbag in the steering wheel andone in the instrument panel on thefront passenger side. These can beidentified by the word AIRBAG.The front airbag system is triggered inthe event of a front-end impact of acertain severity. The ignition must beswitched on.

The inflated airbags cushion theimpact, thereby reducing the risk ofinjury to the upper body and head ofthe front seat occupantsconsiderably.

9 Warning

Optimum protection is onlyprovided when the seat is in theproper position.Seat position 3 38.Keep the area in which the airbaginflates clear of obstructions.Fit the seat belt correctly andengage securely. Only then is theairbag able to protect.


Side airbag system

The side airbag system consists of anairbag in each front seat backrest.This can be identified by the wordAIRBAG.The side airbag system is triggered inthe event of a side impact of a certainseverity. The ignition must beswitched on.

The inflated airbags cushion theimpact, thereby reducing the risk ofinjury to the upper body and pelvis inthe event of a side-on collisionconsiderably.

9 Warning

Keep the area in which the airbaginflates clear of obstructions.

NoteOnly use protective seat covers thathave been approved for the vehicle.Be careful not to cover the airbags.

Curtain airbag systemThe curtain airbag system consists ofan airbag in the roof frame on eachside. This can be identified by theword AIRBAG on the roof pillars.The curtain airbag system is triggeredin the event of a side-on impact of acertain severity. The ignition must beswitched on.

The inflated airbags cushion theimpact, thereby reducing the risk ofinjury to the head in the event of aside-on impact considerably.The curtain airbag system does notprotect passengers on the third seatrow.


9 Warning

Keep the area in which the airbaginflates clear of obstructions.The hooks on the handles in theroof frame are only suitable forhanging up light articles ofclothing, without coat hangers. Donot keep any items in theseclothes.

Airbag deactivationThe front passenger airbag systemhas to be deactivated if a childrestraint system is to be fitted on thisseat. The side airbag and curtainairbag systems, the beltpretensioners and all driver airbagsystems will remain active.

The front passenger airbag systemcan be deactivated via a key-operated switch on the passengerside of the instrument panel.

Use the ignition key to choose theposition:OFF* : front passenger airbag is

deactivated and will notinflate in the event of acollision. Control indicatorOFF* illuminatescontinuously in the centreconsole. A child restraintsystem can be installed inaccordance with the chartChild restraint installationlocations 3 63. No adultperson is allowed to occupythe front passenger seat

ONV : front passenger airbag isactive. A child restraintsystem must not beinstalled

9 Danger

Risk of fatal injury for a child usinga child restraint system on a seatwith activated front passengerairbag.Risk of fatal injury for an adultperson on a seat with deactivatedfront passenger airbag.


If the control indicator ONVilluminates for approx. 60 secondsafter the ignition is switched on, thefront passenger airbag system willinflate in the event of a collision.If both control indicators areilluminated at the same time, there isa system failure. The status of thesystem is not discernible, thereforeno person is allowed to occupy thefront passenger seat. Contact aworkshop immediately.Change status only when the vehicleis stopped with the ignition off.Status remains until the next change.

Control indicator for airbagdeactivation 3 112. Child restraints

Child restraint systems

9 Danger

If using a rear-facing child restraintsystem on the front passengerseat, the airbag system for thefront passenger seat must bedeactivated. This also applies tocertain forward-facing childrestraint systems as indicated inthe tables 3 63.

Airbag deactivation 3 59, Airbag label3 54.We recommend a child restraintsystem which is tailored specifically tothe vehicle. For further information,contact your workshop.Before fastening a child seat adjustthe head restraint to use position3 36.


When a child restraint system is beingused, pay attention to the followingusage and installation instructionsand also those supplied with the childrestraint system.Always comply with local or nationalregulations. In some countries, theuse of child restraint systems isforbidden on certain seats.Child restraint systems can befastened with:● Three-point seat belt● ISOFIX brackets● Top-tether

Three-point seat beltChild restraint systems can befastened by using a three-point seatbelt. Depending on the size of theused child restraint systems, up totwo child restraint systems can beattached to the outboard seats in thesecond row and on the seats in thethird row. 3 63.

ISOFIX brackets

Fasten vehicle-approved ISOFIXchild restraint systems to the ISOFIXbrackets. Specific vehicle ISOFIXchild restraint system positions aremarked in the ISOFIX table 3 63.ISOFIX brackets are indicated by alabel on the backrest.

When using ISOFIX fastened childrestraint systems on the second seatrow, we recommend to adjust theaccordant outer seat in third notchfrom rear end position, regarding tobase seats. Lounge seat, if equipped,must be in normal position 3 44.An i-size child restraint system is anuniversal ISOFIX child restraintsystem according UN Regulation No.129.All i-size child restraint systems canbe used on any vehicle seat suitablefor i-size, i-size table 3 63.Either a Top-tether strap or a supportleg must be used in addition to theISOFIX brackets.


i-size child seats and vehicle seatswith i-size approval are marked withi-size symbol, see illustration.

Top-tether anchorsTop-tether anchors are marked withthe symbol : for a child seat.

In addition to the ISOFIX brackets,fasten the Top-tether strap to theTop-tether anchors.

ISOFIX child restraint systems ofuniversal category positions aremarked in the table by IUF 3 63.

Selecting the right systemThe rear seats are the mostconvenient location to fasten a childrestraint system.Children should travel facingrearwards in the vehicle as long aspossible. This makes sure that thechild's backbone, which is still veryweak, is under less strain in the eventof an accident.Suitable are child restraint systemsthat comply with valid UN ECEregulations. Check local laws andregulations for mandatory use of childrestraint systems.The following child restraints arerecommended for the followingweight classes:Maxi Cosi Cabriofix for children up to13 kg for group 0, group 0+ and DuoPlus for children from 13 kg to 18 kgin group I.

Ensure that the child restraint systemto be installed is compatible with thevehicle type.Ensure that the mounting location ofthe child restraint system within thevehicle is correct, see followingtables.Allow children to enter and exit thevehicle only on the side facing awayfrom the traffic.When the child restraint system is notin use, secure the seat with a seat beltor remove it from the vehicle.NoteDo not affix anything on the childrestraint systems and do not coverthem with any other materials.A child restraint system which hasbeen subjected to stress in anaccident must be replaced.


Child restraint installation locationsPermissible options for fastening a child restraint system with a three-point seat belt

Weight class

On front passenger seatOn outboard seats inthe second row

On centre seatin the secondrow

On seats in thethird rowactivated airbag deactivated airbag

Group 0: up to 10 kg X U1,2 U/L3 X U/L3

Group 0+: up to 13 kg X U1,2 U/L3 X U/L3

Group I: 9 to 18 kg X U1,2 U/L3,4 X U/L3,4

Group II: 15 to 25 kg X X U/L3,4 X U/L3,4

Group III: 22 to 36 kg X X U/L3,4 X U/L3,4

U : universal suitability in conjunction with three-point seat beltL : suitable for particular child restraint systems of the 'specific-vehicle', 'restricted' or 'semi-universal' categories. The

child restraint system must be approved for the specific vehicle type (refer to the vehicle type list of the child restraintsystem)

X : no child restraint system permitted in this weight class1 : move seat forwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest as far as necessary to a vertical position to ensure

that the belt runs forwards from the upper anchorage point2 : move seat upwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest as far as necessary to a vertical position to ensure

that the belt is tight on the buckle side3 : move the respective front seat ahead of the child restraint system forwards as far as necessary4 : adjust the respective headrest as necessary or remove if required


Permissible options for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX bracketsThis table relates to all ISOFIX child restraint systems

Weight class Size class FixtureOn front passengerseat

On outboard seatsin the second row

On centre seat inthe second row

On the seats inthe third row

Group 0: up to 10 kg GFE

ISO/L2ISO/L1ISO/R1

XXX

XXIL3

XXX

XXX

Group 0+: up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 X IL3 X X

D ISO/R2 X IL3 X X

C ISO/R3 X IL3 X X

Group I: 9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 X IL3,4 X X

C ISO/R3 X IL3,4 X X

B ISO/F2 X IL, IUF3,4 X X

B1 ISO/F2X X IL, IUF3,4 X X

A ISO/F3 X IL, IUF3,4 X X

Group II: 15 to 25 kg X IL3,4 X X

Group III: 22 to 36 kg X IL3,4 X X


IL : suitable for particular ISOFIX restraint systems of the 'specific-vehicle', 'restricted' or 'semi-universal' categories.The ISOFIX restraint system must be approved for the specific vehicle type (refer to the vehicle type list of the childrestraint system)

IUF : suitable for ISOFIX forward-facing child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this weight classX : no ISOFIX child restraint system approved in this weight class1 : move seat forwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest as far as necessary to a vertical position to ensure

that the belt runs forwards from the upper anchorage point2 : move seat upwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest as far as necessary to a vertical position to ensure

that the belt is tight on the buckle side3 : move the respective front seat ahead of the child restraint system forwards as far as necessary4 : adjust the respective headrest as necessary or remove if required

A – ISO//F3 : forward-facing child restraint system for children of maximum size in the weight class 9 to 18 kg.B – ISO//F2 : forward-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class 9 to 18 kg.B1 – ISO//F2X : forward-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class 9 to 18 kg.C – ISO//R3 : rear-facing child restraint system for children of maximum size in the weight class up to 18 kg.D – ISO//R2 : rear-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class up to 18 kg.E – ISO//R1 : rear-facing child restraint system for young children in the weight class up to 13 kg.

Permissible options for fitting an i-Size child restraint system with ISOFIX brackets

On front passenger seat On outboard seats inthe second row

On centre seat in thesecond row

On the seats in thethird rowactivated airbag deactivated airbag

i-Size childrestraintsystems

X X i - U X X

i - U : suitable for i-Size 'universal' forward and rearward facing child restraint systemsX : seating position not suitable for i-Size 'universal' child restraint systems

66 Storage

Storage

Storage compartments ................ 66Glovebox ................................... 66Cupholders ................................ 66Front storage ............................. 68Door panel storage .................... 68Overhead console ..................... 68Underseat storage ..................... 68Armrest storage ......................... 69Centre console storage ............. 69Rear carrier system ................... 70

Load compartment ....................... 79Rear storage .............................. 81Load compartment cover ........... 81Rear floor storage cover ............ 83Load rails and hooks ................. 88Lashing eyes ............................. 88Cargo management system ...... 88Safety net .................................. 90Folding tray ................................ 92Warning triangle ........................ 92First aid kit ................................. 92

Roof rack system ......................... 93Roof rack ................................... 93

Loading information ..................... 94

Storage compartments

9 Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in the storagecompartments. Otherwise, thestorage compartment lid couldopen and vehicle occupants couldbe injured by objects being thrownaround in the event of hardbraking, a sudden change indirection or an accident.

Glovebox

To open the glovebox pull the handle.The glovebox features an adapter forthe locking wheel nuts.The glovebox should be closed whilstdriving.

CupholdersFront cupholder

Cupholders are located in the centreconsole between the front seats.

Storage 67

Slidable cupholder inFlexConsole armrestThe cupholder can be moved in guiderails in the FlexConsole armrest orcompletely removed.

Push the handle in front of cupholderto slide.Armrest 3 42.

Remove cupholder

Pull the handle in front of cupholderand remove it vertically out of theconsole.Installation in reverse order.NoteInstall the cupholder in the directionas shown in the illustration.Otherwise the cupholder may notengage properly.

Rear cupholder

Additional cupholder are locatedbetween the seats in the third row.

BottleholderThe door pockets of front and reardoors are designed to carry bottles.

68 Storage

Front storage

A storage compartment is locatednext to the steering wheel.

Door panel storageOn front door trim there are smallpockets for e. g. mobile phones.

Overhead console

Press button to open storage box.The box may be loaded with max.0.2 kg.

Underseat storageStorage box

There is a storage box under thepassenger's seat. Slide the rollo toopen or close the box. Maximum load:1.5 kg.

Storage 69

Underseat drawer

Press button in the recess and pull outdrawer. Maximum load: 3 kg. Toclose, push in and engage.

Armrest storageStorage in FlexConsole armrest

Press button to open storagecompartment in the armrest.Behind the armrest there is anotherstorage compartment. Slide the lid toopen.

Centre console storageCentre console

The storage container can be used tostore small items.Slide cover backwards to open.

70 Storage

Rear console

At the rear side of the FlexConsolethere is a storage drawer. Pull out toopen.

Caution

Do not use for ashes or for otherglowing items.

Rear carrier systemRear carrier system for fourbicycles

The rear carrier system (Flex-Fixsystem) allows two bicycles to beattached to an extendable carrierintegrated into the vehicle floor. It ispossible to attach two further bicycleson an adapter. The transportation ofother objects is not permitted.The maximum load of the rear carriersystem is 80 kg with attached adapterand 60 kg without attached adapter.The maximum load per bicycle on therear carrier system is 30 kg. This

allows the attachment of electrically-powered bicycles to the rear carriersystem. The maximum load perbicycle on the adapter is 20 kg.The wheelbase of a bicycle must notexceed 1.15 metres. Otherwise thesecure fastening of a bicycle is notpossible.If not in use, the rear carrier systemmust be slid back into the vehiclefloor.There must not be any objects on thebicycles that could become looseduring transportation.

Caution

If the rear carrier system isextended and the vehicle is fullyloaded, the chassis clearance willbe reduced.Drive carefully whenever the roadhas a steep inclination or whendriving over a ramp, bump, etc.

Storage 71

Caution

Consult your bicycle dealer beforeattaching bicycles with carbonframes. The bicycles might getdamaged.

NoteThe tail lights of the vehicle will bedeactivated if the tail lights of therear carrier system are installed.

ExtendingOpen the tailgate.

9 Warning

No-one should be in the extensionzone of the rear carrier system,risk of injury.

Pull release lever up. The rear carriersystem disengages and travelsquickly out of the rear bumper.

Completely pull out the rear carriersystem until you hear it engage.Ensure that it is not possible to pushin the rear carrier system withoutpulling the release lever again.

9 Warning

It is only permissible to fit objectsto the rear carrier system if thesystem has been correctlyengaged. If the rear carrier systemwill not engage correctly, do not fitobjects to the system and slide thesystem back. Seek the assistanceof a workshop.

72 Storage

Unfold number plate holder

Lift the number plate holder and foldit backwards.

Fold out tail lamps

Fold out both tail lamps.

Lock the rear carrier system

Swivel both clamping levers sidewaysas far as they will go.Otherwise safe functionality is notguaranteed.

Fold out wheel recesses

Fold out both wheel recesses.

Assembling the bicycle rack

Storage 73

Lift the rack at the rear (1) and pull itbackwards.Fold up the rack (2).

Push down the rack (1) and turnhandle (2) backwards to engage.

Attaching the first bicycle

1. Rotate the pedals into position asshown in the illustration and putthe bicycle on the foremost wheelrecess.Make sure that the bicycle standscentrally on the wheel recesses.

2. Attach the short mounting bracketto the bicycle frame. Turn theknob clockwise to fasten.

74 Storage

3. Secure both bicycle wheels to thewheel recesses using the strapretainers.

4. Check the bicycle to make sure itis secure.

Caution

Ensure gap between bicycle andvehicle is at least 5 cm. Ifnecessary, loosen handlebar andswivel sideways.

Attaching the adapterWhen carrying more than twobicycles, the adapter must be fixedbefore the second bicycle is attached.

1. Attach the adapter to the rearcarrier system as shown in theillustration.

2. Turn the lever (1) forwards andhold, then lower the adapter (2) atthe rear.

3. Release lever and check that theadapter is engaged securely.

4. Guide the strap attached to theadapter underneath the lever tofold back the rear carrier system.Fasten the strap.

Attaching further bicyclesThe attachment of further bicycles issimilar to the attachment of the firstbicycle. Additionally some steps mustbe considered:1. Before putting on the bicycle,

always unfold the wheel recessesfor the next bicycle, if necessary.

2. Always rotate the pedals into anappropriate position beforeputting on the bicycle.

Storage 75

3. Position the bicycles on the rearcarrier system alternately alignedto the left and to the right.

4. Align the bicycles to the oneattached before. The wheel hubsof the bicycles must not toucheach other.

5. Attach the bicycles with mountingbrackets and strap retainers asdescribed for the first bicycle. Themounting brackets should befixed in parallel.Use the long mounting bracket toattach the second bicycle to therack.

Use the longer accessorymounting bracket to attach thethird bicycle to the rack.

Use the short accessory mountingbracket to attach the fourthbicycle. The bracket must be fixedbetween the frames of the thirdand fourth bicycle.

6. Additionally secure both bicyclewheels of the fourth bicycle to thewheel recesses using thetensioning straps.

It is recommended to attach awarning sign to the rearmost bicycleto increase visibility.

Fold the rear carrier systembackwardsThe rear carrier system can be foldedbackwards to gain access to the loadcompartment.

76 Storage

● Without attached adapter:

Push the lever (1) to disengageand hold.Pull the rack (2) backwards tofold the rear carrier system.

● With attached adapter:

9 Warning

Take care when disengaging therear carrier system as it will tiltbackwards. Risk of injury.

Hold frame (1) of rearmostbicycle with one hand and pull theloop (2) to disengage.Hold rearmost bicycle with bothhands and fold the rear carriersystem backwards.

To increase visibility, the tail lights ofthe vehicle are activated when therear carrier system is folded back.

9 Warning

When folding the rear carriersystem forwards again, take carethat the system is engagedsecurely.

Removing bicyclesUndo strap retainers on bicycle tyres.Turn knob anti-clockwise and removemounting brackets.

Detaching adapterDetach the adapter before removingthe last bicycle remaining on the rearcarrier system.1. Fold in wheel recesses.

2. Unbutton the strap.

Storage 77

3. Turn the lever (1) forwards andhold.

4. Lift the adapter (2) at the rear andremove.

Disassembling the bicycle rack

Arrange mounting brackets as shownin the illustration.Turn handle (1) forwards todisengage and lift the rack (2).

Fold the rack backwards, then pushforwards until it stops (1).Press the rack down at the rear (2).

Fold in wheel recessesFold in both wheel recesses.

78 Storage

Stow the strap retainers accurately.

Unlock the rear carrier system

Swivel both clamping levers inwardsas far as they will go.

Fold in tail lampsSwivel in both tail lamps.

Fold in number plate holderLift the number plate holder and foldit forwards.

Retracting the rear carrier system

Caution

Take care that all foldable parts,e.g. wheel recesses and mountingbrackets, are stowed accurately.Otherwise the rear carrier systemmight get damaged when trying toretract it.

Push the release lever up and hold.Lift the rear carrier system slightly andpush it into the bumper until itengages.Release lever must return to originalposition.

9 Warning

If the system cannot be correctlyengaged, please seek theassistance of a workshop.

Storage 79

Load compartmentThe seats in the third row can befolded down separately into thevehicle floor. The seat backrests ofthe second row can be folded forwardseparately. Additionally, the backrestof the passenger seat can be folded.A completely flat load bay is createdif all rear seats and backrests andpassenger backrest are folded down.Depending on the loading, only singleseats or backrests can be folded.Rear floor storage cover 3 83.

9 Warning

When seats or backrests are beingadjusted or folded, keep handsand feet away from the movingarea.Never store objects under theseats.Drive only with engaged seats andbackrests.

Caution

Before setting up or folding downseats, all components must beremoved from the side rails andfrom the lashing eyes.Lashing eyes must be in storedposition.

Folding down the seats of the thirdrow● Push down head restraint by

pressing the catch 3 36.

● Insert the latch plate of the seatbelt on each side into the pocketthat is mounted at the belt.

80 Storage

● Pull the lower loop andsimultaneously swing thebackrest forwards until the seat islowered into the vehicle floor.

● Install interior floor mat 3 83and load compartment cover3 81 if necessary.

Setting up the seatsPull up the seat by the upper loop, foldout and allow seat to engage inupright position.

Folding the seat backrests of thesecond row● Remove the load compartment

cover if necessary 3 81.● Push down head restraints by

pressing the catch 3 36.● Move front passenger seat to a

position that avoids contact withthe head restraints of the foldedbackrests.

● Pull the loop and fold down thebackrest onto the seat cushion.

Caution

● Do not fold the outer seatbackswhile the seats are in thelounge seat position 3 44.

● Do not pull release lever of theeasy entry function when thebackrest is folded down.

The seats could be damaged.

● Alternatively pull the loop andadjust backrest to verticalposition as cargo position.

9 Warning

Use vertical position of thebackrest only for increasedluggage volume and not as aseating position.

Folding up backrest

Raise backrest to vertical position.Adjust inclination by pulling the loop.Ensure that all positions are engagedcorrectly.

Storage 81

9 Warning

Only drive the vehicle if thebackrests are securely locked intoposition. Otherwise there is a riskof personal injury or damage to theload or vehicle in the event ofheavy braking or a collision.

Rear storageOn both sides of the loadcompartment there are storageshelves.

To open, release cover in side trimpanel and remove.

Floor storage

On version without third seat row,there are storage boxes under thefloor cover. Lift up the cover to open.

Load compartment coverDo not place any heavy or sharp-edged objects on the loadcompartment cover.

Before operating the loadcompartment cover, insert the latchplate of the seat belt on each side intothe pocket that is mounted at the belt.

82 Storage

Closing

Pull the load compartment covertowards the rear using the handle andengage it in the retainers at the sides.

Opening

Remove load compartment coverfrom side brackets. Hold the handleand guide the load compartmentcover until it is fully rolled up.

Removing

Open the load compartment cover.Pull the release lever up and hold. Liftload compartment cover on right sideand remove from retainers.

Stowing in the load compartmentIf the load compartment cover is notused, stow it in the storage in thevehicle floor.Open the cover of the storage in frontof the tailgate.Remove the load compartment coverand turn it so that the release lever isdirected to the left.

Storage 83

Place the housing so that the upperside is facing to the front and the partwith the handle points upwards.

Insert the load compartment coverinto the opening on the right side ofthe storage (1) and turn it until thehandle rests flat on the housing (2).

Fasten the load compartment cover inthe storage with the Velcro tape.

InstallingInsert the left side of the loadcompartment cover into the recess,pull the release lever up and hold,insert the right side of the loadcompartment cover and engage.

Rear floor storage coverFloor cover

On versions without third seat row,there are storage boxes under thefloor cover. To open lift up the coverand fold it upright behind rear seats.

Interior protection matInterior protection mat is a coveringand protection feature for the loadcompartment, to be used when all orsingle seats/backrests are foldeddown.

84 Storage

By folding and expanding the matthere are a range of individualapplications possible.The interior protection mat isavailable in two versions:● Standard protection mat covers

the area between tailgate andsecond seat row, when third rowis complete or if one seat is foldeddown.

● Flex cover interior protectionmat is double size of standardprotection mat, connected by azipper. It covers the loadcompartment fully, when all orsingle seats of third and secondrow are folded down.

Protection mat is foldablelongitudinally in 4 parts (standard) or8 parts (Flex cover) with a centralzipper and transversely foldable in4 parts.

Following only a few examples ofusing the mats are described.Before folding and expanding themat, all components must beremoved from the side rails and fromthe lashing eyes. Lashing eyes mustbe in stored position.

Covering the load compartmentbetween tailgate and second seat rowpossible with both Standardprotection mat or Flex cover interiorprotection mat being folded at thezipper to half size (double layer).

Mat is located fourfold flapped behindthe raised up seats of the third row.● Fold down third row seats.

Storage 85

● Expand the parts of the foldedmat, so that first part is raised upat second row backrest.

● When folding down second rowbackrests, the mat expandsautomatically and covers thespace between both seat rows.

● To allow one seat in the third rowto be raised up, fold mat in halflengthways.

● Pull out the mat a little to protectload compartment sill whenloading heavy objects. Raise upthe overlaying part of the matbefore closing the tailgate.

Covering the load compartment up tothe backrests of the front seatsOnly possible with Flex cover interiorprotection mat being folded at thezipper to half size (double layer).Mat is expanded up to the second rowseats, as described previously.

● Fold down second row backrests.● Expand the upper parts of the

double layer mat, so that the loadcompartment is fully covered.The first part of the mat is nowraised up at the backrests of frontseats.

● Fold the overlaying rear partunder the mat before closing thetailgate.

Covering the load compartmentpartiallyOnly possible with Flex cover interiorprotection mat being folded at thezipper to half size (double layer).e.g. left outer backrest is not foldeddownMat is expanded up to the second rowseats, as described in first section.● Fold down the backrests that

shall be covered.

86 Storage

● Open the zipper behind theraised up backrest.

● Pull out the mat until the first partis flat on the load compartmentfloor.

● Raise up lengthways the part thatis opened by the zipper, and foldit to the centre.

● Expand the upper part of doublelayer mat over the foldedbackrests.


Proceed in the same way when oneouter backrest and the centrebackrest are not folded down.e.g. only centre backrest is foldeddownMat is expanded up to the second rowseats, as described in first section.● Fold down centre backrest to be

covered.

● Open the zipper from both sidesbehind the left and right backrest.

● Pull out the mat until the first partis flat on the load compartmentfloor.

● Raise up lengthways both partsthat are opened by the zipper,and fold them to the centre.

Storage 87

● Then expand the small upperpart of double layer mat over thecentre backrest.


The following illustrations show somefurther examples.

Example for long small objects, e.g.skis.

Example for side cover protection.

Example for covering folded backreston second row and one folded seat onthird row.

88 Storage

Load rails and hooks

Install the hooks in the desiredposition in the rails: insert the hook inthe upper groove on the rail and pressin the lower groove.

Lashing eyes

The lashing eyes are designed tosecure items against slippage, e.g.using lashing straps or luggage net.

Cargo management systemThe FlexOrganizer is a flexiblesystem for dividing up the loadcompartment.The system consists of:● adapters● mesh pockets● hooks● variable partition net

The components are fitted in rails onboth side panels using adapters andhooks.

Installation of adapters in the rails

Fold open the handle plate, insert theadapter into the upper and lowergroove of the rail and move to therequired position. Turn the handleplate upwards to lock the adapter. Toremove, turn the handle plate downand move out of the rail.

Storage 89

Variable partition net

Insert adapters into the requiredposition in the rails. Stick together thehalves of the net rods.To install, push rods together a littleand insert into the relevant openingsin the adapters.To remove, press the net rodstogether and remove from theadapters.

Net pocket

Insert adapters into the requiredposition in the rails. The net pocketcan be suspended from the adapters.

Installation of hooks in the rails

Insert the hook in the desired positionfirst in the upper groove of the rail andthen press in the lower groove. Toremove, first pull out of the uppergroove.

90 Storage

Partitioning net in front of tailgate

Install directly in front of the tailgate.Before installation push in the fourend pieces of the net rod by rotatingeach end piece anticlockwise.To install, push the net rods togetherand insert into the openings of thetailgate frame. The longer rod mustbe inserted at the top.To remove, push the net rodstogether and remove.

Safety netThe safety net can be installed behindthe seats of the second row or thefront seats.Passengers must not be transportedbehind the safety net.

Installation behind second rowseats

● There are installation openingson both sides in the roof frameabove second row seats:suspend and engage rod of net atone side, compress rod andsuspend and engage at the otherside.

● Attach hooks of safety net strapsto front lashing eyes on bothsides in the load compartment.

● Tension both straps by pulling atthe loose end.

Storage 91

Installation behind front seats

● There are installation openingson both sides in the roof frameabove the front seats: suspendand engage rod of net at oneside, compress rod and suspendand engage at the other side.

● Attach hooks of safety net strapsto the lashing eyes on both sidesin the floor in front of the seats.

● Tension both straps by pulling atthe loose end.

Removal

Push button on the tightener torelease the strap on both sides.Detach hooks from the eyes. Unhookthe safety net rods from the bracketsin the roof frame. Roll up the net andsecure with a strap.

StowingOpen the cover of the storage in theload compartment floor in front of thetailgate.

92 Storage

Insert the safety net in the storageand close cover.

Folding trayLocated in the front seat backrests.Open by pulling upwards until itengages.Fold away by pressing down past theresistance point.Do not place any heavy objects on thefolding tray.

Warning triangle

Stow the warning triangle in thestorage of the load compartment floorin front of the tailgate.

First aid kitStow the first aid kit and the highvisibility vest under the driver's seat.

Use the straps to fix.

Storage 93

On another version, first aid kit islocated in a storage box under thedriver's seat. Slide the rollo to open orclose the box.

Roof rack systemRoof rackFor safety reasons and to avoiddamage to the roof, the vehicleapproved roof rack system isrecommended. For furtherinformation contact your workshop.Follow the installation instructionsand remove the roof rack when not inuse.

Mounting roof rack

Vehicles with roof railing

Fasten the roof rack in the area of theholes, indicated by the arrows in theillustration.

Vehicles without roof railing

To fasten a roof rack, open the capsin the roof strips. Insert the mountingprovisions, as instructed, in theretainer indicated in the illustration.

94 Storage

Loading information

● Heavy objects in the loadcompartment should be placedagainst the seat backrests.Ensure the backrests aresecurely engaged. If objects canbe stacked, the heavier objectsshould be placed at the bottom.

● Secure objects with lashingstraps attached to lashing eyes3 88.

● Secure loose objects in loadcompartment to prevent sliding.

● Do not allow the load to protrudeabove the upper edge of thebackrests.

● Do not place any objects on theload compartment cover or theinstrument panel.

● The load must not obstruct theoperation of the pedals, parkingbrake and gear selector lever, orhinder the freedom of movementof the driver. Do not place anyunsecured objects in the interior.

● Do not drive with an open loadcompartment.

9 Warning

Always make sure that the load inthe vehicle is securely stowed.Otherwise objects can be thrownaround inside the vehicle andcause personal injury or damageto the load or car.

● The payload is the differencebetween the permitted grossvehicle weight (see identificationplate 3 308) and the EC kerbweight.

To calculate the payload, enterthe data for your vehicle in theweights table at the front of thismanual.The EC kerb weight includesweights for the driver (68 kg),luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fueltank 90% full).Optional equipment andaccessories increase the kerbweight.

● Driving with a roof load increasesthe sensitivity of the vehicle tocross-winds and has adetrimental effect on vehiclehandling due to the vehicle'shigher centre of gravity.Distribute the load evenly andsecure it properly with retainingstraps. Adjust the tyre pressureand vehicle speed according tothe load conditions. Check andretighten the straps frequently.Do not drive faster than120 km/h.The permissible roof load is75 kg for vehicles without roofrailing and 100 kg for vehicleswith roof railing. The roof load is

Storage 95

the combined weight of the roofrack and the load.

96 Instruments and controls

Instruments andcontrols

Controls ....................................... 97Steering wheel adjustment ........ 97Steering wheel controls ............. 97Heated steering wheel ............... 97Horn ........................................... 98Windscreen wiper/washer ......... 98Rear window wiper/washer ....... 99Outside temperature ................ 100Clock ....................................... 100Power outlets ........................... 101Cigarette lighter ....................... 102Ashtrays .................................. 102

Warning lights, gauges and indi‐cators ......................................... 103

Instrument cluster .................... 103Speedometer ........................... 103Odometer ................................ 103Trip odometer .......................... 103Tachometer ............................. 104Fuel gauge .............................. 104Fuel selector ............................ 105Engine coolant temperaturegauge ..................................... 107

Service display ........................ 107

Control indicators .................... 108Turn signal ............................... 110Seat belt reminder ................... 111Airbag and belt tensioners ....... 111Airbag deactivation .................. 112Charging system ..................... 112Malfunction indicator light ........ 112Brake and clutch system ......... 112Operate pedal .......................... 113Electric parking brake .............. 113Electric parking brake fault ...... 113Antilock brake system (ABS) ... 113Gear shifting ............................ 114Power steering ........................ 114Following distance ................... 114Lane departure warning .......... 114Electronic Stability Control off . 114Electronic Stability Control andTraction Control system ......... 114

Traction Control system off ..... 114Preheating ............................... 115Diesel particle filter .................. 115AdBlue ..................................... 115Tyre pressure monitoringsystem .................................... 115

Engine oil pressure .................. 115Low fuel ................................... 116Immobiliser .............................. 116Exterior light ............................ 116High beam ............................... 116

High beam assist ..................... 116LED headlights ........................ 116Fog light ................................... 116Rear fog light ........................... 116Cruise control .......................... 116Adaptive cruise control ............ 117Vehicle detected ahead ........... 117Speed limiter ........................... 117Traffic sign assistant ................ 117Door open ................................ 117

Information displays ................... 117Driver Information Centre ........ 117Info display .............................. 121

Vehicle messages ...................... 122Warning chimes ....................... 123Battery voltage ........................ 123

Vehicle personalisation .............. 124Telematics service ..................... 125

OnStar ..................................... 125

Instruments and controls 97

ControlsSteering wheel adjustment

Unlock lever, adjust steering wheel,then engage lever and ensure it isfully locked.Do not adjust steering wheel unlessvehicle is stationary and steeringwheel lock has been released.

Steering wheel controls

The Infotainment system, some driverassistance systems and a connectedmobile phone can be operated via thecontrols on the steering wheel.Further information is available in theInfotainment manual.Driver assistance systems 3 220.

Heated steering wheel

Activate heating by pressing *.Activation is indicated by the LED inthe button.


The recommended grip areas of thesteering wheel are heated quickerand to a higher temperature than theother areas.Heating is operational when theengine is running and during anAutostop.Stop-start system 3 202.

Horn

Press j.

Windscreen wiper/washerWindscreen wiper

HI : fastLO : slowINT : interval wiping or automatic

wiping with rain sensorOFF : off

For a single wipe when thewindscreen wiper is off, press thelever down to position 1x.Do not use if the windscreen is frozen.Switch off in car washes.

Adjustable wiper interval

Wiper lever in position INT.Turn the adjuster wheel to adjust thedesired wipe interval:short interval : turn adjuster

wheel upwardslong interval : turn adjuster

wheel downwards


Adjustable sensitivity of the rainsensor

Wiper lever in position INT.Turn the adjuster wheel to adjust thesensitivity of the rain sensor.The rain sensor detects the amount ofwater on the windscreen andautomatically regulates the wipingfrequency and speed.After 20 seconds without wipingactivity, the wiper arms move slightlydown to park position.

Keep the sensor free from dust, dirtand ice.

Windscreen washer

Pull lever. Washer fluid is sprayedonto the windscreen and the wiperwipes a few times.Washer fluid 3 265

Rear window wiper/washer

Press the rocker switch to activate therear window wiper:upper position : continuous

operationlower position : intermittent

operationmiddle position : off


Push lever. Washer fluid is sprayedonto the rear window and the wiperwipes a few times.Do not use if the rear window isfrozen.Switch off in car washes.The rear window wiper comes onautomatically when the windscreenwiper is switched on and reverse gearis engaged.Activation or deactivation of thisfunction can be changed in theSettings menu in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Outside temperature

A drop in temperature is indicatedimmediately and a rise in temperatureafter a time delay.

If outside temperature drops to 3 °C,a warning message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.

9 Warning

The road surface may already beicy even though the displayindicates a few degrees above0 °C.

ClockDate and time are shown in theInfo-Display.

R 4.0 IntelliLinkPress ; and then select Settings.Select Time and Date to display therespective submenu.


Set Time FormatTo select the desired time format,touch the screen buttons 12 h or 24 h.

Set Date FormatTo select the desired date format,select Set Date Format and choosebetween the available options in thesubmenu.

Auto SetTo choose whether time and date areto be set automatically or manually,select Auto Set.For time and date to be setautomatically, select On - RDS.

For time and date to be set manually,select Off - Manual. If Auto Set is setto Off - Manual, the submenu itemsSet Time and Set Date becomeavailable.

Set time and dateTo adjust the time and date settings,select Set Time or Set Date.Touch + and - to adjust the settings.

Power outlets

A 12 Volt power outlet is located in thefront console. Fold the coverdownwards.

Further 12 Volt power outlets arelocated in the rear console

and at the left sidewall in the loadcompartment.


Do not exceed the maximum powerconsumption of 120 watts.With ignition off, the power outlets aredeactivated. Additionally the poweroutlets are deactivated in the event oflow vehicle battery voltage.Electrical accessories that areconnected must comply with theelectromagnetic compatibilityrequirements laid down inDIN VDE 40 839.Do not connect any current-deliveringaccessories, e.g. electrical chargingdevices or batteries.Do not damage the outlet by usingunsuitable plugs.Stop-start system 3 202.

Cigarette lighter

The cigarette lighter is located in thefront console. Fold the coverdownwards.Press in cigarette lighter. It switchesoff automatically once the element isglowing. Pull out lighter.

Ashtrays

Caution

To be used only for ash and not forcombustible rubbish.

The portable ashtray can be placed inthe cupholders.


Warning lights, gaugesand indicatorsInstrument clusterIn some versions, the needles of theinstruments briefly rotate to the endposition when the ignition is switchedon.

Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer

The total recorded distance isdisplayed in km.

Trip odometerThe recorded distance is displayedsince the last reset.

Trip odometer counts up to 9999 kmand then restarts at 0.Two trip odometer pages areselectable for different trips.Select ; by pressing Menu on theturn signal lever. Turn adjuster wheelon turn signal lever and select ;1or ;2. Each trip odometer page canbe reset separately by pressingSET/CLR on the turn signal lever fora few seconds on the respectivemenu.


Tachometer

Displays the engine speed.Drive in a low engine speed range foreach gear as much as possible.

Caution

If the needle is in the red warningzone, the maximum permittedengine speed is exceeded. Engineat risk.

Fuel gauge

Displays the fuel level or gas content(LPG or CNG) in the tank dependingon the operation mode.Number of LEDs displayed shows thelevel in the respective fuel tank. 8LEDs means fuel tank is full.During gas operation, the level in thegas tank is displayed.

Low fuel indicationOne remaining LED illuminating whiteindicates that the fuel level is low.

If the LED changes to red and Yilluminates yellow, refuel the tanksoon.If the LED illuminates red and Yflashes yellow, refuel immediately.Never run the fuel tank dry.The arrow indicates the vehicle sidewhere the fuel filler flap is located.Because of the fuel remaining in thetank, the top-up quantity may be lessthan the specified tank capacity.During gas operation, the systemautomatically switches over to petroloperation when gas tanks are empty3 105.


Fuel selectorNatural gas operation, CNG

Pressing Y switches between petroland natural gas operation. Switchingis not possible at high loads (e.g.powerful acceleration, driving at fullthrottle). The LED status shows thecurrent operating mode.1 off : natural gas

operation1 illumi‐nates

: petrol operation

1 flashes : no switching ispossible, one type offuel is empty

As soon as the natural gas tank isempty, petrol operation isautomatically engaged until theignition is switched off.If the natural gas tank is not refuelled,the system must be manuallyswitched to petrol operation beforethe engine is restarted. This willprevent damage to the catalyticconverter (overheating caused byirregular fuel supply).If the selector switch is operatedseveral times within a short time, aswitchover inhibitor is activated. Theengine remains in the currentoperating mode. The inhibitorremains active until the ignition isswitched off.A slight loss of power and torque canbe expected during petrol operation.You must therefore adapt your drivingstyle (e.g. during overtakingmanoeuvres) and high vehicle loads(e.g. towing loads) accordingly.Every six months run the petrol tankdown until control indicator Yilluminates, then refuel. This is

necessary to maintain fuel quality aswell as system function necessary forpetrol operation.Fill the tank completely at regularintervals to prevent corrosion in thetank.NoteNatural gas tanks (Type IV) consistof lightweight fibre reinforced plastic.After a collision behind the frontseats or overrunning of objectswhich impact the underbody of thevehicle the natural gas tanks mustbe checked. We recommend anOpel Repairer authorised forservicing natural gas vehicles.

Fuel for natural gas operation 3 248.


Liquid gas operation, LPG

Pressing LPG switches betweenpetrol and liquid gas operation assoon as the required parameters(coolant temperature, gastemperature and minimum enginespeed) have been reached. Therequirements are usually fulfilled afterapproximately 60 seconds(depending on exterior temperature)and the first firm press on theaccelerator. The status LED showsthe current operating mode.

1 off : petrol operation1 flashes : checking conditions

for fuel transition toliquid gas operation.Illuminates ifconditions are fulfilled.

1 illumi‐nates

: liquid gas operation

1 flashes 5times andextin‐guishes

: liquid gas tank isempty or failure inliquid gas system. Amessage is displayedin the DriverInformation Centre.

If the fuel tank is empty, the enginewill not start.The selected fuel mode is stored andreactivated at the next ignition cycle ifconditions allow.As soon as the liquid gas tank isempty, petrol operation isautomatically engaged until theignition is switched off.When switching automaticallybetween petrol or gas operation, abrief delay of engine tractive powermay be noticeable.

Every six months, run the petrol tankdown until control indicator Iilluminates, then refuel. This helpsmaintain fuel quality and systemfunction for petrol operation.Fill the tank completely at regularintervals to prevent corrosion in thetank.

Faults and remediesIf gas mode is not possible, check thefollowing:● Is there enough liquid gas

present?● Is there enough petrol present for

starting?Due to extreme temperatures incombination with the gascomposition, it may take slightlylonger before the system switchesfrom petrol to gas mode.In extreme situations, the system mayalso switch back to petrol mode if theminimum requirements are notfulfilled. If conditions allow, it may bepossible to manually switch back toliquid gas operation.


Seek the assistance of a workshop inthe event of all other faults.

Caution

Repairs and adjustments may onlybe made by trained specialists inorder to maintain the safety andwarranty on the LPG system.

Liquid gas is given a particular odour(odorised) so that any leaks can bedetected easily.

9 Warning

If you smell gas in the vehicle or inthe immediate vicinity, switch topetrol mode immediately. Nosmoking. No naked flames orignition sources.

If the gas odour persists, do not startthe engine. Have the cause of thefault remedied by a workshop.When using underground car parks,follow the instructions of the operatorand local laws.

NoteIn the event of an accident, switch offthe ignition and lights.

Fuel for liquid gas operation 3 248.

Engine coolant temperaturegauge

Number of LEDs displayed shows thecoolant temperature.

up to 3 LEDs : engine operatingtemperature notyet reached

4 to 6 LEDs : normal operatingtemperature

more than 6LEDs

: temperature toohigh

Caution

If engine coolant temperature istoo high, stop vehicle, switch offengine. Danger to engine. Checkcoolant level.

Service displayThe engine oil life system informswhen to change the engine oil andfilter. Based on driving conditions, theinterval at which an engine oil andfilter change will be indicated can varyconsiderably.


The remaining oil life duration menuis displayed in the Driver InformationCentre 3 117.

Select Vehicle InformationMenu ? by pressing MENU on theturn signal lever. Turn the adjusterwheel to select Remaining Oil Life .Remaining oil life duration is indicatedin percentage.

ResetPress SET/CLR on turn signal leverfor several seconds to reset. Theignition must be switched on butengine not running.The system must be reset every timethe engine oil is changed to ensureproper functionality. Seek theassistance of a workshop.

Next serviceWhen the system has calculated thatengine oil life has been diminished,Change Engine Oil Soon appears inthe Driver Information Centre. Haveengine oil and filter changed by aworkshop within one week or500 km (whichever occurs first).Service information 3 304.

Control indicatorsThe control indicators described arenot present in all vehicles. Thedescription applies to all instrumentversions. Depending on theequipment, the position of the controlindicators may vary. When theignition is switched on, most controlindicators will illuminate briefly as afunctionality test.The control indicator colours mean:red : danger, important reminderyellow : warning, information, faultgreen : confirmation of activationblue : confirmation of activationwhite : confirmation of activation


Control indicators in the instrument cluster


Overview

O Turn signal 3 110

X Seat belt reminder 3 111

v Airbag and belt tensioners3 111

V Airbag deactivation 3 112

p Charging system 3 112

Z Malfunction indicator light3 112

R Brake and clutch system 3 112

m Electric parking brake 3 113

j Electric parking brake fault3 113

- Operate pedal 3 113

u Antilock brake system (ABS)3 113

R Gear shifting 3 114

E Following distance 3 114

c Power steering 3 114

) Lane departure warning 3 114

n Electronic Stability Control off3 114

b Electronic Stability Control andTraction Control system 3 114

k Traction Control system off3 114

! Preheating 3 115

% Diesel particle filter 3 115

Y AdBlue 3 115

w Tyre pressure monitoringsystem 3 115

I Engine oil pressure 3 115

Y Low fuel 3 116

d Immobiliser 3 116

8 Exterior light 3 116

C High beam 3 116

f High beam assist 3 116

f LED headlights 3 134

> Fog light 3 116

r Rear fog light 3 116

m Cruise control 3 116 / Adaptivecruise control 3 117

C Adaptive cruise control 3 117

A Vehicle detected ahead 3 117

L Speed limiter 3 117

L Traffic sign assistant 3 117

h Door open 3 117

Turn signalO illuminates or flashes green.

Illuminates brieflyThe parking lights are switched on.

FlashesA turn signal or the hazard warningflashers are activated.Rapid flashing: failure of a turn signallight or associated fuse, failure of turnsignal light on trailer.Bulb replacement 3 268, Fuses3 275.Turn signals 3 135.


Seat belt reminderSeat belt reminder on front seatsX for driver's seat or for frontpassenger seat illuminates or flashesred in the instrument cluster.

IlluminatesAfter the ignition has been switchedon until the seat belt has beenfastened.

FlashesAfter having started the engine, for amaximum of 100 seconds until theseat belt has been fastened.Fastening the seat belt 3 51.

Seat belt status on rear seats

X illuminates or flashes white or greyin the Driver Information Centre, afterhaving started the engine.

Illuminates whiteSeat belt is unfastened.

Illuminates greySeat belt has been fastened.

Flashes white or greyFastened seat belt has beenunfastened.Fastening the seat belt 3 51.

Airbag and belt tensionersv illuminates red.When the ignition is switched on, thecontrol indicator illuminates forapprox. four seconds. If it does notilluminate, does not extinguish afterfour seconds or illuminates whilstdriving, there is a fault in the airbagsystem. Seek the assistance of aworkshop. The airbags and beltpretensioners may fail to trigger in theevent of an accident.Deployment of the belt pretensionersor airbags is indicated by continuousillumination of v.

9 Warning

Have the cause of the faultremedied immediately by aworkshop.

Belt pretensioners, airbag system3 50, 3 54.


Airbag deactivation

ONV illuminates yellow.Illuminates for approx. 60 secondsafter the ignition is switched on. Thefront passenger airbag is activated.OFF* illuminates yellow.The front passenger airbag isdeactivated 3 59.

9 Danger

Risk of fatal injury for a child usinga child restraint system togetherwith activated front passengerairbag.

Risk of fatal injury for an adultperson with deactivated frontpassenger airbag.

Charging systemp illuminates red.Illuminates when the ignition isswitched on and extinguishes shortlyafter the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine isrunningStop, switch off engine. Vehiclebattery is not charging. Enginecooling may be interrupted. Thebrake servo unit may cease to beeffective. Seek the assistance of aworkshop.

Malfunction indicator lightZ illuminates or flashes yellow.Illuminates when the ignition isswitched on and extinguishes shortlyafter the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine isrunningFault in the emission control system.The permitted emission limits may beexceeded. Seek the assistance of aworkshop immediately.

Flashes when the engine isrunningFault that could lead to catalyticconverter damage. Ease up on theaccelerator until the flashing stops.Seek the assistance of a workshopimmediately.

Brake and clutch systemR illuminates red.The brake and clutch fluid level is toolow, when manual parking brake isnot applied 3 265.


9 Warning

Stop. Do not continue yourjourney. Consult a workshop.

Illuminates when the manual parkingbrake is applied and ignition isswitched on 3 214.

Operate pedal- illuminates or flashes yellow.

IlluminatesBrake pedal must be depressed torelease the electric parking brake3 214Clutch pedal must be depressed tostart the engine in Autostop mode.Stop-start system 3 202.

FlashesClutch pedal must to be depressed tostart the engine with the key 3 17,3 200.

On some versions, the message tooperate the clutch pedal is indicatedin the Driver Information Centre3 122.

Electric parking brakem illuminates or flashes red.

IlluminatesElectric parking brake is applied3 214.

FlashesElectric parking brake is not fullyapplied or released. Switch onignition, depress brake pedal andattempt to reset the system by firstreleasing and then applying theelectric parking brake. If m remainsflashing, do not drive and seek theassistance of a workshop.

Electric parking brake faultj illuminates or flashes yellow.

IlluminatesElectric parking brake is operatingwith degraded performance 3 214.

FlashesElectric parking brake is in servicemode. Stop vehicle, apply andrelease the electric parking brake toreset.

9 Warning

Have the cause of the faultremedied immediately by aworkshop.

Antilock brake system(ABS)u illuminates yellow.Illuminates for a few seconds after theignition is switched on. The system isready for operation when the controlindicator extinguishes.If the control indicator does notextinguish after a few seconds, or if itilluminates while driving, there is a


fault in the ABS. The brake systemremains operational but without ABSregulation.Antilock brake system 3 214.

Gear shiftingR with the number of a higher gear isindicated, when upshifting isrecommended for fuel savingreasons.

Power steeringc illuminates yellow.

Illuminates with power steeringreducedPower steering is reduced due tooverheating of the system. Controlindicator extinguishes when thesystem has cooled down.Stop-start system 3 202.

Illuminates with power steeringdisabledFailure in the power steering system.Consult a workshop.

Following distanceE indicates the following distancesetting of the alert timing sensitivityfor the forward collision alert usingfilled distance bars.Forward collision alert 3 230.

Lane departure warning) illuminates green or flashes yellow.

Illuminates greenSystem is switched on and ready tooperate.

Flashes yellowSystem recognizes an unintendedlane change.

Electronic Stability Controloffn illuminates yellow.The system is deactivated.

Electronic Stability Controland Traction Control systemb illuminates or flashes yellow.

IlluminatesA fault in the system is present.Continued driving is possible. Drivingstability, however, may deterioratedepending on road surfaceconditions.Have the cause of the fault remediedby a workshop.

FlashesThe system is actively engaged.Engine output may be reduced andthe vehicle may be brakedautomatically to a small degree.Electronic Stability Control 3 218,Traction Control system 3 217.

Traction Control system offk illuminates yellow.The system is deactivated.


Preheating! illuminates yellow.Preheating is activated. Onlyactivates when outside temperatureis low.

Diesel particle filter% illuminates or flashes yellow.The diesel particle filter requirescleaning.Continue driving until %extinguishes. If possible, do not allowengine speed to drop below2000 rpm.

IlluminatesThe diesel particle filter is full. Startcleaning process as soon aspossible.

FlashesThe maximum filling level of the filteris reached. Start cleaning processimmediately to avoid damage to theengine.Diesel particle filter 3 205, Stop-startsystem 3 202.

AdBlueY flashes yellow.AdBlue level is low. Refill AdBluesoon to avoid prevention of theengine start.AdBlue 3 207.

Tyre pressure monitoringsystemw illuminates or flashes yellow.

IlluminatesTyre pressure loss. Stop immediatelyand check tyre pressure.

FlashesFault in system or tyre withoutpressure sensor mounted (e.g. sparewheel). After 60-90 seconds thecontrol indicator illuminatescontinuously. Consult a workshop.

Engine oil pressureI illuminates red.

Illuminates when the ignition isswitched on and extinguishes shortlyafter the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine isrunning

Caution

Engine lubrication may beinterrupted. This may result indamage to the engine and/orlocking of the drive wheels.

1. Depress clutch.2. Select neutral gear, set selector

lever to N.3. Move out of the flow of traffic as

quickly as possible withoutimpeding other vehicles.

4. Switch off ignition.


9 Warning

When the engine is off,considerably more force is neededto brake and steer. During anAutostop the brake servo unit willstill be operational.Do not remove key until vehicle isstationary, otherwise the steeringwheel lock could engageunexpectedly.

Check oil level before seeking theassistance of a workshop 3 262.

Low fuelY illuminates or flashes yellow.

IlluminatesLevel in fuel tank is too low.

FlashesFuel used up. Refuel immediately.Never run the tank dry.Refuelling 3 248.Catalytic converter 3 206.

Bleeding the diesel fuel system3 267.

Immobiliserd flashes yellow.Fault in the immobiliser system. Theengine cannot be started.

Exterior light8 illuminates green.The exterior lights are on 3 130.

High beamC illuminates blue.Illuminates when high beam is on,during headlight flash 3 131, or whenhigh beam is on with high beam assist3 131.

High beam assistf illuminates green.The high beam assist is activated3 134.

LED headlightsf illuminates or flashes yellow.

IlluminatesFault in the system.Seek the assistance of a workshop.

FlashesSystem is switched to symmetricallow beam.Control indicator f flashes for approx.four seconds after the ignition isswitched on as a reminder forsymmetrical headlight 3 133.

Fog light> illuminates green.The front fog lights are on 3 135.

Rear fog lightr illuminates yellow.The rear fog light is on 3 136.

Cruise controlm illuminates white or green.


Illuminates whiteThe system is on.

Illuminates greenCruise control is active. Set speed isindicated in the Driver InformationCentre.Cruise control 3 220.

Adaptive cruise controlm illuminates white or green.C illuminates in the DriverInformation Centre.

m illuminates whiteThe system is on.

m illuminates greenAdaptive cruise control is active.When Adaptive cruise control is on oractive, C with the set speed isindicated in the Driver InformationCentre.Adaptive cruise control 3 223.

Vehicle detected aheadA illuminates green.

Illuminates greenA vehicle ahead is detected in thesame lane.Adaptive cruise control 3 223,Forward collision alert 3 230.

Speed limiterL illuminates in the DriverInformation Centre when Speedlimiter is active. Set speed is indicatedalongside L symbol.Speed limiter 3 222.

Traffic sign assistantL displays detected traffic signs as acontrol indicator.Traffic sign assistant 3 241.

Door openh illuminates red.A door or the tailgate is open.

Information displaysDriver Information CentreThe Driver Information Centre islocated in the instrument cluster.The following menus are selectable inthe Driver Information Centre usingthe buttons on the turn signal lever:

● trip/fuel information, displayedby ;, see description below

● vehicle information, displayedby ?, see description below

● economy information menu,displayed by @, seedescription below


The following indications appear ifrequired:● warning messages 3 122● gear shift indication 3 114● drive mode indication 3 210● tyre pressure warning 3 284● seat belt reminder indication

3 111● service information 3 107

Some of the displayed functions differwhen the vehicle is being driven or ata standstill. Some functions are onlyavailable when the vehicle is beingdriven.

Selecting menus and functionsThe menus and functions can beselected via the buttons on the turnsignal lever.

Press MENU to switch between themenus or to return from a submenu tothe next higher menu level.

Turn the adjuster wheel to select asubmenu of the main menu or to seta numeric value.

Press SET/CLR to select and confirma function.Vehicle and service messages arepopped-up in the Driver InformationCentre if required. Confirm messagesby pressing SET/CLR. Vehiclemessages 3 122.

Trip/Fuel information ;Possible pages are:● digital vehicle speed● trip odometer


● average fuel economy● average vehicle speed● instantaneous fuel economy● fuel range● fuel range, bi-fuel engine● fuel level, bi-fuel engine● timer

Digital vehicle speedDigital display of the instantaneousspeed.

Trip odometerTrip odometer displays the currentdistance since a certain reset.Trip odometer counts up to 9999 kmand then restarts at 0.Turn the adjuster wheel to selectbetween trip page 1 and 2.To reset, press SET/CLR for a fewseconds while viewing this page.The information of trip page 1 and 2can be reset separately while therespective display is active.

Average fuel economyDisplay of average consumption. Themeasurement can be reset at anytime and starts with a default value.To reset, press SET/CLR for a fewseconds while viewing this page.The information of trip page 1 and 2can be reset separately while therespective display is active.On vehicles with bi-fuel engines:Average consumption is indicated forthe currently selected mode, LPG,CNG or petrol.

Average vehicle speedDisplay of average speed. Themeasurement can be reset at anytime.To reset, press SET/CLR for a fewseconds while viewing this page.The information of trip page 1 and 2can be reset separately while therespective display is active.

Instantaneous fuel economyDisplay of the instantaneousconsumption.

On vehicles with bi-fuel engines:Instantaneous consumption isindicated for the currently selectedmode, LPG, CNG or petrol.

Fuel rangeRange is calculated from current fueltank level and current consumption.The display shows average values.After refuelling, the range is updatedautomatically after a brief delay.When the fuel level in the tank is low,a message appears on the displayand control indicator Y in the fuelgauge illuminates.When the tank must be refuelledimmediately, a warning messageappears and remains on the display.Additionally, control indicator Yflashes in the fuel gauge 3 116.


Fuel range, bi-fuel engine

Display of the approximate total fuelrange and for each fuel tank (LPG orCNG and petrol). A low fuel level ineither tank is indicated by Low in therespective section.

Fuel level, bi-fuel engineDisplay of the fuel level in percent forthe currently selected mode, LPG,CNG or petrol.

TimerTo operate follow the instructions onthe display.

Vehicle information ?Possible pages are:● unit● speed warning● remaining engine oil life

indication● tyre pressure● tyre load● following distance● traffic sign assistant

UnitPress SET/CLR while page isdisplayed. Select imperial (unit 1) ormetric (unit 3) by turning the adjusterwheel. Press SET/CLR to set the unitof measurement.

Speed warning

The speed warning function alerts thedriver when a set speed is exceeded.To set the speed warning, pressSET/CLR while the page is displayed.Turn the adjuster wheel to select thevalue. Press SET/CLR to set thespeed.If the selected speed limit isexceeded, a warning chime sounds.Once the speed is set, this featurecan be turned off by pressingSET/CLR while viewing this page.


Remaining oil lifeIndicates an estimate of the oil'suseful life. The number in percentagemeans the current remaining oil lifeand indicates when to change theengine oil and filter 3 107.

Tyre pressureTyre pressures of all wheels aredisplayed on this page during driving3 284.

Tyre loadThe tyre pressure category accordingto the actual tyre inflation pressurecan be selected 3 284.

Following distanceDisplays the distance in seconds to apreceding moving vehicle 3 233. IfAdaptive cruise control is active thispage shows the following distancesetting instead.

Traffic sign assistantDisplays the detected traffic signs forthe current route section 3 241.

Economy information menu@Possible pages are:● economy trend● economy index● top consumers

Economy trend

Displays the average consumptiondevelopment over a distance of50 km. Filled segments display theconsumption in 5 km steps and showsthe effect of topography or drivingbehaviour on fuel consumption.Graph can be reset by pressingSET/CLR.

Economy indexThe current fuel consumption isindicated on an economic scale. Foreconomical driving, adapt drivingstyle to keep the filled segmentswithin the Eco area. The moresegments are filled, the higher thefuel consumption.Simultaneously, the averageconsumption value is indicated.

Top consumersList of top comfort consumerscurrently switched on is displayed indescending order. Fuel savingpotential is indicated.During sporadic driving conditions,the engine will activate the heatedrear window automatically to increasethe engine load. In this event, theheated rear window is indicated asone of the top consumers, withoutactivation by the driver.

Info displayThe Info-Display is located in theinstrument panel near the instrumentcluster.


The vehicle has a 7'' R 4.0 IntelliLinkdisplay with touch-screenfunctionality.The Info displays can indicate:● time 3 100● outside temperature 3 100● date 3 100● Infotainment system, see

description in the Infotainmentmanual

● indication of rear view camera3 240

● parking assist indication 3 235● navigation, see description in the

Infotainment manual● system messages● settings for vehicle

personalisation 3 124

R 4.0 IntelliLink

Selecting menus and settingsMenus and settings are accessed viathe display.

Press X to switch on the display.Press ; to display the homepage.Touch required menu display iconwith the finger.Touch a respective icon to confirm aselection.Touch 9 to return to the next highermenu level.Press ; to return to the homepage.For further information, seeInfotainment manual.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Vehicle messagesMessages are indicated mainly in theDriver Information Centre, in somecases together with a warning andsignal chime.

Vehicle and service messages inthe Driver Information CentreThe vehicle messages are displayedas text. Follow the instructions givenin the messages.Press SET/CLR, MENU or turn theadjuster wheel to confirm a message.


Messages in the Info-DisplaySome important messages appearadditionally in the Info-Display. Somemessages only pop-up for a fewseconds.

Warning chimesWhen starting the engine or whilstdrivingOnly one warning chime will sound ata time.The warning chime regardingunfastened seat belts has priorityover any other warning chime.● If seat belt is not fastened.● If a door or the tailgate is not fully

closed when starting-off.● If a certain speed is exceeded

with parking brake applied.● If adaptive cruise control

deactivates automatically.● If approaching a vehicle ahead

too closely.● If a programmed speed or speed

limit is exceeded.

● If a warning message appears inthe Driver Information Centre.

● If the parking assist detects anobject.

● If an unintended lane changeoccurs.

● If reverse gear is engaged andthe rear carrier system isextended.

● If the diesel particle filter hasreached the maximum fillinglevel.

When the vehicle is parked and/orthe driver's door is opened● With exterior lights on.

During an Autostop● If the driver's door is opened.● If any condition for an autostart is

not fulfilled.

Battery voltageWhen the vehicle battery voltage isrunning low, a warning message willappear in the Driver InformationCentre.

1. Switch off immediately anyelectrical consumers which arenot required for a safe ride, e.g.seat heating, heated rear windowor other main consumers.

2. Charge the vehicle battery bydriving continuously for a while orby using a charging device.

The warning message will disappearafter the engine has been started twotimes consecutively without a voltagedrop.If the vehicle battery cannot berecharged, have the cause of the faultremedied by a workshop.


Vehicle personalisationThe vehicle's behaviour can bepersonalised by changing the settingsin the Info-Display.Some of the personal settings fordifferent drivers can be memorisedindividually for each vehicle key.Memorised settings 3 22.Depending on vehicle equipment andcountry-specific regulations, some ofthe functions described below maynot be available.Some functions are only displayed oractive when the engine is running.

Personal settings7" IntelliLink DisplayPress ;, select Settings and thenVehicle on the touch-screen.

In the corresponding submenus thefollowing settings can be changed:

Vehicle● Climate & Air Quality

Auto Fan Max Speed: Modifiesthe fan regulation. Changedsetting will be active afterswitching the ignition off and onagain.Air Conditioning Mode: Activatesor deactivates cooling whenswitching on the ignition or usesthe last chosen setting.Auto Defog: Activates ordeactivates auto defog.

Auto Rear Defog: Automaticallyactivates heated rear window.

● Collision / Detection SystemsPark Assist: Activates ordeactivates the ultrasonicparking assist. Activation isselectable with or withoutattached trailer coupling.Auto Collision Preparation:Activates or deactivates theautomatic brake functionality ofthe vehicle in the event ofimminent collision danger. Thefollowing is selectable: thesystem will take over brakecontrol, warn by chimes only or isdeactivated completely.Side Blind Zone Alert: Activatesor deactivates side blind zonealert.

● Comfort and ConvenienceChime Volume: Changes thevolume of warning chimes.Personalization By Driver:Activates or deactivates thepersonalisation function.Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear:Activates or deactivates


automatic switching on of therear window wiper when reversegear is engaged.

● LightingVehicle Locator Lights: Activatesor deactivates the entry lighting.Exit Lighting: Activates ordeactivates and changes theduration of exit lighting.

● Power Door LocksUnlocked Door Anti Lock Out:Activates or deactivates the doorlocking function while a door isopen.Auto Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the automatic doorunlocking function after switchingoff ignition. Activates ordeactivates the automatic doorlocking function after driving-off.Delayed Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the delayed doorlocking function.

● Remote Lock, Unlock, StartRemote Unlock Light Feedback:Activates or deactivates the

hazard warning flasher feedbackwhilst unlocking.Remote Lock Feedback:Changes what kind of feedbackis given when locking the vehicle.Remote Door Unlock: Changesthe configuration to unlock onlythe driver's door or the wholevehicle whilst unlocking.Relock Remotely UnlockedDoors: Activates or deactivatesthe automatic relock functionafter unlocking without openingthe vehicle.

Telematics serviceOnStarOnStar is a personal connectivity andservice assistant with integratedWi-Fi hotspot. The OnStar service isavailable 24 hours a day, seven daysa week.NoteOnStar is not available for allmarkets. For further information,contact your workshop.NoteIn order to be available andoperational, OnStar needs a validOnStar subscription, functioningvehicle electrics, mobile service andGPS satellite link.

To activate the OnStar services andset up an account, press Z and speakwith an advisor.


Depending on the equipment of thevehicle, the following services areavailable:● Emergency services and support

in the case of a vehiclebreakdown

● Wi-Fi hotspot● Smartphone application● Remote control, e.g. location of

the vehicle, activation of horn andlights, control of central lockingsystem

● Stolen vehicle assistance● Vehicle diagnostics● Destination downloadNoteThe OnStar module of the vehicle isdeactivated after ten days without anignition cycle. Functions requiring adata connection will be availableagain after switching on the ignition.

OnStar buttons

NoteDepending on the equipment, theOnStar buttons can also beintegrated in the rear view mirror.

Privacy buttonPress and hold j until a message isheard to activate or deactivate thetransmission of the vehicle location.Press j to answer a call or to end acall to an advisor.Press j to access the Wi-Fi settings.

Service buttonPress Z to establish a connection toan advisor.

SOS buttonPress [ to establish a priorityemergency connection to a speciallytrained emergency advisor.

Status LEDGreen: The system is ready withactivated transmission of the vehiclelocation.Green flashing: The system is on acall.Red: A problem arose.Off: The system is ready withdeactivated transmission of thevehicle location or the system is instandby mode.Red / green flashing for a short periodof time: The transmission of thevehicle location has beendeactivated.

OnStar services

General servicesIf you need any information e.g.opening hours, points of interest anddestinations or if you need anysupport e.g. in the case of a vehicle


breakdown, a flat tyre and empty fueltank, press Z to establish aconnection to an advisor.

Emergency servicesIn the case of an emergency situation,press [ and talk to an advisor. Theadvisor then contacts emergency orassistance service providers anddirects them to your vehicle.In the case of an accident withactivation of airbags or belttensioners, an automatic emergencycall is established. The advisor isimmediately connected to yourvehicle to see whether help isneeded.

Wi-Fi hotspotThe Wi-Fi hotspot of the vehicleprovides internet connectivity with amaximum speed of 4G/LTE.NoteThe Wi-Fi hotspot functionality is notavailable for all markets.

Up to seven devices may beconnected.

To connect a mobile device with theWi-Fi hotspot:1. Press j and then select Wi-Fi

settings on the Info-Display. Thesettings displayed include the Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password and connection type.

2. Start a Wi-Fi network search onyour mobile device.

3. Select your vehicle hotspot(SSID) when listed.

4. When prompted, enter thepassword on your mobile device.

NoteTo change the SSID or password,press Z and talk to an advisor or login to your account.

To switch off the Wi-Fi hotspotfunctionality, press Z to call anadvisor.

Smartphone appWith the myOpel smartphone app,some vehicle functions can beoperated remotely.

The following functions are available:● Lock or unlock vehicle.● Honk horn or flash lights.● Check fuel level, engine oil life

and tyre pressure (only with tyrepressure monitoring system).

● Send navigation destination tothe vehicle, if equipped with abuilt-in navigation system.

● Locate vehicle on a map.● Manage Wi-Fi settings.

To operate these functions, downloadthe app from App Store® orGoogle Play™ Store.

Remote controlIf desired, use any phone to call anadvisor, who can remotely operatespecific vehicle functions. Find therespective OnStar phone number onour country-specific website.The following functions are available:● Lock or unlock vehicle.● Provide information on the

vehicle location.● Honk horn or flash lights.


Stolen vehicle assistanceIf the vehicle is stolen, report the theftto the authorities and request OnStarstolen vehicle assistance. Use anyphone to call an advisor. Find therespective OnStar phone number onour country-specific website.OnStar can provide support inlocating and recovering the vehicle.Theft alertWhen the anti-theft alarm system istriggered, a notification is sent toOnStar. You are then informed aboutthis event by text message or email.Restart preventionBy sending remote signals, OnStarcan prevent the vehicle fromrestarting once it has been turned off.

On-demand diagnosticsAt any time e.g. if the vehicle displaysa vehicle message, press Z tocontact an advisor and ask tocomplete a real-time diagnostic checkto directly determine the issue.Depending on the results, the advisorwill provide further support.

Diagnostic reportThe vehicle automatically transmitsdiagnostic data to OnStar whichsends a monthly email report to youand your preferred workshop.NoteThe workshop notification functioncan be disabled in your account.

The report contains the status of keyoperating systems of the vehicle likeengine, transmission, airbags, ABS,and other major systems. It alsoprovides information on possiblemaintenance items and tyre pressure(only with tyre pressure monitoringsystem).To look at the information in greaterdetail, select the link within the emailand log in to your account.

Destination downloadA desired destination can be directlydownloaded to the navigation system.Press Z to call an advisor anddescribe the destination or point ofinterest.

The advisor can look up any addressor point of interest and directly sendthe destination to the built-innavigation system.

OnStar settings

OnStar PINTo have full access to all OnStarservices, a four-digit PIN is required.The PIN has to be personalised whenfirst talking to an advisor.To change the PIN, press Z to call anadvisor.

Account dataAn OnStar subscriber has an accountwhere all the data is stored. Torequest a change of the accountinformation, press Z and talk to anadvisor or log in to your account.If the OnStar service is used onanother vehicle, press Z and requestthat the account be transferred to thenew vehicle.


NoteIn any case, if the vehicle is disposedof, sold or otherwise transferred,immediately inform OnStar aboutthe changes and terminate theOnStar service on this vehicle.

Vehicle locationThe vehicle location is transmitted toOnStar when service is requested ortriggered. A message on the Info-Display informs about thistransmission.To activate or deactivate thetransmission of the vehicle location,press and hold j until an audiomessage is heard.The deactivation is indicated by thestatus light flashing red and green fora short period of time and each timethe vehicle is started.NoteIf the transmission of the vehiclelocation is deactivated, someservices are no longer available.NoteThe vehicle location always remainsaccessible to OnStar in the case ofan emergency.

Find the privacy policy in youraccount.

Software updatesOnStar may remotely carry outsoftware updates without furthernotice or consent. These updates areto enhance or maintain safety andsecurity or the operation of thevehicle.These updates may concern privacyissues. Find the privacy policy in youraccount.

130 Lighting

Lighting

Exterior lighting .......................... 130Light switch .............................. 130Automatic light control ............. 131High beam ............................... 131High beam assist ..................... 131Headlight flash ......................... 132Headlight range adjustment .... 132Headlights when drivingabroad .................................... 133

Daytime running lights ............. 133LED headlights ........................ 134Hazard warning flashers .......... 135Turn and lane-change signals . 135Front fog lights ......................... 135Rear fog light ........................... 136Parking lights ........................... 136Reversing lights ....................... 136Misted light covers ................... 136

Interior lighting ........................... 137Instrument panel illuminationcontrol ..................................... 137

Interior lights ............................ 137Reading lights .......................... 138Sunvisor lights ......................... 138

Lighting features ........................ 138Centre console lighting ............ 138Entry lighting ............................ 138Exit lighting .............................. 138Battery discharge protection .... 139

Exterior lightingLight switch

Turn light switch:AUTO : automatic light control

switches automaticallybetween daytime runninglight and headlight

8 : sidelights9 : headlights

When switching on the ignition,automatic light control is active.Control indicator 8 3 116.

Lighting 131

Tail lightsTail lights are illuminated togetherwith low/high beam and sidelights.

Automatic light control

When the automatic light controlfunction is switched on and theengine is running, the systemswitches between daytime runninglights and headlights automaticallydepending on the external lightingconditions and information given bythe rain sensor system.

When the automatic light controlfunction is switched on and theengine is running, the systemswitches between daytime runninglights and headlights automaticallydepending on the external lightingconditions.Daytime running light 3 133.

Automatic headlight activationDuring poor lighting conditions theheadlights are switched on.The headlights are also switched onif the windscreen wipers have beenactivated for several wipes.

Tunnel detectionWhen a tunnel is entered headlightsare switched on immediately.

High beam

Push lever to switch from low to highbeam.Pull lever to deactivate high beam.High beam assist 3 134.

High beam assistThis feature allows high beam tofunction as the main driving light atnight and when vehicle speedexceeds 40 km/h.

132 Lighting

It switches automatically to low beamwhen:● The camera or a sensor in the

windscreen detects the lights ofoncoming or preceding vehicles.

● The vehicle speed drops below20 km/h.

● It is foggy or snowy.● Driving in urban areas.

If there are no restrictions detected,the system switches back to highbeam.

Activation

The high beam assist is activated bypushing the indicator lever twice witha speed above 40 km/h.The green control indicator filluminates continuously when theassist is activated, the blue one 7illuminates when high beam is on.Control indicator f 3 116.

DeactivationPush indicator lever once. It is alsodeactivated when front fog lights areswitched on.If a headlight flash is activated whenthe high beam is on, the high beamassist will be deactivated.If a headlight flash is activated whenthe high beam is off, the high beamassist will remain activated.The latest setting of the high beamassist will remain after the ignition isswitched on again.

Headlight flashTo activate the headlight flash, pulllever.Pulling lever deactivates high beam.

LED headlights 3 134.

Headlight range adjustmentManual headlight rangeadjustment

To adapt headlight range to thevehicle load to prevent dazzling: turnthumb wheel ? to required position.0 : front seats occupied1 : all seats occupied2 : all seats occupied and load

compartment laden3 : driver's seat occupied and load

compartment laden

Lighting 133

Dynamic automatic headlightlevelling 3 134.

Headlights when drivingabroadThe asymmetrical headlight beamextends visibility at the edge of theroad at the passenger side.However, when driving in countrieswhere traffic drives on the oppositeside of the road, adjust the headlightsto prevent dazzling of oncomingtraffic.

Vehicles with halogen headlight

There is a white adjuster element onthe rear of each headlight housing.Turn adjuster element on eachheadlight housing 1/2 turn with asize six hexagon key anticlockwise toset to right-hand traffic mode. Toadjust, insert the key in the guide asshown in the illustration. Alternatively,a Phillips head screwdriversize three can be used for setting.To reset to left-hand traffic mode, turnadjuster elements on both headlighthousings 1/2 turn clockwise.

Vehicles with LED headlight

1. Key in ignition switch.2. Pull turn signal lever and hold

(headlight flash).3. Switch on ignition.4. After approx. five seconds the

control indicator f starts flashingand an acoustic signal sounds.

Control indicator f 3 116.Every time the ignition is switched on,f flashes as a reminder for approx.four seconds.For deactivation, operate the sameprocedure as described above. f willnot flash when function isdeactivated.

Daytime running lightsDaytime running light increasesvisibility of the vehicle during daylight.They are switched on automaticallywhen the engine is running.The system switches betweendaytime running lights and headlightsautomatically, depending on thelighting conditions. Automatic lightcontrol 3 131.

134 Lighting

LED headlightsLED lighting system includes:● LED headlights for low and high

beam● cornering lights● town light● high beam assist● reverse parking function● eco mode● dynamic automatic headlight

levelling

LED headlights for low andhighbeamLED headlights for low and high beamensure better visibility under allconditions.Operation is the same as for halogenheadlights.Light switch 3 130, high beam 3 131,headlight flash 3 132, headlightswhen driving abroad 3 133.Automatic light control 3 131.

Cornering lights

On tight bends or when turning off,depending on the steering angle orthe indicator light signal, an additionalleft or right reflector is switched onwhich illuminates the road in thedirection of travel. It is activated up toa speed of 70 km/h.

Town light

Activated automatically at a speed upto approx. 55 km/h. In situations withexterior ambient light both corneringlights are switched on with reducedintensity. The light is wide andsymmetrical.

High beam assist3 131

Reverse parking functionTo assist driver's orientation whenparking, both corner lights andreversing light illuminate whenheadlights are on and reverse gear isengaged. They remain illuminated fora short time after disengaging reversegear or until driving faster than7 km/h in a forward gear.

Eco modeIf the vehicle stops, e. g. due to trafficlights, an energy saving mode forheadlights is activated.

Dynamic automatic headlightlevellingTo prevent oncoming traffic frombeing dazzled, headlight levelling isautomatically adjusted based onvehicle inclination information.

Headlights when driving abroad3 133.

Lighting 135

Fault in LED headlight systemWhen the system detects a failure inthe LED headlight system, filluminates and a warning is displayedin the Driver Information Centre.

Hazard warning flashers

Operated by pressing ¨.In the event of an accident with airbagdeployment the hazard warningflashers are activated automatically.

Turn and lane-changesignals

lever up : right turn signallever down : left turn signal

A resistance point can be felt whenmoving the lever.Constant flashing is activated whenthe lever is being moved beyond theresistance point. It is deactivatedwhen the steering wheel is moved inthe opposite direction or lever ismanually moved back to its neutralposition.

Activate temporary flashing byholding the lever just before theresistance point. Turning lights willflash until lever is being released.To activate three flashes, tap thelever briefly without passing theresistance point.When a trailer is connected, turnsignal flashes six times whenpressing the lever until resistance isfelt and then releasing.

Front fog lights

Operated by pressing >.

136 Lighting

Light switch in position AUTO:switching on front fog lights will switchheadlights on automatically.

Rear fog light

Operated by pressing r.Light switch in position AUTO:switching on rear fog light will switchheadlights on automatically.Light switch in position 8: rear foglight can only be switched on withfront fog lights.The vehicle rear fog light isdeactivated when towing a trailer or aplug is connected with the socket, e.g. when a bicycle carrier is used.

Parking lights

When the vehicle is parked, theparking lights on one side can beactivated:1. Switch off ignition.2. Move turn signal lever all the way

up (right parking lights) or down(left parking lights).

Confirmed by a signal and thecorresponding turn signal controlindicator.

Reversing lightsThe reversing light comes on whenthe ignition is on and reverse gear isselected.

Misted light coversThe inside of the light housing maymist up briefly in poor, wet and coldweather conditions, in heavy rain orafter washing. The mist disappearsquickly by itself; to help switch on theheadlights.

Lighting 137

Interior lightingInstrument panelillumination control

Brightness of the following lights canbe adjusted when the exterior lightsare on:● instrument panel illumination● Info-Display● illuminated switches and

operation elementsTurn thumb wheel A and hold untilthe desired brightness is obtained.

Interior lightsDuring entry and exit of the vehicle,the front and rear courtesy lightsautomatically switch on and then offafter a delay.NoteIn the event of an accident withairbag deployment the courtesylights are turned on automatically.

Front courtesy light

Operate rocker switch:w : automatic switching on

and offpress u : onpress v : off

Rear courtesy lights

Illuminate in conjunction with the frontcourtesy light depending on rockerswitch position.

138 Lighting

Reading lights

Operated by pressing s and t infront and rear courtesy lights.

Sunvisor lightsIlluminates when the cover is opened.

Lighting featuresCentre console lightingSpotlight incorporated in the interiorlighting comes on when headlightsare switched on.

Entry lightingWelcome lightingHeadlights, tail lights, number platelights, instrument panel light, interiorlights and the light pipes in doors andFlexConsole are switched on for ashort time by unlocking the vehiclewith the radio remote control. Thisfunction works only in the dark andfacilitates locating the vehicle.The lighting switches off immediatelywhen the ignition key is turned toposition 1 3 199.Activation or deactivation of thisfunction can be changed in theSettings menu in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.The settings can be saved for the keybeing used 3 22.

The following lights will additionallyswitch on when the driver's door isopened:● illumination of some switches● Driver Information Centre● door pocket lights

Exit lightingThe following lights switch on if thekey is removed from the ignitionswitch:● interior lights● instrument panel light (only when

it is dark)● light tubes in doors● number plate lights (puddle

lights)They will switch off automatically aftera delay and will be activated again ifthe driver's door is opened.

Path lightingHeadlights, tail lights and numberplate lights illuminate the surroundingarea for an adjustable time afterleaving the vehicle.

Lighting 139

Activating

1. Switch off ignition.2. Remove ignition key.3. Open driver's door.4. Pull turn signal lever.5. Close driver's door.

If the driver's door is not closed, thelights switch off after two minutes.Exit lighting is switched offimmediately if the turn signal lever ispulled while the driver's door is open.Activation, deactivation and durationof this function can be changed in theSettings menu in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

The settings can be saved for the keybeing used 3 22.

Battery discharge protectionTo prevent discharge of the vehiclebattery when the ignition is switchedoff, some interior lights are switchedoff automatically after some time.

140 Infotainment system

Infotainment system

Introduction ................................ 140General information ................. 140Theft-deterrent feature ............ 141Control elements overview ...... 142Usage ...................................... 145

Basic operation .......................... 148Tone settings ........................... 150Volume settings ....................... 151System settings ....................... 152

Radio ......................................... 154Usage ...................................... 154Station search ......................... 154Favourite lists .......................... 156Radio data system (RDS) ........ 157Digital audio broadcasting ....... 158

External devices ........................ 159General information ................. 159Playing audio ........................... 161Displaying pictures .................. 162Playing movies ........................ 163Using smartphoneapplications ............................ 164

Navigation .................................. 166General information ................. 166Usage ...................................... 167

Destination input ...................... 171Guidance ................................. 176

Speech recognition .................... 180General information ................. 180Usage ...................................... 180

Phone ........................................ 180General information ................. 180Bluetooth connection ............... 181Emergency call ........................ 183Operation ................................. 184Mobile phones and CB radioequipment ............................... 188

IntroductionGeneral informationThe Infotainment system providesyou with state-of-the-art in-carinfotainment.Using radio tuner functions, you mayregister up to 25 stations on fivefavourites pages.You can connect external datastorage devices to the Infotainmentsystem as further audio sources;either via cable or via Bluetooth®.The navigation system with dynamicroute planning will reliably guide youto your destination, and, if desired,automatically avoid traffic jams orother traffic problems.In addition, the Infotainment system isequipped with a phone portal thatallows for comfortable and safe use ofyour mobile phone in the vehicle.You can also operate specificsmartphone applications via theInfotainment system.

Infotainment system 141

Optionally, the Infotainment systemcan be operated using the touchscreen and buttons on the controlpanel, the controls on the steeringwheel, or - if provided by your mobilephone - via speech recognition.The well-thought-out design of thecontrol elements, the touch screenand the clear displays enable you tocontrol the system easily andintuitively.NoteThis manual describes all optionsand features available for thevarious Infotainment systems.Certain descriptions, including thosefor display and menu functions, maynot apply to your vehicle due tomodel variant, countryspecifications, special equipment oraccessories.

Important information onoperation and traffic safety

9 Warning

The Infotainment system must beused so that the vehicle can bedriven safely at all times. If indoubt, stop the vehicle andoperate the Infotainment systemwhile the vehicle is stationary.

9 Warning

In some areas one-way streetsand other roads and entrances(e.g. pedestrian zones) that youare not allowed to turn into are notmarked on the map. In such areasthe Infotainment system mayissue a warning that must beaccepted. Here you must payparticular attention to one-waystreets, roads and entrances thatyou are not allowed to drive into.

Radio receptionRadio reception may be disrupted bystatic, noise, distortion or loss ofreception due to:● changes in distance from the

transmitter● multipath reception due to

reflection● shadowing

Theft-deterrent featureThe Infotainment system is equippedwith an electronic security system forthe purpose of theft deterrence.The Infotainment system thereforefunctions only in your vehicle and isworthless to a thief.


Control elements overviewControl panel


1 Display / Touch screen ....... 1482 Home menu ........................ 148

Screen buttons for access to:

AUDIO: audio functions

GALLERY: picture andmovie functions

PHONE: mobile phone functions

PROJECTION: phone projection

NAV: BringGo® app

SETTINGS: system settings

OnStar: OnStar Wi-Fisettings ................................ 145

3 Time, date andtemperature indicators ........ 152

4 g

Short press: open phonemenu ................................... 184

or open phone projectionfunction (if activated) ........... 164

Long press: activatespeech recognition .............. 180

5 v

Short press: skip to nextstation when radio active .... 154

or skip to next track whenexternal devices active ....... 161

Long press: seek up whenradio active .......................... 154

or fast forward whenexternal devices active ....... 161

6 m

Short press: switch onInfotainment system ifturned off ............................. 145

or mute system if turned on 145

Long press: switch offInfotainment system ............ 145

Turn: adjust volume ............ 1457 t

Short press: skip toprevious station whenradio active .......................... 154

or skip to previous trackwhen external devicesactive ................................... 161

Long press: seek downwhen radio active ................ 154

or fast rewind whenexternal devices active ....... 161

8 ;

Short press: open homemenu ................................... 145

Long press: open phoneprojection function (ifactivated) ............................ 164


Steering wheel controls

1 qw

Short press: open OnStarmenu if no phoneconnected ........................... 145

or take phone call if phoneconnected ........................... 180

or open phone menu ifphone connected ................ 184

or dial last number in calllist when phone menudisplayed ............................. 184

or switch between callswhen calls are waiting ......... 184

Long press: activatespeech recognition .............. 180

2 SRC (Source) ...................... 145

Press: select audio source .. 145

Turn upwards/downwards: select next/previous preset radiostation when radio active .... 154

or select next/previoustrack/chapter/picturewhen external devicesactive ................................... 161

or select next/previousentry in call list whenphone portal active andcall list open ........................ 184

Turn upwards/downwardsand hold: scroll quicklythrough the entries in thecall list ................................. 184

3 +

Press: increase volume

4 -

Press: reduce volume5 xn

Press: end/decline call ........ 184

or deactivate speechrecognition .......................... 180

or activate/deactivatemute function ...................... 145


UsageControl elementsThe Infotainment system is operatedvia function buttons, a touch screenand menus that are shown on thedisplay.Inputs are made optionally via:● the central control unit in the

control panel 3 142● the touch screen 3 148● audio controls on the steering

wheel 3 142● the speech recognition 3 180

Switching the Infotainmentsystem on or offPress X. After switching on, the lastselected Infotainment sourcebecomes active.

Automatic switch-offIf the Infotainment system has beenswitched on pressing X while theignition is switched off, it will switch offagain automatically 10 minutes afterthe last user input.

Setting the volumeTurn X. The current setting is shownon the display.When the Infotainment system isswitched on, the last selected volumeis set, provided that it is lower than themaximum start-up volume. For adetailed description 3 151.

Speed compensated volumeWhen the speed compensatedvolume is activated 3 151, thevolume is adapted automatically tomake up for the road and wind noiseas you drive.

MutePress X to mute the Infotainmentsystem.To cancel the mute function: pressX again. The last selected volume isset again.

Modes of operationPress ; to display the home menu.

NoteFor a detailed description of menuoperation via touch screen 3 148.

AudioSelect Audio to open the main menuof the last selected audio mode.Select Source on the screen todisplay the interaction selector bar.


To change to another audio mode:touch one of the items in theinteraction selector bar.For a detailed description of:● Radio functions 3 154● External devices (USB,

Bluetooth) 3 161

GallerySelect Gallery to open the picture andmovie menu for files stored on anexternal device such as USB deviceor smartphone.

Select l or m to display the picture ormovie menu. Select the desiredpicture or movie file to show therespective item on the display.

For a detailed description of:● Picture functions 3 162● Movie functions 3 163

PhoneBefore the phone portal can be used,a connection has to be establishedbetween the Infotainment system andthe mobile phone.

For a detailed description ofpreparing and establishing aBluetooth connection between theInfotainment system and a mobilephone 3 180.If the mobile phone is connected,select Phone to display the mainmenu of the phone portal.

For a detailed description of mobilephone operation via the Infotainmentsystem 3 184.

ProjectionTo show specific apps of yoursmartphone display on theInfotainment system, connect yoursmartphone.


Select Projection to start theprojection function.Depending on the smartphoneconnected, a main menu withdifferent selectable apps is displayed.For a detailed description 3 164.

Nav(R 4.0 IntelliLink, if Projection notavailable)To start the BringGo navigationapplication, select Nav.For a detailed description 3 164.

Navigation(Navi 4.0 IntelliLink)Press ; to display the home screen.Select Navigation to display thenavigation map showing the areaaround the current location.

For a detailed description of thenavigation functions 3 166.

SettingsSelect Settings to open a menu forvarious system-related settings, e.g.deactivating Audible TouchFeedback.

OnStarTo display a menu with the OnStarWi-Fi settings, select OnStar.For a detailed description, seeOwner's Manual.


Basic operationThe Infotainment system display hasa touch-sensitive surface that allowsdirect interaction with the displayedmenu controls.

Caution

Do not use pointed or hard itemslike ballpoint pens, pencils orsimilar for touch screen operation.

9 screen button

When operating the menus, press 9in the respective submenu to return tothe next higher menu level.When no 9 screen button isdisplayed, you are on the top level ofthe respective menu. Press ; todisplay the home screen.

Selecting or activating a screenbutton or menu item

Touch a screen button or menu item.The corresponding system function isactivated, a message is shown, or asubmenu with further options isdisplayed.

NoteIn subsequent chapters, theoperating steps for selecting andactivating a screen button or menuitem via the touch screen will bedescribed as "...select <buttonname>/<item name>".

Moving items on the home menu

Touch and hold the element you wishto move until red boxes appeararound the icons. Move your finger tothe desired location and release theelement.


NoteConstant pressure must be appliedand the finger must be moved at aconstant speed.

All other items are rearranged.Press one of the buttons on thecontrol panel to exit edit mode.NoteEdit mode exits automatically after30 seconds of inactivity.

Scrolling lists

If there are more items available thanpresentable on the screen, the listmust be scrolled.

To scroll through a list of menu items,you may optionally:● Place your finger anywhere on

the screen and move it upwardsor downwards.

NoteConstant pressure must be appliedand the finger must be moved at aconstant speed.● Touch S or R at the top or

bottom of the scroll bar.● Move the slider of the scroll bar

up and down with your finger.To return to the top of the list, touchthe list title.NoteIn subsequent chapters, theoperating steps for scrolling to a listitem via the touch screen will bedescribed as "...scroll to <itemname>".

Scrolling pages

NotePages are only scrollable if there ismore than one page available.

To scroll from one page to another:● Place your finger anywhere on

the screen and move it left toscroll to the next page or right toscroll to the previous page.

NoteConstant pressure must be appliedand the finger must be moved at aconstant speed.● Touch q or p on the screen.


NoteIn subsequent chapters, theoperating steps for scrolling pagesvia the touch screen will bedescribed as "...scroll to...page...".

Quick-jumping to the Audio andNavigation applicationUsing the k or j symbols displayedin the top line of some menus, youmay directly jump to a differentapplication.

To directly jump to the Audio menu,select k.To directly jump to the Navigationmenu, select j.

NoteThe j symbol is only available ifroute guidance is active.

Tone settingsIn the tone settings menu, the tonecharacteristics can be set. The menumay be accessed from each audiomain menu.To open the tone settings menu,select Menu in the bottom line of therespective audio main menu. Ifnecessary, scroll through the list ofmenu items and select ToneSettings. The respective menu isdisplayed.

Equaliser modeUse this setting to optimise the tonefor the style of music, e.g. Rock orClassical.Select the desired sound style in theinteraction selector bar at the bottomof the screen. If you choose Custom,you can manually adjust the followingsettings.

BassUse this setting to enhance orattenuate the deep frequencies of theaudio sources.Touch + or - to adjust the setting.

MidrangeUse this setting to enhance orattenuate the midrange frequenciesof the audio source.Touch + or - to adjust the setting.

TrebleUse this setting to enhance orattenuate the high frequencies of theaudio sources.Touch + or - to adjust the setting.


Setting balance and faderUse the illustration at the right side ofthe menu to adjust balance and fader.To define the point in the passengercompartment where the sound is at itshighest level, touch thecorresponding point in the illustration.NoteThe balance and fader settings arevalid for all audio sources. Theycannot be adjusted individually foreach audio source.

Volume settingsAdjusting the maximum startupvolumePress ; and then select Settings.Select Radio, scroll through the listand then select Max Startup Volume.For reasons of security andconvenience, the volume range islimited.Touch + or - to adjust the setting ormove the slider on the volume bar.

Adjusting the speedcompensated volumePress ; and then select Settings.Select Radio, scroll through the listand then select Auto Volume.To adjust the degree of volumeadaptation, select one of the optionsin the list.Off: no enhancement of volume withincreasing vehicle speed.High: maximum enhancement ofvolume with increasing vehiclespeed.

Activating or deactivating theaudible touch feedback functionIf the audible touch feedback functionis activated, each touch of a screenbutton or menu item is indicated by abeeping sound.Press ; and then select Settings.Select Radio and then scroll throughthe list to Audible Touch Feedback.

Touch the screen button next toAudible Touch Feedback to activateor deactivate the function.

Volume of traffic announcementsTo adjust the volume of trafficannouncements, set the desiredvolume while a traffic announcementis given out by the system. Therespective setting is then stored bythe system.


System settingsThe following settings concern thewhole system. All other settings aredescribed by theme in the respectivechapters of this manual.

Time and date settingsPress ; and then select Settings.Select Time and Date to display therespective submenu.

Set Time FormatTo select the desired time format,touch the screen buttons 12 h or 24 h.

Set Date FormatTo select the desired date format,select Set Date Format and choosebetween the available options in thesubmenu.

Auto SetTo choose whether time and date areto be set automatically or manually,select Auto Set.For time and date to be setautomatically, select On - RDS.For time and date to be set manually,select Off - Manual. If Auto Set is setto Off - Manual, the submenu itemsSet Time and Set Date becomeavailable.

Set time and dateTo adjust the time and date settings,select Set Time or Set Date.Touch + and - to adjust the settings.

Language settingsPress ; and then select Settings.Select Language to display therespective menu.

To adjust the language for the menutexts: touch the desired language.

Text scroll functionIf long text is displayed on the screene.g. song titles or station names, thetext may either be scrolled continuallyor it may be scrolled once anddisplayed in truncated form.Press ; and then select Settings.Select Radio.

If you wish the text to be scrolledcontinually, activate Text Scroll.If you wish the text to be scrolled inblocks, deactivate the setting.


Black display functionIf you do not want to see theilluminated display, e.g. during nighttime, you can turn the display off.Press ; and then select Settings.Scroll through the list and select TurnDisplay Off. The display is turned off;the audio functions remain active.To turn the display on again, touch thescreen or press a button.

Factory defaults(R 4.0 IntelliLink)Press ; and then select Settings.Scroll through the list and selectReturn to Factory Settings.To restore all vehicle personalisationsettings, select Restore VehicleSettings.To delete the paired Bluetoothdevices, the contacts list and thevoice mail numbers stored, selectClear All Private Data.To reset tone and volume settings,delete all favourites, and erase theringtone selection, select RestoreRadio Settings.

In each case, a warning message isdisplayed. Select Continue to resetthe settings.

Factory defaults(Navi 4.0 IntelliLink)Press ; and then select Settings.Scroll through the list and selectRestore Factory Settings.

Vehicle settingsTo restore all vehicle personalisationsettings, select Reset VehicleSettings.A pop-up is displayed. Confirm thepop-up message.

Phone informationTo delete the paired Bluetoothdevices, the contacts list and thevoice mail numbers stored, selectClear all phone information.A pop-up is displayed. Confirm thepop-up message.

Radio settingsTo reset tone and volume settingsand delete all favourites, selectRestore Radio Settings.

A pop-up is displayed. Confirm thepop-up message.

Navigation settingsTo reset all navigation parametersand navigation system settings,select Restore Navigation Settings. Asubmenu is displayed.Depending on which set ofparameters you want to reset, selectClear navigation history (recentdestinations), Clear navigationfavourites (favourites) or Resetnavigation options and settings (e.g.settings concerning map display,voice output or route options).A pop-up is displayed. Confirm thepop-up message.

System versionPress ; and then select Settings.Scroll through the list and selectSoftware Information.If a USB device is connected, youmay save the vehicle information tothis USB device.Select System Update and then SaveVehicle Info to USB.


For a system update, contact yourworkshop.

Vehicle settingsVehicle settings are described in theOwner's Manual.

RadioUsageActivating radioPress ; and then select Audio. Theaudio main menu last selected isdisplayed.Select Source in the radio main menuto open the interaction selector bar.

Select the desired waveband.The station last played in the selectedwaveband will be received.

Station searchAutomatic station search

Briefly press or touch t or v on thecontrol panel or on the screen to playthe previous or next station in thestation memory.

Manual station searchPress and hold t or v on thecontrol panel. Release when therequired frequency has almost beenreached.A search is made for the next stationthat can be received and it is playedautomatically.


NoteFM waveband: when the RDSfunction is activated, only RDSstations 3 157 are searched for, andwhen the radio traffic service (TP) isactivated, only traffic servicestations 3 157 are searched for.

Station tuningTouch B on the screen. The Directtune display is shown.

Enter the desired frequency. Use rto delete digits entered. If necessary,touch d or c to subsequently adjustthe input.Confirm the input to play the station.

Station listsSelect Menu in the radio main menuto open the correspondingwaveband-specific submenu.

Select the waveband-specific StationList. All receivable stations of therelevant waveband and in the currentreception area are displayed.Select the desired station.NoteThe currently received radio stationis indicated by the l symbol next tothe station name.

Category listsNumerous radio stations broadcast aPTY code, which specifies the type ofprogramme transmitted (e.g. news).Some stations also change the PTYcode depending on the content whichis currently transmitted.The Infotainment system stores thesestations, sorted by programme type inthe corresponding category list.NoteThe Categories list item is onlyavailable for the FM and the DABwavebands.

To search for a programme typedetermined by the stations, selectCategories.A list of programme types currentlyavailable is displayed.Select the desired programme type. Alist of stations is displayedtransmitting a programme of theselected type.Select the desired station.


NoteThe currently received radio stationis indicated by the l symbol next tothe station name.

Update station listsIf the stations stored in the waveband-specific station list can no longer bereceived, the AM and the DAB stationlists must be updated.NoteThe FM station list is updatedautomatically.

Select Menu in the radio main menuand then select Update Station List.NoteIf a waveband-specific station list isupdated, the correspondingcategory list is also updated.

A station search is started and acorresponding message is displayed.Once the search is finished, therespective station list is displayed.NoteThe currently received radio stationis indicated by the l symbol next tothe station name.

Favourite listsStations of all wavebands can bestored manually in the favourite lists.

Five favourite lists are available, ineach of which five stations may bestored.NoteThe currently received station ishighlighted.

Storing a stationIf required, touch < or > to scrollthrough the favourite pages.

To store the currently active radiostation to a preset screen button:touch and hold the desired screenbutton for a few seconds. Thecorresponding frequency or stationname is displayed on the screenbutton.

Retrieving stationsIf required, touch < or > to scroll tothe desired favourite page.Select the preset screen button onwhich the desired radio station isstored.

Defining the number of availablefavourites pagesTo define the number of favouritespages displayed for selection,press ; and then select Settings onthe screen.Select Radio and then ManageFavourites to display the respectivesubmenu.Depending on which favourites pagesyou want to be displayed, activate ordeactivate the pages.


Radio data system (RDS)RDS is a service of FM stations thatconsiderably facilitates the finding ofthe desired station and its fault-freereception.

Advantages of RDS● On the display, the programme

name of the station appearsinstead of its frequency.

● During a station search, theInfotainment system tunes in toRDS stations only.

● The Infotainment system alwaystunes into the best receivablebroadcasting frequency of the setstation by means of AF(alternative frequency).

● Depending on the station that isreceived, the Infotainmentsystem displays radio text thatcan contain e.g. information onthe current programme.

RDS configurationTouch Menu in the bottom line of theFM radio main menu to open thecorresponding waveband-specificsubmenu.Scroll to RDS.Activate or deactivate RDS.

Traffic ProgrammeRadio traffic service stations are RDSstations that broadcast traffic news. Ifthe traffic service is switched on, thecurrently playing audio source isinterrupted for the duration of thetraffic announcement.

Activating the traffic programmefunctionSelect Menu in the bottom line of theFM radio main menu to open thecorresponding waveband-specificsubmenu.Touch the screen button next toTraffic Program to activate ordeactivate the function.

NoteIn the station list, TP is displayednext to the stations providing a trafficprogramme.

If the radio traffic service is activated,[TP] is shown in the top line of all mainmenus. If the current station is not aradio traffic service station, TP isgreyed-out and a search is startedautomatically for the next radio trafficservice station. As soon as a radiotraffic service station is found, TP ishighlighted. If no radio traffic servicestation is found, TP remains greyed-out.If a traffic announcement isbroadcasted on the respectivestation, a message is displayed.To interrupt the announcement andreturn to the function previouslyactivated, touch the screen or pressm.

RegionalisationSometimes RDS stations broadcastregionally different programmes ondifferent frequencies.


Select Menu in the bottom line of theFM radio main menu to open thecorresponding waveband-specificsubmenu and scroll to RegionActivate or deactivate Region.If regionalisation is activated,alternative frequencies with the sameregional programmes are selectedwhere necessary. If regionalisation isswitched off, alternative frequenciesof the stations are selected withoutregard to regional programmes.

Digital audio broadcastingDAB broadcasts radio stationsdigitally.DAB stations are indicated by theprogramme name instead of thebroadcasting frequency.

General information● With DAB, several radio

programmes (services) can bebroadcast on a single ensemble.

● Besides high-quality digital audioservices, DAB is also able totransmit programme-associated

data and a multitude of other dataservices including travel andtraffic information.

● As long as a given DAB receivercan pick up the signal sent out bya broadcasting station (even ifthe signal is very weak), soundreproduction is ensured.

● In the event of poor reception, thevolume is reduced automaticallyto avoid the output ofdisagreeable noises.If the DAB signal is too weak tobe picked up by the receiver,reception is interruptedcompletely. This incident can beavoided by activating DAB-DABLinking and/or DAB-FM Linkingin the DAB menu (see below).

● Interference caused by stationsthat are on nearby frequencies (aphenomenon that is typical of AMand FM reception) does notoccur with DAB.

● If the DAB signal is reflected bynatural obstacles or buildings,the reception quality of DAB is

improved, whereas AM or FMreception is considerablyimpaired in such cases.

● When DAB reception is enabled,the FM tuner of the Infotainmentsystem remains active in thebackground and continuallysearches for the best receivableFM stations. If TP 3 157 isactivated, traffic announcementsof the FM station with the bestreception are issued. DeactivateTP if DAB reception should notbe interrupted by FM trafficannouncements.

DAB AnnouncementsBesides their music programmes, alot of DAB stations also broadcastannouncements of variouscategories. If you activate some or allcategories, the currently receivedDAB service is interrupted when anannouncement of these categories ismade.Select Menu in the bottom line of theDAB radio main menu to open thecorresponding waveband-specificsubmenu.


Scroll through the list and select DABAnnouncements to display a list of thecategories available.Activate all or just the desiredannouncement categories. Differentannouncement categories can beselected at the same time.

DAB-DAB LinkingIf this function is activated, the deviceswitches over to the same service(programme) on another DABensemble (if available) when the DABsignal is too weak to be picked up bythe receiver.Select Menu in the bottom line of theDAB radio main menu to open thecorresponding waveband-specificsubmenu.Scroll through the list and activate ordeactivate DAB-DAB Linking.

DAB-FM LinkingIf this function is activated, the deviceswitches over to a corresponding FMstation of the active DAB service (ifavailable) when the DAB signal is tooweak to be picked up by the receiver.

Scroll through the list and activate ordeactivate DAB-FM Linking.

L BandWith this function, you may definewhich DAB wavebands are to bereceived by the Infotainment system.L Band (earth and satellite radio) isanother radio band that can bereceived additionally.Select Menu in the bottom line of theDAB radio main menu to open thecorresponding waveband-specificsubmenu.Scroll through the list and activate ordeactivate L Band.

EPGThe Electronic Programme Guideprovides information on the currentand upcoming programme of therespective DAB station.Select Menu in the bottom line of theDAB radio main menu and then selectStation List.To display the programme of thedesired station, touch the icon next tothe station.

External devicesGeneral informationA USB port for the connection ofexternal devices is located in thecentre console.NoteThe USB port must always be keptclean and dry.

USB portAn MP3 player, USB device, SD card(via USB connector/adapter) orsmartphone can be connected to theUSB port.Up to two USB devices can beconnected to the Infotainment systemat a time.NoteFor the connection of two USBdevices, an external USB hub isrequired.

The Infotainment system can playaudio files, show picture files or playmovie files contained in USB devices.


When connected to the USB port,various functions of the devicesmentioned above can be operated viathe controls and menus of theInfotainment system.NoteNot all auxiliary devices aresupported by the Infotainmentsystem. Check the compatibility liston our website.

Connecting/disconnecting a deviceConnect one of the devicesmentioned above to the USB port. Ifrequired, use the appropriateconnection cable. The music functionstarts automatically.NoteIf a non-readable USB device isconnected, a corresponding errormessage appears and theInfotainment system automaticallyswitches to the previous function.

To disconnect the USB device, selectanother function and then remove theUSB device.

Caution

Avoid disconnecting the deviceduring playback. This maydamage the device or theInfotainment system.

USB Auto LaunchBy default, the USB audio menu isdisplayed automatically as soon as aUSB device is connected.If desired, this function can bedeactivated.Press ; and then select Settings toopen the settings menu.Select Radio, scroll to USB AutoLaunch and touch the screen buttonnext to the function.To reactivate the function, touch thescreen button again.

BluetoothDevices which support the Bluetoothmusic profiles A2DP and AVRCP canbe connected wirelessly to theInfotainment system. TheInfotainment system can play musicfiles contained in these devices.

Connecting a deviceFor a detailed description on how toestablish a Bluetooth connection3 181.

File formats and foldersThe maximum capacity of a devicesupported by the Infotainment systemamounts to 2500 music files,2500 picture files, 250 movie files,2500 folders and 10 stages of folderstructure. Only devices formatted inthe FAT16/FAT32 file system aresupported.If there are images included in theaudio metadata, these images aredisplayed on the screen.NoteSome files may not be playedproperly. This may be due to adifferent recording format or thecondition of the file.Files from online shops to whichDigital Rights Management (DRM)has been applied cannot be played.

The Infotainment system can play thefollowing audio, picture and moviefiles stored on external devices.


Audio filesThe playable audio file formats areMP3 (MPEG-1 Layer 3, MPEG-2Layer 3), WMA, AAC, AAC+, ALACOGG WAF (PCM), AIFF, 3GPP(audio only), Audio Books and LPCM.iPod® and iPhone® devices playALAC, AIFF, Audio Books and LPCM.When playing a file with ID3 taginformation, the Infotainment systemcan display information, e.g. on thetrack title and artist.

Picture filesThe displayable picture file formatsare JPG, JPEG, BMP, PNG and GIF.JPG files must be 64 to 5000 pixels inwidth and 64 to 5000 pixels in height.BMP, PNG and GIF files must be 64to 1024 pixels in width and 64 to1024 pixels in height.The pictures should not exceed a filesize of 1MB.

Movie filesThe playable movie file formats areAVI and MP4.

The maximum resolution is 1280 x720 pixels. The frame rate must beless than 30 fps.The usable codec is H.264/MPEG-4AVC.The playable audio formats are MP3,AC3, AAC and WMA.The displayable subtitle format isSMI.

Playing audioActivating the music functionIf the device is not yet connected tothe Infotainment system, connect thedevice 3 159.Usually, the respective audio mainmenu is displayed automatically.If playback is not startedautomatically, e.g. if USB AutoLaunch is deactivated 3 159, take thefollowing steps:Press ; and then select Audio toopen the audio main menu lastselected.

Select Source in the interactionselector bar and then select thedesired audio source to open therespective audio main menu.Playback of the audio tracks startsautomatically.

Function buttons

Interrupting and resuming playbackTouch = to interrupt playback. Thescreen button changes to l.Touch l to resume playback.

Playing the next or previous trackTouch v to play the next track.


Touch t within the first two secondsof the track playing to return to theprevious track.

Returning to the beginning of thecurrent trackTouch t after two seconds of thetrack playing.

Fast forwarding and rewindingTouch and hold t or v. Release toreturn to normal playback mode.Alternatively, you can move the slidershowing the current track position tothe left or right.

Playing tracks randomlyTouch n to play the tracks in randomorder. The screen button changes too.Touch o again to deactivate theshuffle function and go back to thenormal playback mode.

Browse Music functionTo display the browse screen, touchthe screen. Alternatively, selectMenu in the bottom line of the audio

main screen to display the respectiveaudio menu and then select BrowseMusic.Different categories, in which thetracks are sorted, are displayed, e.g.Playlists, Artists, or Albums.

Select the desired category,subcategory (if available) and thenchoose a track.Select the track to start playback.

Displaying picturesYou can view pictures from a USBdevice.

NoteFor your safety, some features aredisabled while driving.

Activating the picture functionIf the device is not yet connected tothe Infotainment system, connect thedevice 3 159.Press ; and then select Gallery toopen the media main menu.Touch l to open the picture mainmenu to display a list of items storedon the USB device. Select the desiredpicture. If this is stored within a folder,select the respective folder first.


Touch the screen to hide the menubar. Touch the screen again toredisplay the menu bar.

Function buttons

Full screen modeSelect x to display the picture in fullscreen mode. Touch the screen toexit full screen mode.

Viewing the next or previous pictureTouch j or swipe to the left to view thenext pictureTouch i or swipe to the right to viewthe previous picture.

Rotating a pictureSelect v to rotate the picture.

Zoom in on a pictureTouch w once or several times tozoom in on a picture or to return to itsoriginal size.

Viewing a slide showSelect t to view the pictures storedon the USB device in a slide show.Touch the screen to end the slideshow.

Picture menuSelect Menu in the bottom line of thescreen to display the Picture Menu.

Slide show timeSelect Slide Show Time to display alist of possible time sequences.Activate the desired time sequence inwhich each picture is supposed to bedisplayed in a slide show.

Clock and temperature displayIf you want the time and temperatureto be displayed in full screen mode,activate Clock. Temp. Display.

Display settingsSelect Display Settings to open asubmenu for the adjustment ofbrightness and contrast.Touch + or - to adjust the settings.

Playing moviesYou can view movies from a USBdevice connected to the USB port.NoteFor your safety, the movie function isnot available while driving.

Activating the movie functionIf the device is not yet connected tothe Infotainment system, connect thedevice 3 159.Press ; and then select Gallery toopen the media main menu.Touch m to open the movie mainmenu to display a list of items storedon the USB device. Select the desiredmovie. If this is stored within a folder,select the respective folder first.The movie is shown.


Function buttons

Full screenSelect x to display the movie in fullscreen mode. Touch the screen toexit full screen mode.

Interrupting and resuming playbackTouch = to interrupt playback. Thescreen button changes to l.Touch l to resume playback.

Playing the next or previous trackTouch c to play the next movie file.Touch d within the first five secondsof the movie playing to return to theprevious movie file.

Returning to the beginning of thecurrent movieTouch d after five seconds of themovie playing.

Fast forwarding and rewindingTouch and hold d or c. Release toreturn to normal playback mode.

Movie menuSelect Menu in the bottom line of thescreen to display the Movie Menu.

Clock and temperature displayIf you want the time and temperatureto be displayed in full screen mode,activate Clock. Temp. Display.

Display settingsSelect Display Settings to open asubmenu for adjustment of brightnessand contrast.Touch + and - to adjust the settings.

Using smartphoneapplicationsPhone projectionThe phone projection applicationsApple CarPlay™ and Android™ Autodisplay selected apps from yoursmartphone on the Infotainmentscreen and allow their operationdirectly via the Infotainment controls.Check with the device's manufacturerif this function is compatible with yoursmartphone and if this application isavailable in the country you are in.

Preparing the smartphoneAndroid phone: Download theAndroid Auto app to your smartphonefrom the Google Play™ Store.iPhone: Make sure Siri® is activatedon your smartphone.


Activating phone projection in thesettings menuPress ; to display the home screenand then select Settings.Scroll through the list toApple CarPlay or Android Auto.Make sure the respective applicationis activated.

Connecting the mobile phoneConnect the smartphone to the USBport 3 159.

Starting phone projectionTo start the phone projection function,press ; and then select Projection.NoteIf the application is recognised bythe Infotainment system, theapplication icon may change toApple CarPlay or Android Auto.

To start the function, you canalternatively press and hold ; for afew seconds.The phone projection screendisplayed depends on yoursmartphone and software version.

Returning to the Infotainment screenPress ;.

BringGoBringGo is a navigation app providinglocation search, map display androute guidance.

Downloading the appBefore BringGo can be operatedusing the controls and menus of theInfotainment system, the respectiveapplication must be installed on thesmartphone.Download the app from App Store® orGoogle Play Store.

Activating BringGo in the settingsmenuPress ; to display the home screenand then select Settings.Scroll through the list to BringGo.Make sure the application isactivated.

Connecting the mobile phoneConnect the smartphone to the USBport 3 159.

Starting BringGoTo start the app, press ; and thenselect the Nav icon.The main menu of the application isshown on the display of theInfotainment system.For further information on how tooperate the app, see the instructionson the manufacturer's website.


NavigationGeneral informationThe navigation system will reliablyguide you to your destination.The current traffic situation is takeninto account in the route calculation.For this purpose, the Infotainmentsystem receives trafficannouncements in the currentreception area via RDS-TMC.The navigation system cannot,however, take into account trafficincidents, traffic regulations changedat short notice and hazards orproblems that arise suddenly (e.g.road works).

Caution

The usage of the navigationsystem does not release the driverfrom the responsibility for acorrect, vigilant attitude in roadtraffic. The relevant trafficregulations must always be

followed. If a navigation instructioncontradicts traffic regulations, thetraffic regulations always apply.

Functioning of the navigationsystemThe position and movement of thevehicle are detected by the navigationsystem using sensors. The travelleddistance is determined by thevehicle’s speedometer signal, turningmovements on bends by a sensor.The position is determined by theGPS (Global Positioning System)satellites.By comparing the sensor signals withthe digital maps, it is possible todetermine the position with anaccuracy of approx. 10 metres.The system will also work with poorGPS reception. However, theaccuracy of the determination of theposition will be reduced.After the entry of the destinationaddress or point of interest (nearestpetrol station, hotel, etc.), the route iscalculated from the current location tothe destination selected.

Route guidance is provided by voiceoutput and an arrow, as well as withthe aid of a multi-colour map display.

Important information

TMC traffic information system anddynamic route guidanceThe TMC traffic information systemreceives all current traffic informationfrom TMC radio stations. Thisinformation is included in thecalculation of the overall route. Duringthis process, the route is planned sothat traffic problems related to pre-selected criteria are avoided.If there is a traffic problem duringactive route guidance, depending onthe pre-settings, a message appearsas to whether the route should bechanged.TMC traffic information is displayed inthe map display as symbols or asdetailed text on the TMC messagesmenu.To be able to use TMC trafficinformation, the system must receiveTMC stations in the relevant region.


The TMC traffic stations can beselected in the navigation menu3 167.

Map dataAll required map data is stored withinthe Infotainment system.To update the navigation map data,purchase new data at the Opel Dealeror on our home page http://opel.navigation.com/. You areprovided with a USB devicecontaining the update.Connect the USB device to the USBport and follow the instructions on thescreen. The vehicle must be turnedon during the update process.NoteThe vehicle remains operationalduring the update process. If thevehicle is turned off, the update canbe paused. The navigationapplication, Bluetooth and otherexternal devices are unavailableuntil the update process is finished.

UsageTo display the navigation map,press ; and then select theNavigation icon.Route guidance not active

● The map view is displayed.● The current location is indicated

by a circle with an arrow pointinginto the direction of travel.

● The name of the street you arecurrently in is displayed on thebottom of the screen.

Route guidance active

● The map view is displayed.● The active route is indicated by a

coloured line.● The moving vehicle is marked by

a circle with an arrow pointinginto the direction of travel.

● The next turning manoeuvre isindicated in the separate field onthe left side of the screen.

● The arrival time or travel time isshown above the arrow symbol.

● The remaining distance to thedestination is displayed abovethe arrow symbol.


Map manipulation

ScrollingTo scroll the map, place your fingeranywhere on the screen and move itup, down, left or right depending onthe direction in which you want toscroll.The map moves accordinglydisplaying a new section.To return to the current location,select Re-centre on the bottom of thescreen.

CentringTouch and hold the desired locationon the screen. The map centresaround this location.A red d is displayed at the respectivelocation and the correspondingaddress is shown on a label.

To return to the current location,select Re-centre on the bottom of thescreen.

ZoomingTo zoom in on a selected maplocation, place two fingers on thescreen and move them away fromeach other.Alternatively, use < on the mapscreen.To zoom out and display a larger areaaround the selected location, placetwo fingers on the screen and movethem towards each other.Alternatively, use ] on the mapscreen.

Cancel screen buttonDuring active route guidance, aCancel screen button is displayed onthe left side of the screen.To cancel the active route guidancesession, select Cancel.For a few seconds, a Resume Tripscreen button is displayed on the mapscreen. Select Resume Trip to restartthe cancelled guidance session.

Overview screen buttonDuring active route guidance, anOverview screen button is displayedon the left side of the screen.To display an overview of the routecurrently active, select Overview. Themap changes to the desired routeoverview.To return to the normal view, selectOverview again.

f screen buttonIf route guidance is active and you areon a highway, an additional f screenbutton is displayed on the bottom ofthe map.Select f to display a list of the nextupcoming service stations.


When selecting a desired exit, youcan access points of interest in therespective area and start routeguidance to some of these locations3 171.

x screen buttonIn a menu or submenu, select x todirectly return to the map.

Current locationSelect the street name on the bottomof the screen. Information on thecurrent location is displayed.

To save the current location asfavourite, select Favourite. The ficon is filled and the location is savedin the favourites list.

Map settings

Map viewThree different map views areavailable for selection.Select L on the map screen and thenrepeatedly select the map viewscreen button to toggle between theoptions.

Depending on the former setting, thescreen button is labelled 3D HeadUp, 2D Head Up or 2D North Up. Themap view changes according to thescreen button.Select the desired option.

Map coloursDepending on the external lightingconditions, the colouring of the mapscreen (light colours for the day anddark colours for the night) can beadapted.Select L on the map screen to displaythe Options menu. Select NavigationSettings and then Map colours.


The default setting is Auto. WhenAuto is activated, the screen adjustsautomatically.Alternatively, activate Day (light) orNight (dark) for an only light or onlydark screen.

Autozoom functionIf the autozoom function is activated(default setting), the zoom levelchanges automatically whenapproaching a turning manoeuvreduring active route guidance. Thisway, you always get a good overviewof the respective manoeuvre.If the autozoom function isdeactivated, the selected zoom levelremains the same during the wholeroute guidance process.To deactivate the function, select Lon the map to display the Optionsmenu. Select Navigation Settings andthen touch the slider bar next to AutoZoom.Touch the screen button again toreactivate the function.

POI (Points of Interest) icons on themapPOIs are points of general interest,e.g. gas stations or restaurants.The display of POI categories shownon the map may be personallyadapted.Select L on the map to display theOptions menu. Select NavigationSettings and then Show on map.Activate the desired POI categories.

Traffic events on the mapTraffic events may be directlyindicated on the map.To activate the function, select L onthe map to display the Options menu.Select Traffic on Map. The screenbutton changes to activation mode.To deactivate the function, selectTraffic on Map again.

Time indicationThe time indication during activeroute guidance may be displayed intwo different modes: the remainingtime (until the destination will bereached) or the arrival time (when thedestination will be reached).

Select L on the map to display theOptions menu. Select NavigationSettings and then Time to DestinationFormat.Activate the desired option in thesubmenu.NoteDuring active route guidance, thetime indication can be changed bysimply tapping on the time indicationfield on the screen.

Alert preferencesIf desired, you may receive anadditional notification in specific trafficzones.Select L on the map to display theOptions menu. Select NavigationSettings and then Alert Preferences.If Safety camera is activated, you arewarned when approaching astationary speed camera.NoteThis function is only available if suchan alert system corresponds to thelegal provisions applicable in thecountry you are in.

Activate the desired option.


Voice guidanceThe route guidance process can besupported by voice prompts given outby the system.NoteThe navigation voice promptsfunction is not supported for alllanguages. If there are no voiceprompts available, the systemautomatically plays a tone toindicate a manoeuvre ahead.

ActivationThe voice guidance function isactivated by default. To deactivatethe function, select L on the map todisplay the Options menu and thentouch Voice Guidance. The screenbutton changes.Select the screen button again toreactivate the function.

Voice guidance settingsTo define which system outputs mayassist during active route guidance,select L on the map, NavigationSettings and then Voice Guidance.

If Normal voice guidance is activated,a voice announces the next turningmanoeuvre to be taken.If Beep only is activated, only beeptones are given out for notification.In the submenu of Prompts duringPhone Call, the possible voiceoutputs during a phone call can beset.Activate the desired options.NoteVoice guidance prompts are onlygiven out if Voice Guidance isactivated in the Options menu, seeabove.

InformationSelect L on the map to display theOptions menu. Select NavigationSettings and then About.The texts of the manufacturer's termsand conditions or privacy statementcan be accessed via the respectivemenu items.The navigation map version isdisplayed.

Destination inputThe navigation application providesdifferent options to set a destinationfor route guidance.

Destination input via mapIt is possible to directly enterdestinations from the map screen.

Personal addresses on the mapYou can predefine two addressshortcuts (e.g. Home and Work) toeasily start route guidance to thesetwo places. The addresses can bedefined in the settings menu and belabelled individually. Then, they canbe directly selected from the map.To save the addresses, select L onthe map, Navigation Settings andthen Set up My Places.Select one of the menu items (Homeand Work by default). Use thekeyboard to enter the required data inthe address field. For a detaileddescription of the keyboard, seebelow.


To change the name of the personaladdress, select c to hide thekeyboard and select one of the itemsin the list. Alternatively, enter a newname in the first entry field.If necessary, tap within one of theentry fields to redisplay the keyboardand select Done. The location issaved as shortcut.To start route guidance to one ofthese locations, select the ═ screenbutton on the map. The twodestinations are displayed.Select one of the screen buttons. TheRoutes menu is displayed.Activate the desired route and thenselect Go to start route guidance.

Destination selection via mapScroll to the desired map section.Touch and hold the desired locationon the screen. The map centresaround this location.A red d is displayed at the respectivelocation and the correspondingaddress is shown on a label.

Touch the label. The Details menu isdisplayed. Select Go to start routeguidance.

Keyboard entrySelect ½ on the map to display thedestination search menu.

You can directly enter a search worde.g. address, POI category or name,phone contact, favourite, recentdestination or coordinates in the entryfield on top of the search menuscreen.NoteCoordinates have to be entered inthe following way: latitude, longitudee.g. "43.3456, 9.432435".

Alternatively, select Address, POI orJunction to use a search mask. Ifrequired, touch q to scroll the page.


To access the number and symbolkeyboard, select ?123. Select ABC atthe same position on the keyboard toreturn to the letter keyboard.To enter a character, touch therespective screen button. Thecharacter is entered upon release.Touch and hold a letter screen buttonto display associated letters in a letterpop-up menu. Release and thenselect the desired letter.To enter capital letters, select b andthen the desired character.To delete a character, select k. Todelete the whole entry, select the tinyx within the entry field.As soon as characters are entered,the system makes search wordsuggestions. Every additionalcharacter is considered in thematching process.

If desired, select one of the searchwords suggested. When the entryfields are filled out, select Search onthe keyboard. The Results menu isdisplayed.Select the desired destination. TheDetails menu is displayed. Select Goto start route guidance.Considering the letters entered, thesystem also creates a list of probabledestinations assembled from phonecontacts, POIs, addresses, recentdestinations and favourites. Touchc on the bottom of the screen tohide the keyboard and gain access tothe list.

To redisplay the keyboard, tap withinthe entry field.If desired, select a destination fromthe list. The Details menu isdisplayed. Select Go to start routeguidance.

Lists with selectable destinationsTo access the lists, select ½ on themap and, if required, touch q to scrollthe page.Select one of the options:● Recent: list of destinations

recently used● Favourites: list of destinations

stored as favourites● Contacts: list of addresses stored

in the phone book of the mobilephone currently connected viaBluetooth

To choose a destination from one ofthe lists, scroll through the respectivelist and select the desired destination.The Details menu is displayed. SelectGo to start route guidance.


Recent destinationsThe recent destinations list isautomatically filled with destinationsused in route guidance.The addresses in the recentdestinations list can be stored asfavourites. Enter the recentdestinations list, select n next to thedesired address to display additionalfunction buttons and then select f. Ifthe icon is filled, the address is savedin the favourites list.Addresses can be deleted from therecent destinations list. Enter therecent destinations list, select n nextto the desired address and thenselect e to delete the respectiveaddress.

FavouritesFavourites can be added when a ficon is displayed next to an address.When the star icon is filled, therespective address is stored as afavourite.

The position of a favourite in the listcan be changed. Enter the favouriteslist, select n next to the desiredfavourite to display additional functionbuttons and then select Q or P.The name of a favourite can bechanged. Enter the favourites list,select n next to the desired favouriteto display additional function buttonsand then select o. A keyboard isdisplayed. Enter the desired nameand then select Done.Favourites can be deleted. Enter thefavourites list, select n next to thedesired favourite to display additionalfunction buttons and then select f.The favourite is deactivated (unfilledstar). If you select the icon again, thefavourite is reactivated (filled star).When leaving the favourites list whilefavourites are deactivated, they aredeleted from the list.

ContactsYou can search for addresses withinthe list by using the keyboard. Enterthe first letters of the word (name or

address) you want to search for. Allentries containing a word starting withthese letters are displayed.For a detailed description of thekeyboard, see above.

Category searchPOIs can also be searched bycategories.Select ½ on the map and then selectPOI.

NoteIf desired, set the location aroundwhich you want to search for POIsvia keyboard entry in the second


entry field (default setting: Nearby)and then use the category searchmenu.

If required, scroll to the desired pageand then select one of the maincategories in the menu.Depending on the category selected,different subcategories may beavailable.Navigate through the subcategoriesuntil you reach the Results list.Select the desired POI. The Detailsmenu is displayed. Select Go to startroute guidance.

Results listIn the Results list, different possibledestinations are listed.

If route guidance is active, twodifferent tabs are available.

Choose between the tabs:● Along Route: possible

destinations along the routecurrently active

● At Destination: possibledestinations around thedestination of the route

The list can be sorted in two differentways. Select l in the top right cornerof the screen and activate the desiredoption.If you activate sorting by relevance,the system tries to give you the bestmatch according to your search term.If you activate sorting by distance, thesystem arranges the destinationsaccording to their distance to yourcurrent location.

Details menuAfter a destination has been selected,the Details menu is displayed.


Storing favouritesTo store the respective destination asa favourite, activate Favourite (filledstar: favourite saved, unfilled star:favourite not saved).The destination is stored as afavourite and may then be accessedvia the favourites list.

Initiating a phone callIn some cases, e.g. when a POI hasbeen selected, a phone number mightbe available for the respectivedestination. To call this phonenumber, select y.

Setting the routeIn case the system finds more thanone possible route, you can choosebetween the routes suggested.Select Routes to display a list of allroutes detected by the system.Activate the desired route and thenselect Go to start route guidance.

Routes with several destinationsAfter route guidance has beenstarted, it is possible to adddestinations to the active route, e.g.to pick up a friend on the way or stopat a gas station.NoteUp to five destinations can becombined in one route.

Start route guidance to the desireddestination.To add another destination, select Lon the map and then select AddDestination. The destination searchmenu is displayed.Navigate to the desired destination.The Details menu is displayed. SelectAdd.

NoteIf you select Go, route guidance tothe destination first selected isstopped and route guidance to thenew destination is started.

The destinations are arranged in theorder in which they are entered whilethe last destination added is the firstyou are guided to. In order to check orconfirm while driving, the name of thenext destination is displayed abovethe arrival time and distance.The order of the destinations can bechanged 3 176.

GuidanceRoute guidance is provided by thenavigation system through visualinstructions and voice prompts (voiceguidance).Visual instructionsVisual instructions are provided onthe display.


NoteWhen route guidance is active andyou are not within the navigationapplication, turning manoeuvres areindicated by pop-up messagesdisplayed on top of the screen.

Voice guidanceNavigation voice prompts announcewhich direction to follow, whenapproaching an intersection at whichyou need to turn.To activate the voice promptsfunction 3 167.Touch the big turn arrow on the leftside of the screen to replay the lastvoice guidance instruction.

Starting and cancelling routeguidanceTo start route guidance, select Go inthe Details menu after a destinationhas been selected 3 171.To cancel route guidance, selectCancel on the left side of the screen3 167.

Destinations listThe Destinations list contains alldestinations belonging to the routecurrently active.Touch j within the time and distancefield. The Destinations list isdisplayed.

In case a phone number is available,select y to start a phone call.To change the order of thedestinations, select h in the field ofthe destination whose position is to bechanged. The order is rearrangedand the destination selected is set atthe first position.To delete a destination from the route,select e in the field of the respectivedestination. The destination isdeleted and the route is rearranged.

Turn listThe next turning manoeuvre isdisplayed on the left side of thescreen.Select a underneath the manoeuvreindication to display the turn list. Theturn list contains all upcoming turnson the active route.


To display a turning manoeuvre onthe map, scroll through the list andtouch the desired manoeuvre. Themap jumps to the respective locationon the map.To avoid a route section, select n nextto the respective turning manoeuvre.A m symbol is displayed.To recalculate the route without therespective route section, select m.The route is changed.Select the first turning manoeuvre inthe list to return to the normalnavigation map screen.

Traffic settingsThere are different options availableconcerning traffic events.

Traffic listThe traffic list contains all trafficevents detected by the system.To access the traffic list, select L onthe map and then Traffic List. The listis displayed.

If route guidance is active, choosebetween the tabs:● Along Route: traffic events along

the active route● Nearby: traffic events close to the

current location of the vehicleTraffic eventsIf required, scroll to the desired trafficevent.To display additional information,select the respective traffic event.List sortingThe nearby list can be organised intwo different ways.To change the sorting order, selectl in the top right corner of the screen.The Traffic Events Sorting menu isdisplayed.Activate the desired option.

Traffic stationThe traffic message channelproviding the traffic information canbe personally set, if desired.Select L on the map to display theOptions menu. Select NavigationSettings and then Traffic Resource.


A list of all traffic stations currentlyavailable is displayed.By default, Auto is activated. Thestation is adapted automatically bythe system.If you want the traffic information to betaken from a specific station, activatethe respective station.

Traffic avoidance functionTraffic events are taken intoconsideration when the systemdetermines a route to a destination.During active route guidance, theroute can be modified according toincoming traffic messages.To set the parameters for thesemodifications, select L on the map todisplay the Options menu. SelectNavigation Settings, Routing optionsand then Auto-Reroute to AvoidTraffic.If you want the system toautomatically modify the routeaccording to new traffic messages,activate Automatically reroute.

If you want to be consulted when aroute is modified, activate Alwaysask.If you do not want routes to bemodified, activate Never.

Route settingsParameters for road and routeselection can be set.

Road typesIf desired, certain road types can beavoided.Select L on the map to display theOptions menu. Select Avoid onRoute and then activate the roadtypes you want to be avoided.NoteIf route guidance is active whenchanging the road settings, the routeis recalculated according to the newsettings.

Route typeTo set the route type, select L on themap to display the Options menu.Select Navigation Settings, Routingoptions and then Route type.

Activate the desired option:● Fastest for the fastest route● Eco-friendly for a route that

allows ecologically friendlydriving


Speech recognitionGeneral informationThe voice pass-thru application of theInfotainment system allows access tothe speech recognition commands onyour smartphone. See yoursmartphone manufacturer'soperating instructions to find outwhether your smartphone supportsthis feature.In order to use the voice pass-thruapplication, the smartphone must beconnected to the Infotainment systemvia USB cable 3 159 or via Bluetooth3 181.

UsageActivating speech recognitionPress and hold g on the control panelor 7w on the steering wheel to start aspeech recognition session. A voicecommand message is displayed onthe screen.

As soon as a beep is heard, you cansay a command. For information onthe commands supported, see theoperating instructions for yoursmartphone.

Adjusting the volume of voicepromptsTurn m on the control panel or press+ / - on the right side of the steeringwheel to increase or decrease thevolume of voice prompts.

Deactivating speech recognitionPress xn on the steering wheel.The voice command messagedisappears and the speechrecognition session is ended.

PhoneGeneral informationThe Phone portal provides you withthe possibility of having mobile phoneconversations via a vehiclemicrophone and the vehicleloudspeakers as well as operating themost important mobile phonefunctions via the Infotainment systemin the vehicle. To be able to use thePhone portal, the mobile phone mustbe connected to the Infotainmentsystem via Bluetooth.Not all Phone functions are supportedby every mobile phone. The usablephone functions depend on therelevant mobile phone and networkprovider. You can find furtherinformation on this in the operatinginstructions for your mobile phone, oryou can enquire about them with yournetwork provider.


Important information foroperation and traffic safety

9 Warning

Mobile phones have effects onyour environment. For this reasonsafety regulations and directionshave been prepared. You shouldbe familiar with the relateddirections before you use thetelephone function.

9 Warning

Use of the hands-free facility whiledriving can be dangerous becauseyour concentration is reducedwhen telephoning. Park yourvehicle before you use the hands-free facility. Follow the stipulationsof the country in which you findyourself at present.Do not forget to follow the specialregulations that apply in specificareas and always switch off themobile phone if the use of mobilephones is prohibited, if

interference is caused by themobile phone or if dangeroussituations can occur.

BluetoothThe Phone portal is certified by theBluetooth Special Interest Group(SIG).You can find further information aboutthe specification on the internet athttp://www.bluetooth.com.

Bluetooth connectionBluetooth is a radio standard for thewireless connection of e.g. mobilephones, smartphones or otherdevices.Via the Bluetooth menu, pairing (PINcode exchange between Bluetoothdevice and Infotainment system) andconnecting of the Bluetooth devicesto the Infotainment system are carriedout.

Bluetooth menuPress ; and then select Settings.

Select Bluetooth to display theBluetooth menu.

Pairing a device

Important information● Up to ten devices can be paired

to the system.● Only one paired device can be

connected to the Infotainmentsystem at a time.

● Pairing only needs to be carriedout once, unless the device isdeleted from the list of paireddevices. If the device has been


connected previously, theInfotainment system establishesthe connection automatically.

● Bluetooth operation considerablydrains the device's battery.Therefore, connect the device tothe USB port for charging.

Pairing a new device1. Activate the Bluetooth function of

the Bluetooth device. For furtherinformation, see the operatinginstructions for the Bluetoothdevice.

2. Press ; and then selectSettings on the Info-Display.Select Bluetooth and then DeviceManagement to display therespective menu.

NoteIf no phone is connected, the DeviceManagement menu can also beaccessed via the phone menu:Press ; and then select Phone.3. Touch Search Device. All

discoverable Bluetooth devices inthe environment are displayed ina new search list.

4. Touch the Bluetooth device youwish to pair.

5. Confirm the pairing procedure:● If SSP (secure simple

pairing) is supported:

Confirm the messages on theInfotainment system and theBluetooth device.

● If SSP (secure simplepairing) is not supported:On the Infotainment system:an Info message is displayedasking you to enter a PINcode on your Bluetoothdevice.On the Bluetooth device:enter the PIN code andconfirm your input.

6. The Infotainment system and thedevice are paired.

NoteIf the Bluetooth device issuccessfully paired, h next to theBluetooth device indicates that thephone function is enabled and yindicates that the Bluetooth musicfunction is enabled.7. The phone book is downloaded

automatically to the Infotainmentsystem. Depending on the phone,the Infotainment system must beallowed access to the phonebook. If required, confirm the


messages displayed on theBluetooth device.If this function is not supported bythe Bluetooth device, acorresponding message isdisplayed.

Changing the Bluetooth PIN codePress ; and then select Settings.Select Bluetooth and then ChangePairing PIN to display the respectivesubmenu. A keypad is displayed.Enter the desired four-digit PIN code.To delete an entered number, select⇦.Confirm your input by selecting Enter.

Connecting a paired devicePress ; and then select Settings.Select Bluetooth and then DeviceManagement to display therespective menu.Select the Bluetooth device you wishto connect. The device is connected.NoteThe connected device and theavailable options are highlighted.

Disconnecting a devicePress ; and then select Settings.Select Bluetooth and then DeviceManagement to display therespective menu.Select the Bluetooth device currentlyconnected. You are prompted with amessage.Select Yes to disconnect the device.

Deleting a devicePress ; and then select Settings.Select Bluetooth and then DeviceManagement to display therespective menu.Select e next to the Bluetooth device.You are prompted with a message.Select Yes to delete the device.

Device infoPress ; and then select Settings.Select Bluetooth and then DeviceInformation to display the respectivemenu.

The information displayed includesDevice Name, Address, and PINCode.

Emergency call

9 Warning

Connection setup cannot beguaranteed in all situations. Forthis reason you should not relyexclusively on a mobile phonewhen a vitally importantcommunication (e.g. a medicalemergency) is concerned.In some networks it may benecessary for a valid SIM card tobe properly inserted in the mobilephone.

9 Warning

Bear in mind that you can makeand receive calls with the mobilephone if it is in a service area witha sufficiently strong signal. Undercertain circumstances,emergency calls cannot be made


on all mobile phone networks; it ispossible that they cannot be madewhen certain network servicesand/or telephone functions areactive. You can enquire about thiswith the local network operators.The emergency call number candiffer depending on the region andcountry. Please enquirebeforehand about the correctemergency call number for therelevant region.

Making an emergency callDial the emergency call number (e.g.112).The telephone connection to theemergency call centre is set up.Answer when the service personnelquestions you about the emergency.

9 Warning

Do not end the call until you arerequested to do so by theemergency call centre.

OperationAs soon as a connection viaBluetooth has been set up betweenyour mobile phone and theInfotainment system, you can operatemany functions of your mobile phonevia the Infotainment system.NoteIn the hands-free mode, mobilephone operation is still possible, e.g.taking a call or adjusting the volume.

After setup of a connection betweenthe mobile phone and theInfotainment system, mobile phonedata is transmitted to the Infotainmentsystem. This can take some timedepending on the mobile phone andthe amount of data to be transferred.During this period, operation of themobile phone via the Infotainmentsystem is possible only to a limitedextent.NoteNot every mobile phone supports allfunctions of the phone portal.Therefore, deviations from the rangeof functions described below arepossible.

Phone main menuPress ; and then select PHONE todisplay the respective menu.

NoteThe Phone main menu is onlyavailable if a mobile phone isconnected to the Infotainmentsystem via Bluetooth. For a detaileddescription 3 181.

Many functions of the mobile phonecan now be controlled via the phonemain menu (and associatedsubmenus), and via the phone-specific controls on the steeringwheel.


Initiating a phone call

Entering a phone numberPress ; and then select Phone.Enter a telephone number using thekeypad in the phone main menu.To delete one or more enteredcharacters, touch or touch and hold⇦.Touch v on the screen or press qwon the steering wheel to start dialling.

Using the phone bookNoteWhen pairing a mobile phone withthe Infotainment system viaBluetooth, the phone book of themobile phone is downloadedautomatically 3 181.

Press ; and then select Phone.Select Contacts in the phone mainmenu.

NoteThe g symbol next to a phonenumber indicates that the contact isstored on the SIM card.

Quick search1. Select u to display a list of all

contacts.2. Scroll through the list of contacts

entries.3. Touch the contact you wish to call.

A menu with all phone numbersstored for the selected contact isdisplayed.

4. Select the desired phone numberto initiate the call.

Search menuIf the phone book contains a greatnumber of entries, you can search forthe desired contact via the searchmenu.Select o in the Contacts menu todisplay the search tab.

The letters are organised inalphabetical groups on the screenbuttons: abc, def, ghi, jkl, mno, pqrs,tuv, and wxyz.Use ⇦ to delete an entered group ofletters.1. Select the button containing the

first letter of the contact you wishto search for.


For example: If the contact youwish to search for starts with 'g'select the ghi screen button.All contacts containing one of theletters on this button, in theexample 'g', 'h', and 'i', aredisplayed.

2. Select the button containing thesecond letter of the contact youwish to search for.

3. Continue to enter more letters ofthe contact you wish to search foruntil the desired contact isdisplayed.

4. Touch the contact you wish to call.A menu with all phone numbersstored for the selected contact isdisplayed.

5. Select the desired phone numberto initiate the call. The followingdisplay is shown.

Contacts settingsThe contacts list can be sorted by lastname or first name.Press ; and then select Settings todisplay the respective menu.Select Bluetooth and then SortOrder. Activate the desired option.

Using the call historyAll incoming, outgoing, or missedcalls are registered.Press ; and then select Phone.Select Call History in the phone mainmenu.

Select q for outgoing calls, r formissed calls, s for incoming callsand p for all calls. The respective calllist is displayed.Select the desired entry to initiate acall.

Redialling a numberThe last dialled phone number can beredialled.Press ; and then select Phone.Select v on the screen or press qwon the steering wheel.


Using speed dial numbersSpeed dial numbers that are storedon the mobile phone can also bedialled using the keypad of the phonemain menu.Press ; and then select Phone.Touch and hold the respective digit onthe keypad to initiate the call.

Incoming phone call

Taking a callIf an audio mode, e.g. the radio orUSB mode, is active at the moment acall comes in, the audio source ismuted and stays muted until the callends.A message with the caller's phonenumber or name (if available) isdisplayed.

To answer the call, select v in themessage or press qw on the steeringwheel.

Rejecting a callTo reject the call, select J in themessage or press xn on thesteering wheel.

Changing the ring tonePress ; and then select Settings.Select Bluetooth and then Ringtonesto display the respective menu. A listof all devices paired is displayed.Select the desired device. A list of allringtones available for this device isdisplayed.

Select one of the ringtones.

Functions during a callDuring an ongoing phone call, thephone main menu is displayed.

Deactivating the hands-free modetemporarilyTo continue the conversation via themobile phone, activate m.To return to the hands-free mode,deactivate m.

Deactivating the microphonetemporarilyTo mute the microphone, activate n.


To reactivate the microphone,deactivate n.

Ending a phone callSelect J to end the call.

Voice mail boxYou may operate your voice mail boxvia the Infotainment system.

Voice mail numberPress ; and then select Settings.Select Bluetooth. Scroll through thelist and select Voice Mail Numbers.A list of all devices paired isdisplayed.Select the respective phone. Akeypad is displayed.Enter the voice mail number for therespective phone.

Calling the voice mail boxPress ; and then select Phone.Select t on the screen. The mailbox is called.Alternatively, enter the voice mailnumber via the phone keypad.

Mobile phones and CB radioequipmentInstallation instructions andoperating guidelinesThe vehicle specific installationinstructions and the operatingguidelines of the mobile phone andhands-free manufacturer must beobserved when installing andoperating a mobile telephone. Failureto do so could invalidate the vehicletype approval (EU directive 95/54/EC).Recommendations for fault-freeoperation:● Professionally installed exterior

antenna to obtain the maximumrange possible

● Maximum transmission power10 watts

● Installation of the phone in asuitable spot, consider relevantNote in the Owner's Manual,section Airbag system.

Seek advice on predeterminedinstallation points for the externalantenna or equipment holder and

ways of using devices with atransmission power exceeding10 watts.Use of a hands-free attachmentwithout external antenna with mobiletelephone standards GSM900/1800/1900 and UMTS is onlypermitted if the maximumtransmission power of the mobiletelephone is 2 watts for GSM 900 or1 watt for the other types.For reasons of safety, do not use thephone while driving. Even use of ahands-free set can be a distractionwhile driving.

9 Warning

Operation of radio equipment andmobile telephones which fail tomeet above mentioned mobiletelephone standards is onlypermitted using an antennalocated outside of the vehicle.


Caution

Mobile telephones and radioequipment may lead tomalfunctions in the vehicleelectronics when operated insidethe vehicle with no exteriorantenna, unless the abovementioned regulations areobserved.

190 Climate control

Climate control

Climate control systems ............. 190Heating and ventilation system 190Air conditioning system ........... 191Electronic climate controlsystem .................................... 192

Auxiliary heater ........................ 196Air vents ..................................... 196

Adjustable air vents ................. 196Fixed air vents ......................... 197

Maintenance .............................. 197Air intake ................................. 197Pollen filter ............................... 197Air conditioning regularoperation ................................ 197

Service .................................... 197

Climate control systemsHeating and ventilationsystem

Controls for:● temperature● air distribution● fan speed● demisting and defrosting

Heated rear window Ü 3 33.

Temperaturered : warmblue : cold

Heating will not be fully effective untilthe engine has reached normaloperating temperature.

Air distributionl : to windscreen and front door

windowsM : to head area via adjustable air

ventsK : to foot well and windscreen

All combinations are possible.

Fan speedAdjust the air flow by switching the fanto the desired speed.

Demisting and defrosting● Press V: fan automatically

switches to higher speed, the airdistribution is directed towardsthe windscreen.

● Set temperature control towarmest level.

● Switch on heated rear window Ü.● Open side air vents as required

and direct them towards the doorwindows.

Climate control 191

Air conditioning system

In addition to the heating andventilation system, the airconditioning system has controls for:n : cooling4 : air recirculation

Heated seats ß 3 43, Heatedsteering wheel * 3 97.

Cooling nPress n to switch on cooling. TheLED in the button illuminates toindicate activation. Cooling is onlyfunctional when the engine is runningand climate control fan is switched on.

Press n again to switch off cooling.The air conditioning system cools anddehumidifies (dries) as soon as theoutside temperature is slightly abovethe freezing point. Thereforecondensation may form and drip fromunder the vehicle.If no cooling or drying is required,switch off the cooling system for fuelsaving reasons. Activated coolingmay inhibit autostops.Stop-start system 3 202.

Air recirculation system 4Press 4 to activate air recirculationmode. The LED in the buttonilluminates to indicate activation.Press 4 again to deactivate airrecirculation mode.

9 Warning

The exchange of fresh air isreduced in air recirculation mode.In operation without cooling the airhumidity increases, so thewindows may mist up from inside.The quality of the passenger

compartment air deteriorates,which may cause the vehicleoccupants to feel drowsy.

In warm and very humid ambient airconditions, the windscreen may mistup from outside when cold air isdirected towards it. If windscreenmists up from outside, activatewindscreen wiper and deactivate l.

Maximum coolingBriefly open the windows so that hotair can disperse quickly.● Switch on cooling n.● Air recirculation system 4 on.● Press air distribution switch M.● Set temperature control to

coldest level.● Set fan speed to highest level.● Open all vents.

192 Climate control

Demisting and defrosting thewindows V

● Press V: fan automaticallyswitches to higher speed, the airdistribution is directed towardsthe windscreen.

● Set temperature control towarmest level.

● Switch on heated rear window Ü.● Open side air vents as required

and direct them towards the doorwindows.

NoteIf V is pressed while the engine isrunning, an Autostop will be inhibiteduntil V is pressed again.If l is pressed with the fan switchedon and the engine running, anAutostop will be inhibited until l ispressed again or until the fan isswitched off.If V is pressed while the engine isin an Autostop, the engine will restartautomatically.If l is pressed with the fan switchedon while the engine is in anAutostop, the engine will restartautomatically.


Electronic climate controlsystemThe dual zone climate control allowsdifferent climatisation temperaturesfor driver side and front passengerside.In automatic mode, temperature, fanspeed and air distribution areregulated automatically.

Controls for:● temperature on driver side● air distribution● fan speed● temperature on front passenger

siden : coolingAUTO : automatic mode4 : manual air recirculationV : demisting and defrosting

Heated rear window Ü 3 33, Heatedseats ß 3 43, Heated steering wheel* 3 97.

Climate control 193

Climate control settings are shown onthe Info-Display. Settingmodifications are briefly popped-up,superimposed over the currentlydisplayed menu.The electronic climate control systemis only fully operational when theengine is running.

Automatic mode AUTO

Basic setting for maximum comfort:● Press AUTO. The LED in the

button illuminates to indicateactivation. The air distributionand fan speed are regulatedautomatically.

● Open all air vents to allowoptimised air distribution inautomatic mode.

● Press n to switch on optimalcooling and demisting. The LEDin the button illuminates toindicate activation.

● Set the preselectedtemperatures for driver and frontpassenger using the left and rightrotary knobs. Recommendedtemperature is 22 °C.

The fan speed regulation in automaticmode can be changed in theSettings menu in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.All air vents are actuatedautomatically in automatic mode. Theair vents should therefore always beopen.

Temperature preselectionTemperatures can be set to a desiredvalue between 16 °C and 28 °C.

194 Climate control

If the minimum temperature Lo is set,the climate control system runs atmaximum cooling, if cooling n isswitched on.If the maximum temperature Hi is set,the climate control system runs atmaximum heating.NoteIf n is switched on, reducing the setcabin temperature can cause theengine to restart from an Autostop orinhibit an Autostop.


Demisting and defrosting thewindows V● Press V. The LED in the button

illuminates to indicate activation.● Temperature and air distribution

are set automatically and the fanruns at high speed.

● Switch on heated rear window Ü.● To return to previous mode:

press V. To return to automaticmode: press AUTO.

Setting of automatic rear windowheating can be changed in theSettings menu in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.NoteIf V is pressed while the engine isrunning, an Autostop will be inhibiteduntil V is pressed again.If l is pressed with the fan switchedon and the engine running, anAutostop will be inhibited until l ispressed again or until the fan isswitched off.

If V is pressed while the engine isin an Autostop, the engine will restartautomatically.If l is pressed with the fan switchedon while the engine is in anAutostop, the engine will restartautomatically.


Manual settingsClimate control system settings canbe changed by activating the buttonsand rotary knobs as follows.Changing a setting will deactivate theautomatic mode.

Fan speed Z

Climate control 195

Press the lower button to decrease orupper button to increase fan speed.The fan speed is indicated by thenumber of segments in the display.Pressing and holding the lowerbutton: fan and cooling are switchedoff.Pressing and holding the upperbutton: the fan runs at maximumspeed.To return to automatic mode: PressAUTO.

Air distribution l, M, KPress appropriate button for desiredadjustment. The LED in the buttonilluminates to indicate activation.l : to windscreen and front door

windows (air conditioning isactivated in the background tohelp preventing windows fromfogging)

M : to head area via adjustable airvents

K : to foot well and windscreen

All combinations are possible.Return to automatic air distribution:press AUTO.

Cooling nPress n to switch on cooling.Activation is indicated by the LED inthe button. Cooling is only functionalwhen the engine is running andclimate control fan is switched on.Press n again to switch off cooling.The air conditioning system cools anddehumidifies (dries) when outsidetemperature is above a specific level.Therefore condensation may formand drip from under the vehicle.If no cooling or drying is required,switch off the cooling system for fuelsaving reasons. When the coolingsystem is switched off, no enginerestart will be requested by theclimate control system during anAutostop. Exception: defrost systemis activated and outside temperatureabove 0 °C. Stop-start system3 202.The display will indicate ACON whencooling is activated or ACOFF whenthe cooling is deactivated.

Activation or deactivation of coolingoperation after engine start can bechanged in the Settings menu in theInfo-Display. Vehicle personalisation3 124.

Air recirculation mode 4Press 4 to activate air recirculationmode. The LED in the buttonilluminates to indicate activation.Press 4 again to deactivaterecirculation mode.

9 Warning

The exchange of fresh air isreduced in air recirculation mode.In operation without cooling the airhumidity increases, so thewindows may mist up from inside.The quality of the passengercompartment air deteriorates,which may cause the vehicleoccupants to feel drowsy.

In warm and very humid ambient airconditions, the windscreen may mistup from outside when cold air is

196 Climate control

directed towards it. If windscreenmists up from outside, activatewindscreen wiper and deactivate l.

Basic settingsSome settings can be changed in theSettings menu in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Auxiliary heaterAir heaterQuickheat is an electric auxiliary airheater which automatically warms upthe passenger compartment morequickly.

Air ventsAdjustable air ventsAt least one air vent must be openwhile the cooling is on.

To open the vent, turn the adjusterwheel to B. Adjust the air amount at thevent outlet by turning the adjusterwheel.

Direct the flow of air by tilting andswivelling the slats.

To close the vent, turn the adjusterwheel to 7.

Climate control 197

Air vents for rear passenger are leftand right side behind the front seats.

9 Warning

Do not attach any objects to theslats of the air vents. Risk ofdamage and injury in case of anaccident.

Fixed air ventsAdditional air vents are locatedbeneath the windscreen and doorwindows and in the foot wells.

MaintenanceAir intake

The air intake in front of thewindscreen in the enginecompartment must be kept clear toallow air intake. Remove any leaves,dirt or snow.

Pollen filterThe pollen filter cleans dust, soot,pollen and spores from the airentering the vehicle through the airintake.

Air conditioning regularoperationIn order to ensure continuouslyefficient performance, cooling mustbe operated for a few minutes once amonth, irrespective of the weatherand time of year. Operation withcooling is not possible when theoutside temperature is too low.

ServiceFor optimal cooling performance, it isrecommended to annually check theclimate control system, startingthree years after initial vehicleregistration, including:● functionality and pressure test● heating functionality● leakage check● check of drive belts● cleaning of condenser and

evaporator drainage● performance checkNoteRefrigerant R-134a containsfluorinated greenhouse gases.

198 Driving and operating

Driving andoperating

Driving hints ............................... 199Control of the vehicle ............... 199Steering ................................... 199

Starting and operating ............... 199New vehicle running-in ............ 199Ignition switch positions ........... 199Retained power off .................. 200Starting the engine .................. 200Overrun cut-off ........................ 201Stop-start system .................... 202Parking .................................... 204

Engine exhaust .......................... 205Diesel particle filter .................. 205Catalytic converter ................... 206AdBlue ..................................... 207

Automatic transmission .............. 210Transmission display ............... 210Selector lever .......................... 210Manual mode ........................... 211Electronic driving programmes 211Fault ........................................ 212Interruption of power supply .... 212

Manual transmission .................. 213

Brakes ........................................ 214Antilock brake system ............. 214Parking brake .......................... 214Brake assist ............................. 216Hill start assist ......................... 216

Ride control systems ................. 217Traction Control system .......... 217Electronic Stability Control ...... 218Interactive driving system ........ 219

Driver assistance systems ......... 220Cruise control .......................... 220Speed limiter ........................... 222Adaptive cruise control ............ 223Forward collision alert ............. 230Following distance indication ... 233Active Emergency Braking ...... 234Parking assist .......................... 235Side blind spot alert ................. 238Rear view camera ................... 240Traffic sign assistant ................ 241Lane departure warning .......... 245

Fuel ............................................ 246Fuel for petrol engines ............. 246Fuel for diesel engines ............ 247Fuel for natural gas operation . 248Fuel for liquid gas operation .... 248Refuelling ................................ 248Fuel consumption - CO2-Emissions ............................... 253

Trailer hitch ................................ 254General information ................. 254Driving characteristics andtowing tips .............................. 255

Trailer towing ........................... 255Towing equipment ................... 256Trailer stability assist ............... 258

Driving and operating 199

Driving hintsControl of the vehicleNever coast with engine notrunningMany systems will not function in thissituation (e.g. brake servo unit, powersteering). Driving in this manner is adanger to yourself and others. Allsystems function during an Autostop.Stop-start system 3 202.

Idle boostIf charging of the vehicle battery isrequired due to battery condition, thepower output of the generator mustbe increased. This will be achieved byan idle boost which may be audible.A message appears in the DriverInformation Centre.

PedalsTo ensure the pedal travel isuninhibited, there must be no mats inthe area of the pedals.

Use only floor mats which fit properlyand are fixed by the retainers on thedriver's side.

SteeringIf power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or due to asystem malfunction, the vehicle canbe steered but may require increasedeffort.Control indicator c 3 114.

Starting and operatingNew vehicle running-inDo not brake unnecessarily hard forthe first few journeys.During the first drive, smoke mayoccur because of wax and oilevaporating off the exhaust system.Park the vehicle in the open for awhile after the first drive and avoidinhaling the fumes.During the running-in period, fuel andengine oil consumption may behigher and the cleaning process ofthe diesel particle filter may takeplace more often. Autostop may beinhibited to allow for charging of thevehicle battery.Diesel particle filter 3 205.

Ignition switch positionsTurn key:


0 : ignition off: Some functionsremain active until key isremoved or driver's door isopened, provided the ignition wason previously

1 : accessory power mode: Steeringwheel lock released, someelectrical functions are operable,ignition is off

2 : ignition on power mode: Ignitionis on, diesel engine is preheating.Control indicators illuminate andmost electrical functions areoperable

3 : engine start: Release key afterstarting procedure begins

Steering wheel lockRemove key from ignition switch andturn steering wheel until it engages.

9 Danger

Never remove the key fromignition switch during driving asthis will cause steering wheel lock.

Retained power offThe following electronic systems canwork until the driver's door is openedor for ten minutes after the ignition isswitched off:● power windows● power outlets

Starting the engine

Turn key to position 1 to release thesteering wheel lock.Manual transmission: operate clutchand brake pedal.Automatic transmission: operatebrake pedal and move selector leverto P or N.Do not operate the accelerator pedal.Diesel engines: turn the key toposition 2 for preheating and wait untilcontrol indicator ! extinguishes.


Turn key briefly to position 3 andrelease: an automatic procedureoperates the starter with a short delayuntil the engine is running, seeAutomatic Starter Control.Manual transmission: during anAutostop, the engine can be startedby depressing the clutch pedal3 202.Automatic transmission: during anAutostop, the engine can be startedby releasing the brake pedal 3 202.Before restarting or to switch off theengine, turn the key back to position0.

9 Danger

Switching off the engine duringdriving may cause loss of powersupport for brake and steeringsystems. Assistance systems andairbag systems are disabled.Lighting and brake lights willextinguish. Therefore power downthe engine and ignition whiledriving only when required in caseof emergency.

Starting the vehicle at lowtemperaturesThe start of the engine withoutadditional heaters is possible down to-25 °С for diesel engines and -30 °Cfor petrol engines. Required is anengine oil with the correct viscosity,the correct fuel, performed servicesand a sufficiently charged battery.With temperatures below -30 °C theautomatic transmission need awarming phase of approx. fiveminutes. The selector lever must bein position P.

Automatic Starter ControlThis function controls the enginestarting procedure. The driver doesnot have to hold the key in position 3.Once applied, the system will go onstarting automatically until the engineis running. Because of the checkingprocedure, the engine starts runningafter a short delay.

Possible reasons for a non-startingengine:● Clutch pedal not operated

(manual transmission).● Brake pedal not operated or

selector lever not in P or N(automatic transmission).

● Timeout occurred.

Turbo engine warm-upUpon start-up, engine availabletorque may be limited for a short time,especially when the enginetemperature is cold. The limitation isto allow the lubrication system to fullyprotect the engine.

Overrun cut-offThe fuel supply is automatically cut offduring overrun, i.e. when the vehicleis driven with a gear engaged butaccelerator pedal is released.Depending on driving conditions, theoverrun cut-off may be deactivated.


Stop-start systemThe stop-start system helps to savefuel and to reduce the exhaustemissions. When conditions allow, itswitches off the engine as soon as thevehicle is at a low speed or at astandstill, e.g. at a traffic light or in atraffic jam. It starts the engineautomatically as soon as the clutch isdepressed. A vehicle battery sensorensures that an Autostop is onlyperformed if the vehicle battery issufficiently charged for a restart.

ActivationThe stop-start system is available assoon as the engine is started, thevehicle starts-off and the conditionsas stated below in this section arefulfilled.

Deactivation

Deactivate the stop-start systemmanually by pressing eco. Thedeactivation is indicated when theLED in the button extinguishes.

AutostopIf the vehicle is at a low speed or at astandstill, activate an Autostop asfollows:● Depress the clutch pedal.● Move the selector lever to

neutral.● Release the clutch pedal.

The engine will be switched off whilethe ignition stays on.

Indication

An Autostop is indicated by theneedle at the AUTOSTOP position inthe tachometer.After restart, the idle speed isindicated.During an Autostop, the heating andbrake performance will bemaintained.

Conditions for an AutostopThe stop-start system checks if eachof the following conditions is fulfilled.


● The stop-start system is notmanually deactivated.

● The bonnet is fully closed.● The driver's door is closed or the

driver's seat belt is fastened.● The vehicle battery is sufficiently

charged and in good condition.● The engine is warmed-up.● The engine coolant temperature

is not too high.● The engine exhaust temperature

is not too high, e.g. after drivingwith high engine load.

● The ambient temperature isabove -5 °C.

● The climate control systemallows an Autostop.

● The brake vacuum is sufficient.● The self-cleaning function of the

diesel particle filter is not active.● The vehicle was driven at least at

walking speed since the lastAutostop.

Otherwise an Autostop will beinhibited.

Certain settings of the climate controlsystem may inhibit an Autostop. SeeClimate control chapter for moredetails 3 192.Immediately after motorway driving,an Autostop may be inhibited.New vehicle running-in 3 199.

Vehicle battery discharge protectionTo ensure reliable engine restarts,several battery discharge protectionfeatures are implemented as part ofthe stop-start system.

Power saving measuresDuring an Autostop, several electricalfeatures such as auxiliary electricheater or rear window heating aredisabled or switched into a power-saving mode. The fan speed of theclimate control system is reduced tosave power.

Restart of the engine by the driverDepress the clutch pedal to restart theengine.When the engine is restarted, controlindicator D in the Driver InformationCentre extinguishes.

If the selector lever is shifted out ofneutral before depressing the clutchpedal first, control indicator -illuminates or is shown as a messagein the Driver Information Centre.Control indicator - 3 112.

Restart of the engine by the stop-start systemThe selector lever must be in neutralto enable an automatic restart.If one of the following conditionsoccurs during an Autostop, theengine will be restarted automaticallyby the stop-start system.● The stop-start system is

manually deactivated.● The bonnet is opened.● The driver's seat belt is

unfastened and the driver's dooris opened.

● The engine temperature is toolow.

● The charge level of the vehiclebattery is below a defined level.

● The brake vacuum is notsufficient.


● The vehicle is driven at least atwalking speed.

● The climate control systemrequests an engine start.

● The air conditioning is manuallyswitched on.

If the bonnet is not fully closed, awarning message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.If an electrical accessory, e.g. aportable CD player, is connected tothe power outlet, a brief power dropduring engine restart may benoticeable.

Parking

9 Warning

● Do not park the vehicle on aneasily ignitable surface. Thehigh temperature of theexhaust system could ignite thesurface.

● Always apply the parkingbrake. Activate the manualparking brake without pressing

the release button. Apply asfirmly as possible on a downhillslope or uphill slope. Depressbrake pedal at the same time toreduce operating force.For vehicles with electricparking brake, pull switch m fora minimum of one second untilcontrol indicator m illuminatesconstantly and electric parkingbrake is applied 3 112.

● Switch off the engine.● If the vehicle is on a level

surface or uphill slope, engagefirst gear or set the selectorlever to position P beforeremoving the ignition key. Onan uphill slope, turn the frontwheels away from the kerb.If the vehicle is on a downhillslope, engage reverse gear orset the selector lever to positionP before removing the ignitionkey. Turn the front wheelstowards the kerb.

● Close the windows.● Remove the ignition key from

the ignition switch. Turn thesteering wheel until thesteering wheel lock is felt toengage.For vehicles with automatictransmission, the key can onlybe removed when the selectorlever is in position P.

● Lock the vehicle.● Activate the anti-theft alarm

system.● The engine cooling fans may run

after the engine has beenswitched off 3 261.

Caution

After running at high enginespeeds or with high engine loads,operate the engine briefly at a lowload or run in neutral forapprox. 30 seconds beforeswitching off, in order to protectthe turbocharger.


NoteIn the event of an accident withairbag deployment, the engine isturned off automatically if the vehiclecomes to a standstill within a certaintime.

Engine exhaust

9 Danger

Engine exhaust gases containpoisonous carbon monoxide,which is colourless and odourlessand could be fatal if inhaled.If exhaust gases enter the interiorof the vehicle, open the windows.Have the cause of the faultrectified by a workshop.Avoid driving with an open loadcompartment, otherwise exhaustgases could enter the vehicle.

Diesel particle filterAutomatic cleaning processThe diesel particle filter system filtersharmful soot particles out of theexhaust gases. The system includesa self-cleaning function that runsautomatically during driving withoutany notification. The filter is cleanedby periodically burning off the sootparticles at high temperature. Thisprocess takes place automaticallyunder set driving conditions and maytake up to 25 minutes. Typically itneeds between seven and twelveminutes. Autostop is not availableand fuel consumption may be higherduring this period. The emission ofsmells and smoke during this processis normal.

System requires cleaningUnder certain conditions, e.g. drivingshort distances, the system cannotclean itself automatically.If cleaning of the filter is required andif previous driving conditions did notenable automatic cleaning, it will be


indicated by illumination of % and awarning message in the DriverInformation Centre.% illuminates along with a warningmessage when diesel particle filter isfull. Start cleaning process as soon aspossible.% flashes along with a warningmessage when diesel particle filterhas reached the maximum fillinglevel. Start cleaning processimmediately to avoid damage to theengine.

Activate self-cleaning processTo activate cleaning process,continue driving, keep engine speedabove 2000 rpm. Shift down ifnecessary. Diesel particle filtercleaning is then started.Cleaning process is completed morequickly at high engine speeds andloads.Control indicator % extinguishes assoon as the self-cleaning operation iscomplete. Keep on driving until self-cleaning operation is complete.

Caution

If possible, do not interruptcleaning process. Drive untilcleaning is completed to avoid theneed for service or repair by aworkshop.

Cleaning process not possibleIf cleaning is not possible for anyreasons, control indicator Zilluminates and a warning messageappears in the Driver InformationCentre. Engine power may bereduced. Seek the assistance of aworkshop immediately.

Catalytic converterThe catalytic converter reduces theamount of harmful substances in theexhaust gases.

Caution

Fuel grades other than those listedon pages 3 246, 3 313 coulddamage the catalytic converter orelectronic components.Unburnt petrol will overheat anddamage the catalytic converter.Therefore avoid excessive use ofthe starter, running the fuel tankdry and starting the engine bypushing or towing.

In the event of misfiring, unevenengine running, a reduction in engineperformance or other unusualproblems, have the cause of the faultrectified by a workshop as soon aspossible. In an emergency, drivingcan be continued for a short period,keeping vehicle speed and enginespeed low.


AdBlueGeneral informationThe selective catalytic reduction(BlueInjection) is a method tosubstantially reduce the nitrogenoxides in the exhaust emission. Thisis achieved by injecting a DieselExhaust Fluid (DEF) into the exhaustsystem. The ammonia released bythe fluid reacts with nitrous gases(NOx) from the exhaust and turns itinto nitrogen and water.The designation of this fluid isAdBlue®. It is a non-toxic, non-flammable, colourless and odourlessfluid which consists of 32% urea and68% water.

9 Warning

Avoid contact of your eyes or skinwith AdBlue.In case of eye or skin contact,rinse off with water.

Caution

Avoid contact of the paintwork withAdBlue.In case of contact, rinse off withwater.

AdBlue freezes at a temperature ofapprox. -11 °C. As the vehicle isequipped with an AdBlue pre-heater,the emissions reduction at lowtemperatures is ensured. The AdBluepre-heater works automatically.The typical AdBlue consumption isapprox. 1.2 litres per 1000 km forvehicles with engine B16DTH orB16DTJ and approx. two litres per1000 km for vehicles with engineB20DTH. The consumption can alsobe higher depending on drivingbehaviour (e.g. high load or towing).

AdBlue tankAt a remaining volume of approx. fivelitres, there is a liquid level switch.Warning messages are displayedonly below that threshold. Tankvolume 3 318.

Level warningsDepending on the calculated range ofAdBlue, different messages aredisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre. The messages and therestrictions are a legal requirement.The first possible warning is AdBlueRange: 2400 km.This warning will show up once brieflywith the calculated range. Driving ispossible without any restrictions.The next warning level is entered witha range below 1750 km. Themessage with the current range willalways be displayed when ignition isswitched on and needs to beconfirmed 3 117. Refill AdBlue beforeentering the next warning level.At an AdBlue range below 900 km,the following warning messages arealternately displayed and cannot bedismissed:● AdBlue Low Refill Now● Engine Restart Prevented in 900

km.Additionally, control indicator Yflashes continuously.


NoteIn case of high AdBlue consumption,the Driver Information Centre maydisplay this warning without theprevious warning stages.

The last warning level is enteredwhen the AdBlue tank is empty.Restart of the engine is not possible.The following warning messages arealternately displayed and cannot bedismissed:● AdBlue Empty Refill Now● Engine Will Not Restart.

Additionally, control indicator Yflashes continuously.With active prevention of an enginestart, the following message will bedisplayed:Refill AdBlue To Start Vehicle.The tank must be refilled completelywith AdBlue, otherwise restarting ofthe engine is not possible.

High emission warningsIf the exhaust emission rises above acertain value, warnings similar to therange warnings will be displayed inthe Driver Information Centre.Requests to have the exhaust systemchecked and finally theannouncement of the prevention ofan engine restart are displayed.These restrictions are a legalrequirement.Consult a workshop for assistance.

Refilling AdBlue

Caution

Only use AdBlue that complieswith European standardsDIN 70 070 and ISO 22241-1.Do not use additives.Do not dilute AdBlue.Otherwise the selective catalyticreduction system could bedamaged.

NoteWhenever a filling pump with anozzle for passenger cars is notavailable at a filling station, use onlyAdBlue bottles or canisters with asealed refill adapter for refilling, toprevent splashback and overspill,and in order to ensure that the fumesfrom the tank are captured and donot emerge. AdBlue in bottles orcanisters is available in many fillingstations and can be purchased e.g.at Opel dealers and other retailoutlets.Since AdBlue has a limiteddurability, check the date of expirybefore refilling.NoteThe refilling of AdBlue is onlydetected by the system when theabovementioned liquid level switchin the tank is activated.In case AdBlue refill is notsuccessfully detected:


1. Continuously drive the vehiclefor 10 minutes making sure thatvehicle speed is always higherthan 20 km/h.

2. If AdBlue refill is detectedsuccessfully, AdBlue supply-driven limitations will disappear.

If AdBlue refill is still not detected,seek the assistance of a workshop.If AdBlue must be refilled attemperatures below -11 °C, therefilling of AdBlue may not bedetected by the system. In thisevent, park the vehicle in a spacewith a higher ambient temperatureuntil AdBlue is liquefied.NoteWhen unscrewing the protective capfrom the filler neck, ammonia fumesmay emerge. Do not inhale as thefumes have a pungent smell. Thefumes are not harmful by inhalation.

The AdBlue tank should be filledcompletely. This must be done if thewarning message regardingprevention of an engine restart isalready displayed.

The vehicle must be parked on a levelsurface.The filler neck for AdBlue is locatedbehind the fuel filler flap, which islocated at right rear side of thevehicle.The fuel filler flap can only be openedif the vehicle is unlocked.1. Remove key from ignition switch.2. Close all doors to avoid ammonia

fumes entering the interior of thevehicle.

3. Release the fuel filler flap bypushing the flap 3 248.

4. Unscrew protective cap from thefiller neck.

5. Open AdBlue canister.6. Mount one end of the hose on the

canister and screw the other endon the filler neck.

7. Lift the canister until it is empty, oruntil the flow from the canister hasstopped. This can take up to fiveminutes.

8. Place the canister on the groundto empty the hose, wait 15seconds.

9. Unscrew the hose from the fillerneck.

10. Mount the protective cap and turnclockwise until it engages.

NoteDispose of AdBlue canisteraccording to environmentalrequirements. Hose can be reusedafter flushing with clear water beforeAdBlue dries out.


Automatic transmissionThe automatic transmission permitsautomatic gearshifting (automaticmode) or manual gearshifting(manual mode).Manual shifting is possible in manualmode M by tapping the selector leverto + or - 3 211.

Transmission display

The mode or selected gear is shownin the Driver Information Centre.In automatic mode, the drivingprogramme is indicated by D.

In manual mode, M and the numberof the selected gear is indicated.R indicates reverse gear.N indicates neutral position.P indicates park position.

Selector lever

P : park position, wheels are locked,engage only when the vehicle isstationary and the parking brakeis applied

R : reverse gear, engage only whenthe vehicle is stationary

N : neutralD : automatic modeM : manual mode

< : upshift in manual mode] : downshift in manual mode

The selector lever is locked in P andcan only be moved when the ignitionis on, the release button on theselector lever is pushed and the brakepedal is applied.Without brake pedal applied, thecontrol indicator j illuminates.If the selector lever is not in P whenthe ignition is switched off, controlindicator j flashes.To engage P or R, press the releasebutton.


The engine can only be started withthe lever in position P or N. Whenposition N is selected, press the brakepedal or apply the parking brakebefore starting.Do not accelerate while engaging agear. Never depress the acceleratorpedal and brake pedal at the sametime.When a gear is engaged, the vehicleslowly begins to creep when thebrake is released.

Engine brakingTo utilise the engine braking effect,select a lower gear in good time whendriving downhill, see manual mode.

Rocking the vehicleRocking the vehicle is onlypermissible if the vehicle is stuck insand, mud or snow. Move the selectorlever between D and R in a repeatpattern. Do not race the engine andavoid sudden acceleration.

ParkingApply the parking brake and engageP.The ignition key can only be removedwhen the selector lever is in positionP.

Manual mode

Move selector lever out of position Dtowards the left in position M.Tap selector lever upwards + to shiftto a higher gear.Tap the selector lever downwards - toshift to a lower gear.

If a higher gear is selected whenvehicle speed is too low, or a lowergear when vehicle speed is too high,the shift is not executed. This cancause a message in the DriverInformation Centre.In manual mode, no automaticshifting to a higher gear takes placeat high engine revolutions.

Gear shift indicationThe symbol R with a number besideit is indicated when gearshifting isrecommended for fuel savingreasons.Shift indication appears only inmanual mode.

Electronic drivingprogrammes● Following a cold start, the

operating temperatureprogramme increases enginespeed to quickly bring thecatalytic converter to the requiredtemperature.


● The automatic neutral shiftfunction automatically shifts gearto idling when the vehicle isstopped with a forward gearengaged and the brake pedal ispressed.

● When SPORT mode is engaged,the vehicle shifts at higher enginespeeds (unless cruise control ison). SPORT mode 3 219.

● Special programmesautomatically adapt the gearshiftpoints when driving up inclines ordown hills.

● In snowy or icy conditions or onother slippery surfaces, theelectronic transmission controlenables the driver to selectmanually first, second or thirdgear for starting off.

KickdownIf the accelerator pedal is presseddown completely in automatic mode,the transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on engine speed.

FaultIn the event of a fault a message isdisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre. Vehicle messages 3 122.The transmission no longer shiftsautomatically. Continued travel ispossible with manual shifting.Only the highest gear is available.Depending on the fault, 2nd gear mayalso be available in manual mode.Shift only when vehicle is at astandstill.Have the cause of the fault remediedby a workshop.

Interruption of power supplyIn the event of an interruption ofpower supply, the selector levercannot be moved out of the Pposition. The ignition key cannot beremoved from the ignition switch.If the vehicle battery is discharged,start the vehicle using jump leads3 297.If the vehicle battery is not the causeof the fault, release the selector lever.1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Release the selector lever trimfrom the centre console at thefront, fold it upwards and rotate itto the left.


3. Push down the release lever andmove the selector lever out of P orN. If these positions are engagedagain, the selector lever will belocked in position again. Have thecause of the power supplyinterruption remedied by aworkshop.

4. Mount the selector lever trim ontothe centre console and refit.

Manual transmission

To engage reverse, depress theclutch pedal and then press therelease button on the selector leverand engage the gear.If the gear does not engage, set thelever to neutral, release the clutchpedal and depress again; then repeatgear selection.Do not slip the clutch unnecessarily.When operating, depress the clutchpedal completely. Do not use thepedal as a foot rest.

Caution

It is not advisable to drive with thehand resting on the selector lever.

Gear shift indication 3 114.Stop-start system 3 202.


BrakesThe brake system comprises twoindependent brake circuits.If a brake circuit fails, the vehicle canstill be braked using the other brakecircuit. However, braking effect isachieved only when the brake pedalis depressed firmly. Considerablymore force is needed for this. Thebraking distance is extended. Seekthe assistance of a workshop beforecontinuing your journey.When the engine is not running, thesupport of the brake servo unitdisappears once the brake pedal hasbeen depressed once or twice.Braking effect is not reduced, butbraking requires significantly greaterforce. It is especially important to bearthis in mind when being towed.Control indicator R 3 112.

Antilock brake systemAntilock brake system (ABS)prevents the wheels from locking.

ABS starts to regulate brake pressureas soon as a wheel shows a tendencyto lock. The vehicle remainssteerable, even during hard braking.ABS control is made apparentthrough a pulse in the brake pedaland the noise of the regulationprocess.For optimum braking, keep the brakepedal fully depressed throughout thebraking process, despite the fact thatthe pedal is pulsating. Do not reducethe pressure on the pedal.After starting off the system performsa self-test which may be audible.

Control indicator u 3 113.

Adaptive brake lightDuring full braking, all three brakelights flash for the duration of ABScontrol.

Fault

9 Warning

If there is a fault in the ABS, thewheels may be liable to lock dueto braking that is heavier thannormal. The advantages of ABSare no longer available. Duringhard braking, the vehicle can nolonger be steered and mayswerve.

Have the cause of the fault remediedby a workshop.

Parking brake

9 Warning

Before leaving the vehicle, checkparking brake status. Controlindicator R (manual parkingbrake) or m (electrical parkingbrake) must illuminate constantly.


Manual parking brake

9 Warning

Always apply parking brake firmlywithout operating the releasebutton, and apply as firmly aspossible on a downhill or uphillslope.To release the parking brake, pullthe lever up slightly, press therelease button and fully lower thelever.To reduce the operating forces ofthe parking brake, depress thefoot brake at the same time.

Control indicator R 3 112.

Electric parking brake

Applying when vehicle is stationary

9 Warning

Pull switch m for a minimum ofone second until control indicatorm illuminates constantly andelectric parking brake is applied

3 113. The electric parking brakeoperates automatically withadequate force.Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe electric parking brake status.Control indicator m 3 113.

The electric parking brake can alwaysbe activated, even if the ignition is off.Do not operate electric parking brakesystem too often with engine notrunning, as this will discharge thevehicle battery.

ReleasingSwitch on ignition. Keep foot brakepedal depressed and then pushswitch m.

Drive away functionVehicles with manual transmission:Depressing the clutch pedal and thenslightly releasing the clutch pedal andslightly depressing the acceleratorpedal releases the electric parkingbrake automatically. This is notpossible when the switch m is pulledat the same time.


Vehicles with automatic transmission:Engaging D and then depressing theaccelerator pedal releases theelectric parking brake automatically.This is not possible when the switchm is pulled at the same time.

Dynamic braking when vehicle ismovingWhen the vehicle is moving and theswitch m is kept pulled, the electricparking brake system will deceleratethe vehicle, but will not applystatically.As soon as the switch m is released,dynamic braking will be stopped.

Functionality checkWhen the vehicle is not moving, theelectric parking brake might beapplied automatically. This is done tocheck the system.

FaultFailure mode of electric parking brakeis indicated by a control indicator jand by a vehicle message which isdisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre. Vehicle messages 3 122.

Apply electric parking brake: pull andhold switch m for more than fiveseconds. If control indicator milluminates, electric parking brake isapplied.Release electric parking brake: pushand hold the switch m for more thantwo seconds. If control indicator mextinguishes, electric parking brake isreleased.Control indicator m flashes: electricparking brake is not fully applied orreleased. When continuouslyflashing, release electric parkingbrake and retry applying.

Brake assistIf brake pedal is depressed quicklyand forcefully, maximum brake forceis automatically applied.Operation of brake assist mightbecome apparent by a pulse in thebrake pedal and a greater resistancewhen depressing the brake pedal.

Maintain steady pressure on thebrake pedal as long as full braking isrequired. Maximum brake force isautomatically reduced when brakepedal is released.

Hill start assistThe system helps prevent unintendedmovement when driving away oninclines.When releasing the brake pedal afterstopping on an incline, the brakesremain on for a further two seconds.The brakes release automatically assoon as the vehicle begins toaccelerate or the two seconds holdingtime is over.The hill start assist is not active duringan Autostop.


Ride control systemsTraction Control systemThe Traction Control system (TC) is acomponent of the Electronic StabilityControl.TC improves driving stability whennecessary, regardless of the type ofroad surface or tyre grip, bypreventing the drive wheels fromspinning.As soon as the drive wheels starts tospin, engine output is reduced andthe wheel spinning the most is brakedindividually. This considerablyimproves the driving stability of thevehicle on slippery road surfaces.

TC is operational after each enginestart as soon as the control indicatorb extinguishes.When TC operates b flashes.

9 Warning

Do not let this special safetyfeature tempt you into taking riskswhen driving.Adapt speed to the roadconditions.

Control indicator b 3 114.

Deactivation

TC can be switched off when spinningof drive wheels is required: press bbriefly.

A status message appears in theDriver Information Centre when TC isdeactivated.

Control indicator k illuminates.When TC is deactivated, ESCremains active but with higher controlthreshold.TC is reactivated by pressing bagain. A status message pops-up inthe Driver Information Centre whenTC is reactivated.TC is also reactivated the next timethe ignition is switched on.

FaultIf there is a fault in the system thecontrol indicator b illuminatescontinuously and a message appearsin the Driver Information Centre. Thesystem is not operational.


Have the cause of the fault remediedby a workshop.

Electronic Stability ControlElectronic Stability Control (ESC)improves driving stability whennecessary, regardless of the type ofroad surface or tyre grip.As soon as the vehicle starts toswerve (understeer/oversteer),engine output is reduced and thewheels are braked individually.ESC operates in combination with theTraction Control system (TC). Itprevents the drive wheels fromspinning.

ESC is operational after each enginestart as soon as the control indicatorb extinguishes.When ESC operates b flashes.

9 Warning

Do not let this special safetyfeature tempt you into taking riskswhen driving.Adapt speed to the roadconditions.

Control indicator b 3 114.

Deactivation

ESC and TC can be deactivated:● hold b pressed for a minimum of

five seconds: ESC and TC areboth deactivated. k and n

illuminate and status messagesappear in the Driver InformationCentre.

● To deactivate only Tractioncontrol system press button bbriefly: TC is inactive but ESCremains active, k illuminates. Astatus message appears in theDriver Information Centre whenTC is deactivated.

ESC is reactivated by pressing theb button again. If the TC system waspreviously disabled, both TC andESC are reactivated. k and nextinguishes when TC and ESC arereactivated.ESC is also reactivated the next timethe ignition is switched on.


FaultIf there is a fault in the system thecontrol indicator b illuminatescontinuously and a message appearsin the Driver Information Centre. Thesystem is not operational.Have the cause of the fault remediedby a workshop.

Interactive driving systemFlex RideFlex Ride driving system allows thedriver to select between three drivingmodes:● SPORT mode: press SPORT,

LED illuminates.● TOUR mode: press TOUR, LED

illuminates.● Normal mode: neither SPORT or

TOUR are pressed, no LEDilluminates.

Deactivate SPORT mode and TOURmode by pressing the correspondingbutton once more.

In each driving mode Flex Ridenetworks the following electronicsystems:● Continuous Damping Control● Accelerator Pedal Control● Steering Control● Automatic transmission

SPORT mode

The settings of the systems areadapted to a sportier driving style.

TOUR mode

The settings of the systems areadapted to a comfort driving style.

Normal modeAll settings of the systems areadapted to standard values.

Drive mode controlWithin each manual selected drivingmode SPORT, TOUR or Normal, theDrive Mode Control (DMC) detectsand analyses continuously the realdriving characteristics, responses bythe driver, and the active dynamicstate of the vehicle. If necessary, thecontrol unit of DMC automatically


changes the settings within theselected driving mode or, whenrecognising greater variations, thedriving mode is changed for thelength of variation.If, for example, Normal mode isselected and DMC detects a sportydriving behaviour, DMC changesseveral settings of the Normal modeinto sporty settings. The DMCchanges to SPORT mode in case ofvery sporty driving behaviour.If, for example, TOUR mode isselected and whilst driving on awinding road a sudden hard brake isnecessary, DMC will detect thedynamic vehicle condition andchanges the settings for suspensionto SPORT mode to increase vehiclestability.When the driving characteristic or thedynamic vehicle state returns toformer state, DMC will change thesettings to the preselected drivingmode.

Personalised settings in the SportmodeThe driver can select the functions ofthe SPORT mode when SPORT ispressed.Select the relevant settings inSettings in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 121.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Driver assistancesystems

9 Warning

Driver assistance systems aredeveloped to support the driverand not to replace the driver'sattention.The driver accepts fullresponsibility when driving thevehicle.When using driver assistancesystems, always take careregarding the current trafficsituation.

Cruise controlThe cruise control can store andmaintain speeds of approx. 30 km/hto maximum vehicle speed.Deviations from the stored speedsmay occur when driving uphill ordownhill.


For safety reasons, the cruise controlcannot be activated until the footbrake has been operated once.Activation in first gear is not possible.

Do not use the cruise control if it is notadvisable to maintain a constantspeed.With automatic transmission, onlyactivate cruise control in automaticmode.Control indicator m 3 116.

Switching on

Press m; control indicator m ininstrument cluster illuminates white.

ActivationAccelerate to the desired speed andturn thumb wheel to SET/-, thecurrent speed is stored andmaintained. Control indicator m ininstrument cluster illuminates green.Accelerator pedal can be released.Vehicle speed can be increased bydepressing the accelerator pedal.When the accelerator pedal isreleased, the previously stored speedis resumed.Cruise control remains activatedwhile gearshifting.

Increase speedWith cruise control active, hold thumbwheel turned to RES/+ or briefly turnto RES/+ repeatedly: speedincreases continuously or in smallincrements.Alternatively accelerate to the desiredspeed and store by turning to SET/-.

Reduce speedWith cruise control active, hold thumbwheel turned to SET/- or briefly turn toSET/- repeatedly: speed decreasescontinuously or in small increments.


DeactivationPress y, control indicator m ininstrument cluster illuminates white.Cruise control is deactivated, but notswitched off. Last stored speedremains in memory for later speedresume.Automatic deactivation:● Vehicle speed is below approx.

30 km/h.● Vehicle speed drops more than

25 km/h below the set speed.● The brake pedal is depressed.● The clutch pedal is depressed for

a few seconds.● Selector lever is in N.● Engine speed is in a very low

range.● The Traction Control system or

Electronic Stability Control isoperating.

● Parking brake is applied.● Simultaneous pressing RES/+

and brake pedal deactivatescruise control and will deletestored speed.

Resume stored speedTurn thumb wheel to RES/+ at aspeed above 30 km/h. The storedspeed will be obtained.

Switching offPress m, control indicator m ininstrument cluster extinguishes. Thestored speed is deleted.Pressing L to activate the speedlimiter or switching off the ignition alsoswitches off cruise control anddeletes the stored speed.

Speed limiterThe speed limiter prevents thevehicle exceeding a preset maximumspeed.The maximum speed can be set atspeeds above 25 km/h up to200 km/h.The driver can only accelerate up tothe preset speed. Deviations from thelimited speed may occur when drivingdownhill.

The preset speed limit is displayed inthe Driver Information Centre whenthe system is active.

Activation

Press L. Symbol Lilluminates in theDriver Information Centre.If cruise control or adaptive cruisecontrol has been activated before, itis switched off when speed limiter isactivated and the control indicator mextinguishes.


Set speed limitAccelerate to the desired speed andbriefly turn thumb wheel to SET/-: thecurrent speed is stored as maximumspeed. L and the speed limit isdisplayedin the Driver InformationCentre.

Change speed limitWith speed limiter active, turn thumbwheel to RES/+ to increase or SET/-to decrease the desired maximumspeed.

Exceeding the speed limitWhen exceeding the limited speedwithout driver input, the speed willflash in the Driver Information Centreand a chime sounds during thisperiod.

In the event of an emergency, it ispossible to exceed the speed limit bydepressing the accelerator pedalfirmly nearly to the final point. In thiscase no chime appears.Release the accelerator pedal andthe speed limiter function isreactivated once a speed lower thanthe limit speed is obtained.

DeactivationPress y: speed limiter is deactivatedand the vehicle can be driven withoutspeed limit.

The stored limited speed is indicatedin brackets. Additionally, acorresponding message appears.Speed limiter is deactivated, but notswitched off. Last stored speedremains in memory for later speedresume.

Resume limit speedTurn thumb wheel to RES/+. Thestored speed limit will be obtainedand is indicated without brackets inthe Driver Information Centre.

Switching offPress L, the speed limit indicationextinguishes in the Driver InformationCentre. The stored speed is deleted.By pressing m to activate cruisecontrol or adaptive cruise control,speed limiter is also deactivated andthe stored speed is deleted.By switching off the ignition, speedlimiter is also deactivated, but thespeed limit will be stored for nextspeed limiter activation.

Adaptive cruise controlAdaptive cruise control is anenhancement to traditional cruisecontrol with the additional feature ofmaintaining a certain distance behindthe vehicle ahead.


Adaptive cruise control automaticallydecelerates the vehicle whenapproaching a slower moving vehicle.It then adjusts the vehicle speed tofollow the vehicle ahead at theselected following distance. Thevehicle speed increases or decreasesto follow the vehicle in front, but willnot exceed the set speed. It mayapply limited braking with activatedbrake lights.The adaptive cruise control can storeand maintain speeds over approx.50 km/h and brakes automatically tofollow a slower vehicle driving aheaddown to a minimum speed of30 km/h.

Adaptive cruise control uses a radarsensor to detect the vehicles ahead.If no vehicle is detected in the drivingpath, the adaptive cruise control willbehave like a traditional cruisecontrol.

For safety reasons, the systemcannot be activated before the brakepedal has been depressed once afterswitching on ignition. Activation in firstgear is not possible.Adaptive cruise control is mainlyadvised to be used on long straightroads, e.g. highways or country roadswith steady traffic. Do not use thesystem if it is not advisable tomaintain a constant speed.Control indicator A 3 117, m 3 116.

9 Warning

The complete driver attention isalways required while driving withadaptive cruise control. The driverstays fully in control of the vehiclebecause the brake pedal, theaccelerator pedal and the cancelswitch have priority over anyadaptive cruise control operation.

Switching on

Press C to switch on adaptive cruisecontrol. The control indicator milluminates white. Additionally Cappears in the Driver InformationCentre.

Activation by setting the speedAdaptive cruise control can beactivated between 50 km/h and180 km/h.Accelerate to the desired speed andturn thumb wheel to SET/-; thecurrent speed is stored andmaintained. Control indicator milluminates green.


The adaptive cruise control symbolC, the following distance setting andset speed are indicated in the DriverInformation Centre.The accelerator pedal can bereleased. Adaptive cruise controlremains activated while gearshifting.

Overriding set speedIt is always possible to drive fasterthan the selected set speed bydepressing the accelerator pedal.When the accelerator pedal isreleased, the vehicle returns to thedesired distance if a slower vehicle isahead. Otherwise it returns to thestored speed.Once the system is activated,adaptive cruise control decelerates orbrakes if it detects a vehicle aheadwhich is slower or closer than thedesired following distance.

9 Warning

Accelerating by the driverdeactivates automatic braking bythe system. This is indicated as apop-up warning in the DriverInformation Centre.

Increase speedWith adaptive cruise control active,hold thumb wheel turned to RES/+:speed increases continuously in largeincrements, or activate RES/+repeatedly: speed increases in smallincrements.If the vehicle is driven with adaptivecruise control active much faster thanthe desired speed, e.g. afterdepressing the accelerator pedal,then the current speed can be storedand maintained by turning the thumbwheel to SET/-.

Reduce speedWith adaptive cruise control active,hold thumb wheel turned to SET/-:speed decreases continuously in

large increments, or activate SET/-repeatedly: speed decreases in smallincrements.If the vehicle is driven with adaptivecruise control active much slowerthan the desired speed, e.g. becauseof a slower vehicle ahead, then thecurrent speed can be stored andmaintained by turning the thumbwheel to SET/-.

Resume stored speedIf the system is switched on butinactive, then turn thumb wheel toRES/+ at a speed above 50 km/h toresume the stored speed.The stored speed is indicated inbrackets when the system is switchedon but not active,

Setting the following distanceWhen adaptive cruise control detectsa slower moving vehicle in the drivingpath, it will adjust the vehicle speed tomaintain the following distanceselected by the driver.The following distance can be set tonear, medium or far.


Press E, the current setting is shownin the Driver Information Centre.Press E again to change thefollowing distance. The setting is alsodisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre.

The selected following distance isindicated by filled distance bars onthe adaptive cruise control page.Note that the following distancesetting is shared with the sensitivitysetting of forward collision alert.Example: If setting 3 (far) is selected,then the driver is warned soonerbefore a possible collision, also ifadaptive cruise control is inactive orswitched off.

9 Warning

The driver accepts fullresponsibility for the appropriatefollowing distance based on traffic,weather and visibility conditions.Following distance must beadjusted or the system switchedoff when required by the prevailingconditions.

Detecting the vehicle ahead

The green illuminated vehicle aheadcontrol indicator A is displayed whenthe system detects a vehicle in thedriving path.Forward collision alert 3 230.If this symbol does not appear, orappears briefly, adaptive cruisecontrol will not respond to vehiclesahead.


DeactivationAdaptive cruise control is deactivatedby the driver when:● y is pressed.● Brake pedal is applied.● Clutch pedal is depressed for

more than four seconds.● Selector lever of automatic

transmission is moved to N.The system is also automaticallydeactivated when:● Vehicle speed accelerates above

190 km/h or slows down below45 km/h.

● The Traction Control system isoperating.

● Electronic Stability Control isoperating.

● There is no traffic and nothingdetected on the road sides forseveral minutes. In this casethere are no radar echoes andthe sensor may report that it isblocked.

● The active emergency brakingsystem is applying the brakes.

● Driving on steep inclines.● Radar sensor is blocked by an ice

or water film.● A fault is detected in the radar,

engine or brake system.When adaptive cruise control isdeactivated, the control indicator mchanges from green to white and apop-up message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.

The stored speed is maintained andindicated in brackets in the DriverInformation Centre. The system isdeactivated but not switched off.

9 Warning

When adaptive cruise control isdeactivated, the driver must takeover full brake and engine control.

Switching offPress C to switch off adaptive cruisecontrol. The control indicator m andC in the Driver Information Centreextinguish. The stored speed isdeleted.Switching off the ignition alsoswitches off adaptive cruise controland deletes the stored speed.

Driver's attention● Use adaptive cruise control

carefully on bends or mountainroads, as it can lose the vehicleahead and require time to detectit again.

● Do not use the system onslippery roads as it can createrapid changes in tyre traction(wheel spinning), so that youcould lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not use adaptive cruisecontrol during rain, snow orheavy dirt, as the radar sensorcan be covered by a water film,dust, ice or snow. This reduces orcompletely suppresses the


visibility. In case of sensorblockage, clean the sensorcover.

System limits● The system's automatic brake

force does not permit hardbraking and the braking levelmay not be sufficient to avoid acollision.

● After a sudden lane change, thesystem needs a certain time todetect the next precedingvehicle. So if a new vehicle isdetected, the system mayaccelerate instead of braking.

● Adaptive cruise control doesignore the oncoming traffic.

● Adaptive cruise control does notbrake for pedestrians, animals,very slow speed driving orstopped vehicles.

● Don't use adaptive cruise controlwhen towing a trailer.

Bends

The adaptive cruise control calculatesa predicted path based on thecentrifugal force. This predicted pathconsiders the current bendcharacteristic, but cannot consider afuture bend change. The system maylose the current vehicle ahead orconsider a vehicle which is not in theactual lane. This can happen whenentering or exiting a bend or if thebend gets stronger or weaker. If it nolonger detects any vehicle ahead,then control indicator A willextinguish.If the centrifugal force is too high in abend, the system slows down thevehicle slightly. This braking level isnot designed to avoid spinning off thebend. The driver is responsible forreducing the selected speed before

entering a bend and in general toadapt the speed to the road type andto existing speed limits.

MotorwaysOn motorways, adapt the set speedto the situation and the weather.Always consider that adaptive cruisecontrol has a limited visibility range, alimited braking level and a certainreaction time to verify if a vehicle is inthe driving path or not. Adaptivecruise control may not be able tobrake the vehicle in time to avoid acollision with a much slower vehicle orafter a lane change. This isparticularly true if driving fast or if thevisibility is reduced due to weatherconditions.While entering or exiting a motorway,adaptive cruise control may lose thevehicle ahead and accelerate up to


the set speed. For this reason,decrease the set speed before theexit or before the entry.

Vehicle path changes

If another vehicle enters your drivingpath, adaptive cruise control will firstconsider the vehicle when it iscompletely in your path. Be ready totake action and depress the brakepedal, if you need to brake morequickly.

Hill and trailer considerations

System performance on hills andwhen towing a trailer depends onvehicle speed, vehicle load, trafficconditions and the road gradient. Itmay not detect a vehicle in your pathwhile driving on hills. On steep hills,you may have to use the acceleratorpedal to maintain your vehicle speed.When going downhill, especiallywhen towing a trailer, you may haveto brake to maintain or reduce yourspeed.Note that applying the brakedeactivates the system. It is notrecommended to use adaptive cruisecontrol on steep hills especially whentowing a trailer.

Radar unit

The radar unit is mounted behind theradiator grille below the brandemblem.

9 Warning

The radar unit was alignedcarefully during manufacture.Therefore, after a frontal accident,do not use the system. The frontbumper may appear to be intact,however the sensor behind can beout of position and reactincorrectly. After an accident,


consult a workshop to verify andcorrect the adaptive cruise controlsensor position.

SettingsSettings can be changed in thevehicle personalisation menu in theInfo-Display.Select the relevant setting inSettings in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 121.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

FaultIf the adaptive cruise control does notwork due to temporary conditions(e.g. blockage by ice) or if there is apermanent system error, then amessage is displayed in the DriverInformation Centre.Vehicle messages 3 122.

Forward collision alertThe forward collision alert can help toavoid or reduce the damage causedby front-end crashes.

A vehicle ahead is indicated by acontrol indicator A.

If a vehicle directly ahead isapproached too quickly, a warningchime and alert in the DriverInformation Centre is provided.A precondition is that forward collisionalert is activated in the vehiclepersonalisation menu 3 124 or that itis not deactivated by pressing V(depending on the system, seefollowing).

Depending on the vehicle'sequipment, there are two variants ofthe forward collision alert available:● Forward collision alert based on

radar systemon vehicles equipped withadaptive cruise control 3 223.

● Forward collision alert based onfront camera systemon vehicles with traditional cruisecontrol 3 220.

Forward collision alert based onradar systemThe system uses the radar sensorbehind the radiator grille to detect avehicle directly ahead, in your path,within a distance of max. 150 metres.

ActivationForward collision alert operatesautomatically above walking speed,provided that Auto collisionpreparation setting is not deactivatedin the vehicle personalisation menu3 124.


Selecting the alert sensitivityThe alert sensitivity can be set tonear, medium or far.

Press E; the current setting is shownin the Driver Information Centre.Press E again to change the alertsensitivity. The setting is alsodisplayed in the top line of the DriverInformation Centre.

Note that the alert timing sensitivitysetting is shared with the followingdistance setting of the adaptive cruisecontrol. So changing the alert timingsensitivity changes the adaptivecruise control following distancesetting.

Alerting the driverThe vehicle ahead control indicatorA illuminates green in the instrumentcluster when the system has detecteda vehicle in the driving path.

Caution

The colour lighting of this controlindicator does not correspond tolocal traffic laws on followingdistance. The driver bears fullresponsibility for maintaining safefollowing distance according toapplicable traffic rules, weatherand road conditions etc. at alltimes.

When the distance to a precedingmoving vehicle gets too small or whenapproaching another vehicle toorapidly and a collision is imminent thecollision alert symbol pops-up in theDriver Information Centre and awarning chime sounds. Depress thebrake pedal, if it is required by thesituation.


SettingsSettings can be changed in thevehicle personalisation menu in theInfo-Display.Select the relevant setting inSettings in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Forward collision alert based onfront camera systemForward collision alert uses the frontcamera system in the windscreen todetect a vehicle directly ahead, inyour path, within a distance of approx.60 metres.

ActivationForward collision alert operatesautomatically above 40 km/h, if it isnot deactivated by pressing V, seebelow.

Selecting the alert sensitivityThe alert sensitivity can be set tonear, medium or far.

Press V; the current setting is shownin the Driver Information Centre.Press V again to change the alertsensitivity.

Alerting the driverThe vehicle ahead control indicatorA illuminates green in the instrumentcluster when the system has detecteda vehicle in the driving path.

Caution

The colour lighting of this controlindicator does not correspond tolocal traffic laws on followingdistance. The driver bears fullresponsibility for maintaining safefollowing distance according toapplicable traffic rules, weatherand road conditions etc. at alltimes.

When the distance to a precedingmoving vehicle gets too small or whenapproaching another vehicle toorapidly and a collision is imminent thecollision alert symbol pops-up in the


Driver Information Centre and awarning chime sounds. Depress thebrake pedal, if it is required by thesituation.

DeactivationThe system can be deactivated.Press V repeatedly until ForwardCollision Alert Off appears in theDriver Information Centre.

General information for bothvariants of forward collision alert

9 Warning

Forward collision alert is just awarning system and does notapply the brakes. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead toorapidly, it may not provide youenough time to avoid a collision.The driver accepts fullresponsibility for the appropriatefollowing distance based on traffic,weather and visibility conditions.

The complete attention of thedriver is always required whiledriving. The driver must always beready to take action and apply thebrakes.

System limitationsThe system is designed to warn onlyfor vehicles, but may react also onother metallic objects.In the following cases, forwardcollision alert may not detect a vehicleahead or sensor performance islimited:● on winding roads● when weather limits visibility,

such as fog, rain, or snow● when the sensor is blocked by

snow, ice, slush, mud, dirt,windscreen damage or affectedby foreign items, e.g. stickers

Following distanceindicationThe following distance indicationdisplays the distance to a precedingmoving vehicle. The system uses,

depending on the vehicle equipment,either the radar behind the radiatorgrille or the front camera in thewindscreen to detect the distance ofa vehicle directly ahead in your path.It is active at speeds above 40 km/h.When a preceding vehicle is detectedahead, the distance is indicated inseconds, displayed on a page in theDriver Information Centre 3 117.Press MENU on the turn signal leverto select Vehicle InformationMenu ? and turn the adjusterwheel to choose following distanceindication page.

The minimum indicated distance is0.5 s.


If there is no vehicle ahead or thevehicle ahead is out of range, twodashes will be displayed: -.- s.

If Adaptive cruise control is active,this page shows the alert sensitivitysetting instead of following distancesetting. 3 223.

Active Emergency BrakingActive emergency braking can help toreduce the damage and injury fromcrashes with vehicles and obstaclesdirectly ahead, when a collision canno longer be avoided either bymanual braking or by steering. Before

the active emergency brakingapplies, the driver is warned by theforward collision alert 3 230.The feature uses various inputs (e.g.radar sensor, brake pressure, vehiclespeed) to calculate the probability ofa frontal collision.Active emergency braking operatesautomatically above walking speed,provided that Auto collisionpreparation setting is not deactivatedin the vehicle personalisation menu3 124.The system includes:● brake preparation system● emergency automatic braking● forward looking brake assist

9 Warning

This system is not intended toreplace the driver responsibility ofdriving the vehicle and lookingahead. Its function is limited tosupplemental use only. The drivershall continue to apply the brakepedal as the driving situationdictates.

Brake preparation systemWhen approaching a vehicle aheadso quickly that a collision is likely, thebrake preparation system slightlypressurises the brakes. This reducesthe response time, when a manual orautomatic braking is requested.The brake system is prepared so thatbraking can occur more rapidly.

Emergency automatic brakingAfter the brake preparation and justbefore the imminent collision, thisfunction automatically applies limitedbraking to reduce the impact speed ofthe collision.

Forward looking brake assistIn addition to brake preparationsystem and emergency automaticbraking, the forward looking brakeassist function makes the brake assistmore sensitive. In this way,depressing the brake pedal slightlyresults immediately in a strongbraking. This function helps the driverbrake quicker and stronger before theimminent collision.


9 Warning

Active emergency braking is notdesigned to apply strongautonomous braking or to avoidautomatically a collision. It isdesigned to reduce the vehiclespeed before collision. It may notreact on stopped vehicles,pedestrians or animals. After asudden lane change, the systemneeds a certain time to detect thenext preceding vehicle.The complete attention of thedriver is always required whiledriving. The driver shall always beready to take action and apply thebrakes and steer to avoidcollisions. The system is designedto work with all occupants wearingtheir seat belts.

System limitationsThe active emergency braking haslimited or no function during rain,snow or heavy dirt, as the radarsensor can be covered by a water

film, dust, ice or snow. In case ofsensor blockage, clean the sensorcover.In some seldom cases the activeemergency braking system mayprovide a short automatic braking insituations that seem to beunnecessary, for instance due totraffic signs in a curve or due tovehicles in another lane. This isacceptable operation, the vehicledoes not need service. Firmly applythe accelerator pedal to override theautomatic braking.

SettingsSettings can be changed in thevehicle personalisation menu in theInfo-Display.Select the relevant setting inSettings in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

FaultIn the event of a system servicerequirement, a message is displayedin the Driver Information Centre.

If the system does not work as itshould, vehicle messages aredisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre.Vehicle messages 3 122.

Parking assistFront-rear parking assist

9 Warning

The driver bears full responsibilityfor the parking manoeuvre.Always check the surroundingarea when driving backwards orforwards while using parkingassist system.

The front-rear parking assistmeasures the distance between thevehicle and obstacles in front of andbehind the vehicle. It informs andwarns the driver by giving acousticsignals and display indication.It uses two different acoustic warningsignals for the front and rearmonitoring areas, each with adifferent tone frequency. The signal


for front obstacles sounds via thefront speakers, for rear obstacles itsounds via the rear speakers.

The system has four ultrasonicparking sensors each in the rear andfront bumper.

ActivationWhen reverse gear is engaged, thefront and rear parking assist is readyto operate.The system is also activatedautomatically at a speed up to11 km/h.

An illuminated LED in the parkingassist button r indicates that thesystem is ready to operate.If r is switched off within an ignitioncycle, the front parking assist isdeactivated. If vehicle speed hasexceeded 25 km/h beforehand,parking assist will be reactivatedwhen speed drops below 11 km/h.

IndicationThe system warns the driver withacoustic signals against potentiallyhazardous obstacles behind and infront of the vehicle.

Depending on which side of thevehicle is closer to an obstacle, youwill hear acoustic warning signals onthe respective side of the vehicle. Theinterval between the soundsbecomes shorter as the vehicle getscloser to that obstacle. When thedistance is less than approx. 30 cm,the sound is continuous.Additionally, the distance to rear andfront obstacles is displayed bychanging distance lines in the DriverInformation Centre 3 117 or,depending on the version, on the Info-Display 3 121.


Rear obstacles are indicatedacoustically and visually at the sametime.Front obstacles are indicated visuallyfirst. At distances less than 80 cm anacoustic signal also sounds.The distance indication can beinhibited by vehicle messages with ahigher priority. After dismissing themessage distance indication appearsagain.

DeactivationThe rear parking assist automaticallyswitches off when reverse gear isdisengaged.The front parking assist is deactivatedautomatically at a speed above11 km/h.

Manual deactivation is also possibleby pressing the parking assist buttonr.When the system is deactivatedmanually, the LED in the buttonextinguishes and Park Assist Offpops-up in the Driver InformationCentre.After a manual deactivation, the front-rear parking assist is activated againif r is pressed or if reverse gear isengaged.The complete system can bemanually deactivated in the vehiclepersonalisation menu in theInfo-Display. It remains deactivated

during the ignition cycle or untilactivation in personalisation menuagain. Vehicle personalisation 3 124.When using the trailer hitch changethe configuration settings in thevehicle personalisation menu in theInfo-Display. Vehicle personalisation3 124.

FaultIn the event of a fault or if the systemdoes not work temporarily, e.g.because of high external noise levelor other interference factors, amessage pops-up in the DriverInformation Centre.Vehicle messages 3 122.

Basic notes on parking assistsystems

9 Warning

Under certain circumstances,various reflective surfaces onobjects or clothing as well as


external noise sources may causethe system to fail to detectobstacles.Special attention must be paid tolow obstacles which can damagethe lower part of the bumper.

Caution

Performance of the system can bereduced when sensors arecovered, e.g. by ice or snow.Performance of the parking assistsystem can be reduced due toheavy loading.Special conditions apply if thereare taller vehicles in the vicinity(e.g. off-road vehicles, mini vans,vans). Object identification andcorrect distance indication in theupper part of these vehiclescannot be guaranteed.Objects with a very small reflectioncross-section, e.g. objects ofnarrow size or soft materials, maynot be detected by the system.

Parking assist systems do notdetect objects outside thedetection range.

NoteThe parking assist systemautomatically detects factory-fittedtowing equipment. It is deactivatedwhen the connector is plugged in.It is possible that the sensor detectsa non-existing object (echodisturbance) caused by externalacoustical or mechanicdisturbances.NoteIf engaging a forward gear andexceeding a certain speed, the rearparking assist will be deactivatedwhen the rear carrier system isextended.If engaging reverse gear first, theparking assist will detect the rearcarrier system and provide a buzzingsound. Press r briefly todeactivate the parking assist.

Side blind spot alertThe side blind spot alert systemdetects and reports objects on eitherside of the vehicle, within a specified"blind spot" zone. The systemdisplays a visual alert in each exteriormirror, when detecting objects thatmay not be visible in the interior andexterior mirrors.The system's sensors are located inthe bumper on the left and right sideof the vehicle.

9 Warning

Side blind spot alert does notreplace driver vision.The system does not detect:

● vehicles outside the side blindzones which may be rapidlyapproaching

● pedestrians, cyclists or animalsBefore changing a lane, alwayscheck all mirrors, look over theshoulder and use the turn signal.


When the system detects a vehicle inthe side blind zone while drivingforward, either while passing avehicle or being passed, a yellowwarning symbol B will illuminate inthe relevant exterior mirror. If thedriver then activates the turn signal,the warning symbol B starts flashingyellow as a warning not to changelanes.NoteIf the passing vehicle is at least10 km/h faster than the passedvehicle, the warning symbol B in therelevant exterior mirror may notilluminate.

Side blind spot alert is active fromspeeds of 10 km/h up to 140 km/h.Driving faster than 140 km/hdeactivates the system, indicated bylow lighting warning symbols B inboth exterior mirrors. Reducing thespeed again will extinguish thewarning symbols. If a vehicle is thendetected in the blind zone, thewarning symbols B will illuminate asnormal on the relevant side.When the vehicle is started, bothexterior mirror displays will brieflyilluminate to indicate that the systemis operating.The system can be activated ordeactivated in the Info-Display,vehicle personalisation 3 124.The system is deactivated if thevehicle is towing a trailer.Deactivation is indicated by amessage in the Driver InformationCentre.

Detection zonesThe detection zones start at the rearbumper and extend approx.three metres rearwards and to the

sides. The height of the zone isapprox. between half a metre andtwo metres off the ground.Side blind spot alert is designed toignore stationary objects, e.g.guardrails, posts, curbs, walls andbeams. Parked vehicles or oncomingvehicles are not detected.

FaultOccasional missed alerts can occurunder normal circumstances and willincrease in wet conditions.Side blind spot alert does not operatewhen the left or right corners of therear bumper are covered with mud,dirt, snow, ice, slush, or in heavyrainstorms. Cleaning instructions3 300.In the event of a fault in the system orif the system does not work due totemporary conditions, a message isdisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre. Seek the assistance of aworkshop in case of a permanentfault.


Rear view cameraThe rear view camera assists thedriver when reversing by displaying aview of the area behind the vehicle.The view of the camera is displayedin the Info-Display.

9 Warning

The rear view camera does notreplace driver vision. Note thatobjects that are outside thecamera's field of view and theparking assist sensors, e.g. belowthe bumper or underneath thevehicle, are not displayed.Do not reverse the vehicle by onlylooking at the Info-Display andcheck the surrounding areabehind and around the vehiclebefore reversing.

ActivationRear view camera is automaticallyactivated when reverse gear isengaged.

Functionality

The camera is mounted in the tailgatehandle.

Due to the high position of thecamera, the rear bumper can be seenon the display as a guide to position.The area displayed by the camera islimited. The distance of the image thatappears on the display differs fromthe actual distance.

Guiding linesDynamic guiding lines are horizontallines at one metre intervals projectedon the picture to define the distanceto displayed objects.

Trajectory lane of the vehicle isshown in accordance with thesteering angle.


Warning symbolsWarning symbols are indicated astriangles 9 on the picture whichshows obstacles detected by the rearsensors of the parking assist.Additionally 9 appears on the top lineof the Info-Display with the warning tocheck the vehicle surrounding.

DeactivationThe camera is switched off when acertain forward speed is exceeded orif reverse gear is not engaged forapprox. 15 seconds. Rear viewcamera can be manually deactivatedin the vehicle personalisation menu inthe Info-Display. Select the relevantsetting in Settings .Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

Deactivation of guiding lines andwarning symbols

7'' R 4.0 IntelliLink Activation ordeactivation of the visual guiding linesand the warning symbols can bechanged via touch buttons in thelower zone of the display.Info-Display 3 121.Vehicle personalisation 3 124.

FaultFault messages are displayed with a9 on the top line of the Info-Display.

The rear view camera may notoperate properly when:● The surrounding area is dark.● The sun or the beam of

headlights is shining directly intothe camera lens.

● Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsecovers the camera lens. Cleanthe lens, rinse it with water, andwipe it with a soft cloth.

● The tailgate is not closedcorrectly.

● The vehicle had a rear-endaccident.

● There are extreme temperaturechanges.

Traffic sign assistantFunctionalityThe traffic sign assistant systemdetects designated traffic signs via afront camera and displays them in theDriver Information Centre.


Traffic signs which will be detectedare:Limit and no passing signs● speed limit● no passing● end of speed limit● end of no passing

Road signsbeginning and end of:● city regions (country specific)● motorways● A-roads● play streets

Add-on signs● additional hints to traffic signs● restriction of trailer towing● tractor constraints● wet warning● ice warning● direction arrows

Speed limit signs are displayed in theDriver Information Centre until thenext speed limit sign or end of speedlimit is detected or up to a defined signtimeout.

Combinations of multiple signs in thedisplay are possible.

An exclamation mark in a frameindicates that there is an additionalsign detected which is not recognisedby the system.The system operates without loss ofperformance up to a speed of200 km/h depending on the lightingconditions. At night the system isactive up to a speed of 160 km/h.

Display indicationInformation about the currently validtraffic signs is available on thedesignated traffic sign assistant pagein the Driver Information Centre.

Additionally, the currently valid speedlimit is displayed permanently in thelower line of the Driver InformationCentre. In case a speed limit withaddon is available, a + symbol isdisplayed in this area.


Choose ? via MENU and selecttraffic sign assistant page with theadjuster wheel on the turn signal lever3 117.When another page on the DriverInformation Centre menu wasselected and then traffic signassistant page is chosen again, thelast recognised traffic sign will bedisplayed.

Alert functionThe alert function can be activated ordeactivated in the setting menu of thetraffic sign assistant page.

Once activated and when the trafficsign detection page is currently notdisplayed, newly detected speed limitand no passing signs are displayedas popup alerts in the DriverInformation Centre.

When traffic sign assistant page isdisplayed, press SET/CLR on the turnsignal lever.


Select Alerts ON or Alerts OFF byturning the adjuster wheel and pressSET/CLR.Pop-up alert is displayed for approx.eight seconds in the DriverInformation Centre.

System resetThe content of the traffic sign memorycan be cleared in the setting menu ofthe traffic sign assistant page byselecting Reset and confirm bypressing SET/CLR on the turn signallever.

Alternatively, SET/CLR can bepressed for three seconds to clear thecontent of the page.Upon successful reset, a chime willsound and the following “DefaultSign” is indicated until the next trafficsign is detected.

In some cases, traffic sign assistant iscleared up automatically by thesystem.

Clearing of traffic signsThere are different scenarios thatlead to clearing the currentlydisplayed traffic signs. After clearing,the “Default Sign” is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.

Reasons for signs being cleared:● A predefined distance was driven

or time has elapsed (differs foreach sign type)

● Vehicle drives through a turn● The speed becomes slower than

52 km/h (city entry detection)

FaultThe traffic sign assistant system maynot operate correctly if:● The area of the windscreen,

where the front camera islocated, is not clean or affectedby foreign items, e.g. stickers.

● Traffic signs are completely orpartially covered or difficult todiscern.

● There are adverse environmentalconditions, e.g. heavy rain, snow,direct sunlight or shadows.

● Traffic signs are incorrectlymounted or damaged.

● Traffic signs do not comply withthe Vienna Convention on trafficsigns (Wiener Übereinkommenüber Straßenverkehrszeichen).


Caution

The system is intended to help thedriver within a defined speedrange to discern certain trafficsigns. Do not ignore traffic signswhich are not displayed by thesystem.The system does not discern anyother than the conventional trafficsigns that might give or end aspeed limit.Do not let this special featuretempt you into taking risks whendriving.Always adapt speed to the roadconditions.The driver assistance systems donot relieve the driver from fullresponsibility for vehicleoperation.

Lane departure warningThe lane departure warning systemobserves the lane markings betweenwhich the vehicle is driving via a frontcamera. The system detects lane

changes and warns the driver in theevent of an unintended lane changevia visual and acoustic signals.Criteria for the detection of anunintended lane change are:● No operation of turn signals.● No brake pedal operation.● No active accelerator operation

or speeding-up.● No active steering.

If the driver is active, no warning willbe issued.

Activation

The lane departure warning system isactivated by pressing ). Theilluminated LED in the buttonindicates that the system is switchedon. When the control indicator ) inthe instrument cluster illuminatesgreen, the system is ready to operate.The system is only operable atvehicle speeds above 56 km/h and iflane markings are available.When the system recognises anunintended lane change, the controlindicator ) changes to yellow andflashes. Simultaneously a chimesound is activated.

DeactivationThe system is deactivated bypressing ), the LED in the buttonextinguishes.At speeds below 56 km/h the systemis inoperable.


FaultThe lane departure warning systemmay not operate properly when:● The windscreen is not clean.● There are adverse environmental

conditions like heavy rain, snow,direct sunlight or shadows.

The system can not operate when nolane marking is detected.

FuelFuel for petrol enginesOnly use unleaded fuel that complieswith European standard EN 228 orequivalent.The engine is capable of running withfuel that contains up to 10% ethanol(e.g. named E10).Use fuel with the recommendedoctane rating. A lower octane ratingcan reduce engine power and torqueand slightly increases fuelconsumption.

Caution

Do not use fuel or fuel additivesthat contain metallic compoundssuch as manganese-basedadditives. This may cause enginedamage.

Caution

Use of fuel that does not comply toEN 228 or equivalent can lead todeposits or engine damage.

Caution

Use of fuel with a lower octanerating than the lowest possiblerating could lead to uncontrolledcombustion and engine damage.

The engine specific requirementsregarding octane rating are given inthe engine data overview 3 313. Acountry specific label at the fuel fillerflap can supersede the requirement.

Fuel additives outside EuropeFuel should contain detergentadditives that help prevent engineand fuel system deposits fromforming. Clean fuel injectors andintake valves will allow the emissioncontrol system to work properly.


Some fuel does not contain sufficientquantities of additive to keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean.To make up for this lack ofdetergency, add Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS to the fuel tank atevery engine oil change or every15,000 km, whichever occurs first. Itis available at your workshop.Fuels containing oxygenates such asethers and ethanol, as well asreformulated fuel, are available insome cities. If these fuels comply withthe previously describedspecification, then they areacceptable to use. However, E85(85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 15% ethanolmust be used only in FlexFuelvehicles.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Some fuels, mainly high octaneracing fuels, can contain an octaneenhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use fuels orfuel additives with MMT as they canreduce spark plug life and affectemission control systemperformance. The malfunctionindicator light Z may illuminate3 112. If this occurs, seek theassistance of a workshop.

Fuel for diesel enginesOnly use diesel fuel that complieswith EN 590 and which has a sulphurconcentration of max. 10 ppm.Fuels with a biodiesel (compliant withEN 14214) content of max. 7% byvolume may be used (e.g. namedB7).If travelling in countries outside theEuropean Union, occasional use ofEuro-Diesel fuel with a sulphurconcentration below 50 ppm ispossible.

Caution

Frequent usage of diesel fuelcontaining more than 15 ppmsulphur will cause severe enginedamage.

Caution

Use of fuel that does not comply toEN 590 or similar can lead toengine powerloss, increased wearor engine damage and may affectyour warranty.

Do not use marine diesel oils, heatingoils, Aquazole and similar diesel-water emulsions. Diesel fuels mustnot be diluted with fuels for petrolengines.

Low temperature operationAt temperatures below 0° C, somediesel products with biodiesel blendsmay clog, freeze or gel, which mayaffect the fuel supply system. Startingand engine operation may not work


properly. Make sure to fill wintergrade diesel fuel at ambienttemperatures below 0°C.Arctic grade diesel fuel can be usedin extreme cold temperatures below-20° C. Using this fuel grade in warmor hot climates is not recommendedand may cause engine stalling, poorstarting or damage on the fuelinjection system.

Fuel for natural gasoperationNatural gas is known as CNG(Compressed Natural Gas).Use natural gas with a methanecontent of approx. 78 - 99%. L-gas(low) has approx. 78 - 87% and H-gas(high) has approx. 87 - 99%. Biogaswith the same methane content canalso be used if it has been chemicallyprepared and desulphurised.Only use natural gas or biogas thatcomplies with DIN 51624.Liquid gas or LPG must not be used.

Fuel for liquid gas operationLiquid gas is known as LPG(Liquefied Petroleum Gas) or underits French name GPL (Gaz de PétroleLiquéfié). LPG is also known asAutogas.LPG consists mainly of propane andbutane. The octane rating is between105 and 115, depending on thebutane proportion. LPG is stored as aliquid at a pressure of approximatelyfive to ten bar.The boiling point depends on thepressure and the mixing ratio. Atambient pressure, it is between-42 °C (pure propane) and -0.5 °C(pure butane).

Caution

The system works at an ambienttemperature of approx. -8 °C to100 °C.

Full functioning of the LPG systemcan only be guaranteed with liquidgas which complies with the minimumrequirements of DIN EN 589.

Refuelling

9 Danger

Before refuelling, switch offignition and any external heaterswith combustion chambers.Switch off any mobile phones.Follow the operating and safetyinstructions of the filling stationwhen refuelling.


9 Danger

Fuel is flammable and explosive.No smoking. No naked flames orsparks.If you can smell fuel in yourvehicle, have the cause of thisremedied immediately by aworkshop.

Caution

In case of misfuelling, do notswitch on ignition.

Fuel filler flap is located at right rearside of the vehicle.

The fuel filler flap can only be openedif the vehicle is unlocked. Release thefuel filler flap by pushing the flap.

Petrol and Diesel refuellingTo open, turn the cap slowlyanticlockwise.

The fuel filler cap can be retained inthe bracket on the fuel filler flap.To refuel, fully insert the pump nozzleand switch it on.After the automatic cut-off, the tankcan be topped up by operating thepump nozzle a maximum of two moretimes.

Caution

Wipe off any overflowing fuelimmediately.

To close, turn the fuel filler capclockwise until it clicks.Close the flap and allow it to engage.


Vehicles with misfuel inhibitor

9 Warning

Do not try to open the flap of thefuel filler neck manually onvehicles with misfuel inhibitor.Disregarding this could lead totrapping of the fingers.

Vehicles with a selective catalyticreduction system are equipped with amisfuel inhibitor.

The misfuel inhibitor ensures that theflap of the fuel filler neck can only beopened by using a nozzle for dieselfuel or a funnel for emergencyrefilling.Turn the fuel filler cap slowlyanticlockwise.The cap can be retained in thebracket on the fuel filler flap.Place the nozzle in a straight line tothe filler neck and press with slightforce to insert.In case of an emergency, refill with acanister. A funnel must be used toopen the cap of the filler neck.

The funnel is located on the right-hand side storage compartment in theload compartment.Place the funnel in a straight line tothe filler neck and press with slightforce to insert.Use the funnel to fill the diesel fuel intothe filler neck.After topping-up, put the funnel intothe plastic bag and stow it in thestorage compartment.Selective catalytic reduction system3 207.

Natural gas refuelling


The fuel filler flap can only be openedif the vehicle is unlocked. Release thefuel filler flap by pushing the flap.

9 Warning

Refuel only with a maximumoutput pressure of 250 bar. Useonly temperature-compensatedfilling stations.

The refuelling procedure must becompleted, i.e. the filler neck must bevented.The capacity of the natural gas tankdepends on outside temperature,filling pressure and type of refuellingsystem. Capacities 3 318.Close the flap and allow it to engage.Terms for "natural gas vehicles"abroad:

German Erdgasfahrzeuge

English NGVs = Natural Gas Vehi‐cles

French Véhicules au gaz naturel -or - Véhicules GNV

Italian Metano auto

Terms for "natural gas" abroad:

German Erdgas

English CNG = CompressedNatural Gas

French GNV = Gaz Naturel (pour)Véhicules - or -CGN = carburantgaznaturel

Italian Metano (per auto)

Liquid gas refuellingFollow the operating and safetyinstructions of the filling station whenrefuelling.The filling valve for the liquid gas isbehind the fuel filler cap.

Unscrew protective cap from the fillerneck.

Screw the required adapter hand-tight onto the filler neck.


ACME Adapter: Screw the nut of thefilling nozzle onto the adapter. Presslocking lever on filler nozzle down.DISH filler neck: Place the filler nozzleinto the adapter. Press locking leveron filler nozzle down.Bayonet filler neck: Place filler nozzleon the adapter and turn clockwise oranticlockwise through one quarterturn. Pull locking lever of filler nozzlefully.EURO filler neck: Press the fillernozzle onto the adapter until itengages.

Press the button at the liquid gassupply point. The filling system stopsor begins to run slowly when 80% ofthe tank volume is reached(maximum fill level).Release button on filling system tostop the filling process. Release thelocking lever and remove the fillernozzle. A small quantity of liquid gasmay escape.Remove adapter and stow in vehicle.Fit protective cap to prevent thepenetration of foreign bodies into thefiller opening and the system.

9 Warning

Due to the system design, anescape of liquid gas afterreleasing the locking lever isunavoidable. Avoid inhaling.

9 Warning

The liquid gas tank should only befilled to 80% capacity, for safetyreasons.

The multivalve on the liquid gas tankautomatically limits the fill quantity. Ifa larger quantity is added, werecommend not exposing the vehicleto the sun until the excess amounthas been used up.

Filling adapterAs filling systems are notstandardised, different adapters arerequired which are available fromOpel Distributors and from OpelAuthorised Repairers.

ACME adapter: Belgium, Germany,Ireland, Luxembourg, Switzerland


Bayonet adapter: Netherlands,Norway, Spain, United Kingdom

EURO adapter: Spain

DISH adapter: Austria, Bosnia-Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia,Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia,France, Greece, Hungary, Italy,Latvia, Lithuania, Macedonia,Poland, Portugal, Romania, Serbia,Slovakia, Slovenia, Sweden,Switzerland, Turkey, Ukraine,

Fuel filler capOnly use genuine fuel filler caps.Diesel-engined vehicles have specialfuel filler caps.

Fuel consumption - CO2-EmissionsPetrol and Diesel enginesThe fuel consumption (combined) ofthe model Opel Zafira is within arange of 9.2 to 4.5 l/100 km.The CO2 emission (combined) iswithin a range of 182 to 119 g/km.For the values specific to yourvehicle, refer to the EEC Certificate ofConformity provided with your vehicleor other national registrationdocuments.

Natural gas enginesThe gas consumption (combined) ofthe model Opel Zafira is4.7 kg/100 km.The CO2 emission (combined) is129 g/km.For the values specific to yourvehicle, refer to the EEC Certificate ofConformity provided with your vehicleor other national registrationdocuments.


General informationThe official fuel consumption andspecific CO2 emission figures quotedrelate to the EU base model withstandard equipment.Fuel consumption data and CO2emission data are determinedaccording to regulationR (EC) No. 715/2007 (in the versionrespectively applicable), taking intoconsideration the vehicle weight inrunning order, as specified by theregulation.The figures are provided only for thepurpose of comparison betweendifferent vehicle variants and mustnot be taken as a guarantee for theactual fuel consumption of aparticular vehicle. Additionalequipment may result in slightlyhigher results than the statedconsumption and CO2 figures.Furthermore, fuel consumption isdependent on personal driving styleas well as road and traffic conditions.

Natural gasThe fuel consumption informationwas obtained using reference fuelG20 (methane proportion99 - 100 mol%) under prescribeddriving conditions. When usingnatural gas with a lower proportion ofmethane, the fuel consumption candiffer from the specified values.

Trailer hitchGeneral informationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen approved for your vehicle.Vehicles with natural gas enginesrequire special towing equipment.Entrust retrofitting of towingequipment to a workshop. It may benecessary to make changes thataffect the cooling system, heatshields or other equipment.The bulb outage detection function fortrailer brake light cannot detect apartial bulb outage. E.g. in case of4x 5 Watt bulbs, the function onlydetects lamp outage when only asingle 5 Watt lamp remains or noneremain.Fitting of towing equipment couldcover the opening of the towing eye.If this is the case use the coupling ballbar for towing. Always keep thecoupling ball bar in the vehicle.


Driving characteristics andtowing tipsBefore attaching a trailer, lubricatethe coupling ball. However, do not doso if a stabiliser, which acts on thecoupling ball, is being used to reducesnaking movements.For trailers with low driving stabilityand caravan trailers with a permittedgross vehicle weight of more than1300 kg the use of a stabiliser isstrongly recommended when drivingabove 80 km/h.If the trailer starts snaking, drive moreslowly, do not attempt to correct thesteering and brake sharply ifnecessary.When driving downhill, drive in thesame gear as if driving uphill anddrive at a similar speed.Adjust tyre pressure to the valuespecified for full load 3 320.

Trailer towingTrailer loadsThe permissible trailer loads arevehicle and engine-dependentmaximum values which must not beexceeded. The actual trailer load isthe difference between the actualgross weight of the trailer and theactual coupling socket load with thetrailer coupled.The permissible trailer loads arespecified in the vehicle documents. Ingeneral, they are valid for gradientsup to 12%.The permissible trailer load appliesup to the specified incline and at sealevel. Since engine power decreasesas altitude increases due to the airbecoming thinner, therefore reducingclimbing ability, the permissible grosstrain weight also decreases by 10%for every 1000 metres of altitude. Thegross train weight does not have to bereduced when driving on roads withslight inclines (less than 8%, e.g.motorways).

The permissible gross train weightmust not be exceeded. This weight isspecified on the identification plate3 308.

Vertical coupling loadThe vertical coupling load is the loadexerted by the trailer on the couplingball. It can be varied by changing theweight distribution when loading thetrailer.The maximum permissible verticalcoupling load (75 kg) is specified onthe towing equipment identificationplate and in the vehicle documents.NoteEngines B16DTH, B16DTJ,B20DTH and B20DTJ: Dependingon the equipment the maximumpermissible vertical coupling loadcan be 75 kg or 60 kg.

Always aim for the maximum load,especially in the case of heavytrailers. The vertical coupling loadshould never fall below 25 kg.


Rear axle loadWhen the trailer is coupled and thetowing vehicle fully loaded, thepermissible rear axle load (seeidentification plate or vehicledocuments) may be exceeded by60 kg, the gross vehicle weight ratingmay be exceeded by 60 kg. If thepermissible rear axle load isexceeded, a maximum speed of100 km/h applies.

Towing equipment

Caution

When operating without a trailer,remove the coupling ball bar.

Stowage of coupling ball bar

The coupling ball bar is stowed in thestowage compartment in the rightsidewall.

Fitting the coupling ball bar

Disengage and fold down the socket.Remove the sealing plug from theopening for the coupling ball bar andstow it.


Checking the tensioning of thecoupling ball bar

● Red marking on rotary knob mustpoint towards green marking oncoupling ball bar.

● The gap between the rotary knoband the coupling ball bar must beapprox. 6 mm.

● The key must be in position c.Otherwise, the coupling ball bar mustbe tensioned before being inserted:● Unlock coupling ball bar by

turning key to position c.

● Pull out rotary knob and turnclockwise as far as it will go.

Inserting the coupling ball bar

Insert the tensioned coupling ball barin the opening and push firmlyupwards until it audibly engages.The rotary handle snaps back into itsoriginal position, resting against thecoupling ball bar without a gap.

9 Warning

Do not touch rotary handle duringinsertion.

Lock the coupling ball bar by turningthe key to position e. Remove the keyand close the protective flap.

Eye for break-away stopping cable


Attach breakaway stopping cable toeye.

Check that the coupling ball bar iscorrectly installed● Green marking on rotary knob

must point towards greenmarking on coupling ball bar.

● There must be no gap betweenthe rotary handle and thecoupling ball bar.

● The coupling ball bar must befirmly engaged in the opening.

● The coupling ball bar must belocked and the key removed.

9 Warning

Towing a trailer is permitted onlywhen a coupling ball bar is fittedcorrectly. If the coupling ball bardoes not engage correctly, seekthe assistance of a workshop.

Dismounting the coupling ball bar

Open the protective flap and turn thekey to position c to unlock thecoupling ball bar.Pull out rotary handle and turnclockwise as far as it will go. Pull outcoupling ball bar downwards.Insert sealing plug in opening. Foldaway socket.

Trailer stability assistIf the system detects snakingmovements, engine power is reducedand the vehicle/trailer combination is

selectively braked until the snakingceases. While system is working keepsteering wheel as still as possible.Trailer stability assist (TSA) is afunction of the Electronic StabilityControl 3 218.

Vehicle care 259

Vehicle care

General Information ................... 260Accessories and vehiclemodifications .......................... 260

Vehicle storage ........................ 260End-of-life vehicle recovery ..... 261

Vehicle checks ........................... 261Performing work ...................... 261Bonnet ..................................... 261Engine oil ................................. 262Engine coolant ......................... 263Power steering fluid ................. 264Washer fluid ............................ 265Brakes ..................................... 265Brake fluid ............................... 265Vehicle battery ......................... 265Diesel fuel system bleeding ..... 267Wiper blade replacement ........ 267

Bulb replacement ....................... 268Halogen headlights .................. 268LED headlights ........................ 270Fog lights ................................. 270Tail lights ................................. 271Side turn signal lights .............. 274Number plate light ................... 274

Interior lights ............................ 275Instrument panel illumination ... 275

Electrical system ........................ 275Fuses ....................................... 275Engine compartment fuse box . 277Instrument panel fuse box ....... 279Load compartment fuse box .... 280

Vehicle tools .............................. 282Tools ........................................ 282

Wheels and tyres ....................... 282Winter tyres ............................. 282Tyre designations .................... 282Tyre pressure .......................... 283Tyre pressure monitoringsystem .................................... 284

Tread depth ............................. 287Changing tyre and wheel size . 288Wheel covers ........................... 288Tyre chains .............................. 288Tyre repair kit .......................... 288Wheel changing ....................... 291Spare wheel ............................ 294

Jump starting ............................. 297Towing ....................................... 298

Towing the vehicle ................... 298Towing another vehicle ........... 299

Appearance care ....................... 300Exterior care ............................ 300Interior care ............................. 302

260 Vehicle care

General InformationAccessories and vehiclemodificationsWe recommend the use of genuineparts and accessories and factoryapproved parts specific for yourvehicle type. We cannot assess orguarantee reliability of other products- even if they have a regulatory orotherwise granted approval.Any modification, conversion or otherchanges made to standard vehiclespecifications (including, withoutlimitation, software modifications,modifications of the electronic controlunits) may invalidate the warrantyoffered by Opel. Furthermore, suchchanges may affect driver assistancesystems, may impact fuelconsumption, CO2 emissions andother emissions of the vehicle andcause the vehicle to no longerconform to the operating permit,impacting the validity of your vehicleregistration.

Caution

When transporting the vehicle ona train or on a recovery vehicle, themud flaps might be damaged.

Vehicle storageStorage for a long period of timeIf the vehicle is to be stored for severalmonths:● Wash and wax the vehicle.● Have the wax in the engine

compartment and underbodychecked.

● Clean and preserve the rubberseals.

● Fill up fuel tank completely.● Change the engine oil.● Drain the washer fluid reservoir.● Check the coolant antifreeze and

corrosion protection.● Adjust tyre pressure to the value

specified for full load.

● Park the vehicle in a dry, wellventilated place. Engage first orreverse gear or set selector leverto P. Prevent the vehicle fromrolling.

● Do not apply the parking brake.● Open the bonnet, close all doors

and lock the vehicle.● Disconnect the clamp from the

negative terminal of the vehiclebattery. Beware that all systemsare not functional, e.g. anti-theftalarm system.

Putting back into operationWhen the vehicle is to be put back intooperation:● Connect the clamp to the

negative terminal of the vehiclebattery. Activate the electronicsof the power windows.

● Check tyre pressure.● Fill up the washer fluid reservoir.● Check the engine oil level.● Check the coolant level.

Vehicle care 261

● Since the durability of AdBlue islimited to two years, fluid shouldbe exchanged if it is too old. Seekthe assistance of a workshop.

● Fit the number plate if necessary.

End-of-life vehicle recoveryInformation on end-of-life vehiclerecovery centres and the recycling ofend-of-life vehicles is available on ourwebsite, where legally required. Onlyentrust this work to an authorisedrecycling centre.Gas vehicles must be recycled by aservice centre authorised for gasvehicles.

Vehicle checksPerforming work

9 Warning

Only perform engine compartmentchecks when the ignition is off.The cooling fan may startoperating even if the ignition is off.

9 Danger

The ignition system usesextremely high voltage. Do nottouch.

BonnetOpening

Pull the release lever and return it toits original position.

262 Vehicle care

Move the safety catch sideways to theleft vehicle side and open the bonnet.The bonnet is held openautomatically by a lifter.If the bonnet is opened during anAutostop, the engine will be restartedautomatically for safety reasons.

ClosingBefore closing the bonnet, press thesupport into the holder.Lower the bonnet and allow it to fallinto the latch from a low height(20-25 cm). Check that the bonnet isengaged.

Caution

Do not press the bonnet into thelatch, to avoid dents.

Engine oilCheck the engine oil level manuallyon a regular basis to prevent damageto the engine. Ensure that the correctspecification of oil is used.Recommended fluids and lubricants3 305.The maximum engine oilconsumption is 0.6 litres per1000 km.Check with the vehicle on a levelsurface. The engine must be atoperating temperature and switchedoff for at least five minutes.

Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean,reinsert it fully, pull out and read theengine oil level.Different dipsticks are useddepending on engine variant.

Vehicle care 263

When the engine oil level hasdropped to the MIN mark, top-upengine oil.

We recommend the use of the samegrade of engine oil that was used atlast change.The engine oil level must not exceedthe MAX mark on the dipstick.On some engines, a funnel is neededto top-up engine oil.

The funnel is located on the right sidestorage in the load compartment.Use the funnel to fill in the engine oilinto the engine oil opening.After topping-up, put the funnel intothe plastic bag and stow it in thestorage compartment.

Caution

Overfilled engine oil must bedrained or suctioned out.

Capacities 3 318.Fit the cap on straight and tighten it.

Engine coolantThe coolant provides freezeprotection down to approx. -28 °C. Incold regions with very lowtemperatures, the factory filledcoolant provides frost protectiondown to approx. -37 °C.

Caution

Only use approved antifreeze.

Coolant and antifreeze 3 305.

Coolant level

Caution

Too low a coolant level can causeengine damage.

264 Vehicle care

If the cooling system is cold, thecoolant level should be above thefilling line mark. Top-up if the level islow.

9 Warning

Allow the engine to cool beforeopening the cap. Carefully openthe cap, relieving the pressureslowly.

To top-up, use a 1:1 mixture ofapproved coolant concentrate mixedwith clean tap water. If no coolantconcentrate is available, use cleantap water. Install the cap tightly.

Engine B16DTH: After starting theengine, set the heating to warmesttemperature and the fan speed to atleast first level for approx. fiveminutes. This will ensure that the airwithin the cooling system escapes.Have the coolant concentrationchecked and have the cause of thecoolant loss remedied by a workshop.

Power steering fluid

Caution

Extremely small amounts ofcontamination can cause steeringsystem damage and cause it to notwork properly. Do not allowcontaminates to contact the fluidside of the reservoir cap/dipstick orfrom entering the reservoir.

Power steering fluid level normallydoes not have to be checked. If anunusual noise sounds during steeringor the power steering reactsunusually, seek the assistance of aworkshop.

Vehicle care 265

Washer fluid

Fill with clean water mixed with asuitable quantity of approvedwindscreen washer fluid whichcontains antifreeze.

Caution

Only washer fluid with a sufficientantifreeze concentration providesprotection at low temperatures ora sudden drop in temperature.

BrakesIn the event of minimum thickness ofthe brake lining, a squealing noisesounds during braking.Continued driving is possible buthave the brake lining replaced assoon as possible.Once new brake linings are installed,do not brake unnecessarily hard forthe first few journeys.

Brake fluid

9 Warning

Brake fluid is poisonous andcorrosive. Avoid contact with eyes,skin, fabrics and painted surfaces.

The brake fluid level must be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks.If fluid level is below MIN seek theassistance of a workshop.Brake and clutch fluid 3 305.

Vehicle batteryThe vehicle battery is maintenance-free, provided that the driving profileallows sufficient charging of thebattery. Short-distance-driving andfrequent engine starts can dischargethe battery. Avoid the use ofunnecessary electrical consumers.

266 Vehicle care

Batteries do not belong in householdwaste. They must be disposed of atan appropriate recycling collectionpoint.Laying up the vehicle for more thanfour weeks can lead to batterydischarge. Disconnect the clamp fromthe negative terminal of the vehiclebattery.Ensure the ignition is switched offbefore connecting or disconnectingthe vehicle battery.Vehicle battery discharge protection3 139.

Disconnecting the batteryIf the vehicle's battery is to bedisconnected (e.g. for maintenancework), the alarm siren must bedeactivated as follows: switch theignition on then off, then disconnectthe vehicle's battery within15 seconds.

Replacing the vehicle batteryNoteAny deviation from the instructionsgiven in this section may lead totemporary deactivation ordisturbance of the stop-start system.

When the vehicle battery is beingreplaced, please ensure that thereare no open ventilation holes in thevicinity of the positive terminal. If aventilation hole is open in this area, itmust be closed off with a dummy cap,and the ventilation in the vicinity of thenegative terminal must be opened.Only use vehicle batteries that allowthe fuse box to be mounted above thevehicle battery.Ensure that the battery is alwaysreplaced by the same type of battery.

We recommend that you have thevehicle battery replaced by aworkshop.Stop-start system 3 202.

Charging the vehicle battery

9 Warning

On vehicles with stop-startsystem, ensure that the chargingpotential does not exceed14.6 volts when using a batterycharger. Otherwise the vehiclebattery might be damaged.

Jump starting 3 297.

Vehicle care 267

Warning label

Meaning of symbols:● No sparks, naked flames or

smoking.● Always shield eyes. Explosive

gases can cause blindness orinjury.

● Keep the vehicle battery out ofreach of children.

● The vehicle battery containssulphuric acid which could causeblindness or serious burninjuries.

● See the Owner's Manual forfurther information.

● Explosive gas may be present inthe vicinity of the vehicle battery.

Diesel fuel system bleedingIf the tank has been run dry, the dieselfuel system must be bled. Switch onthe ignition three times for15 seconds at a time. Then crank theengine for a maximum of40 seconds. Repeat this process afterno less than five seconds. If theengine fails to start, seek theassistance of a workshop.

Wiper blade replacement

Lift the wiper arm until it stays in theraised position, press button todisengage the wiper blade andremove.Attach the wiper blade slightly angledto the wiper arm and push until itengages.Lower wiper arm carefully.

268 Vehicle care

Wiper blade on the rear window

Lift wiper arm. Disengage wiper bladeas shown in illustration and remove.Attach the wiper blade slightly angledto the wiper arm and push until itengages.Lower wiper arm carefully.

Bulb replacementSwitch off the ignition and switch offthe relevant switch or close the doors.Only hold a new bulb at the base. Donot touch the bulb glass with barehands.Use only the same bulb type forreplacement.Replace headlight bulbs from withinthe engine compartment.

Bulb checkAfter a bulb replacement switch onthe ignition, operate and check thelights.

Halogen headlightsHalogen headlights with separatebulbs for low beam and high beam.Sidelights and daytime running lightsare designed as LEDs and can not bechanged.

Low beam (1) outer bulb.High beam (2) inner bulb.Front turn signal light (3)

Vehicle care 269

Low beam (1)

1. Rotate cap anticlockwise andremove it.

2. Rotate the bulb holderanticlockwise to disengage.Withdraw the bulb holder from thereflector housing.

3. Remove the bulb from the plugconnector by pulling.

4. Replace the bulb and connect it tothe plug connector.

5. Insert the bulb holder, engagingthe lugs into the reflector housingand rotate clockwise to secure.

6. Fit the cap and rotate clockwise.

High beam (2)

1. Rotate cap anticlockwise andremove it.

270 Vehicle care

2. Withdraw the bulb holder from thereflector housing.

3. Remove the bulb from the plugconnector by pulling.

4. Replace the bulb and connect it tothe plug connector.

5. Insert and push the bulb holderinto the reflector housing bysetting the lug into position.

6. Fit the cap and rotate clockwise.

Front turn signal (3)

1. Rotate bulb socket anticlockwiseto disengage. Withdraw the bulbsocket from the reflector housing.

2. Remove the bulb from the socketby turning anticlockwise andpulling.

3. Replace and insert new bulb intosocket and turn clockwise.

4. Insert the bulb socket into thereflector housing and turnclockwise.

LED headlightsHeadlights for low and high beam,sidelights, daytime running lights andturn signal lights are designed asLEDs and can not be changed.Have lights repaired by a workshop incase of failure.

Fog lightsThe bulbs are accessible frombeneath the vehicle.

Vehicle care 271

1. Remove the outer screws of thecover, as shown in the illustration.

2. Hinge away the cover.Turn the bulb socketanticlockwise and remove it fromthe reflector housing.

3. Disengage the bulb socket fromthe plug connector by pressingthe retaining lug.

4. Remove and replace the bulbsocket with bulb and attach to theplug connector.

5. Insert the bulb socket into thereflector housing, turn clockwiseand engage.

6. Mount the cover with the screws.

Tail lights

1. Hinge out the screw cover.

2. Remove the screws, marked bythe arrows.

272 Vehicle care

3. Carefully withdraw the lightassembly from the retaining pinsand remove.

4. Detach the plug connector fromthe light assembly.

5. Remove and replace the bulb byturning the bulb socket.Turn signal light (1)Tail lights (2)Brake light (3)

Tail lights with Light EmittingDiode (LED) for tail and brake lightOnly the turn signal light (1) canbe replaced.Remove and replace the bulb byturning the bulb socket.

6. Connect the plug connector to thelight assembly.

7. Fit light assembly onto retainingpins and mount the light assemblyusing the screws.

8. Plug in screw cover.

Reverse lights (4) in the tailgate

1. Open the tailgate and remove thecover.

Vehicle care 273

2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwiseand remove it from the reflector.

3. Remove the bulb from the socketby pulling.

4. Replace and insert new bulb intosocket.

5. Insert the bulb socket into thereflector and turn clockwise.

6. Install the cover.

Rear fog lightThe bulbs are accessible frombeneath the vehicle.

1. Turn the bulb socketanticlockwise and remove it fromthe reflector.

2. Remove the bulb from the socketby turning anticlockwise.

3. Replace and insert new bulb intothe socket by turning clockwise.

4. Insert the bulb socket into thereflector, turn clockwise andengage.

Bulb checkSwitch on the ignition, operate andcheck all lights.

274 Vehicle care

Side turn signal lightsTo replace bulb, remove lamphousing:

1. Slide lamp to its left side andremove with its right end.

2. Turn bulb holder anticlockwiseand remove from housing.

3. Pull bulb from bulb holder andreplace it.

4. Insert bulb holder and turnclockwise.

5. Insert left end of the lamp, slide tothe left and insert right end.

Number plate light

1. Insert screwdriver in recess of thecover, press to the side andrelease spring. Remove cover.

Vehicle care 275

2. Remove the bulb from the socketby pulling.

3. Replace the bulb and insert it intothe socket.

4. Push the cover into the housing.

Interior lightsCourtesy lights, reading lightsHave bulbs replaced by a workshop.

Load compartment lightHave bulbs replaced by a workshop.

Instrument panelilluminationHave bulbs replaced by a workshop.

Electrical systemFusesData on the replacement fuse mustmatch the data on the defective fuse.There are three fuse boxes in thevehicle:● in the front left of the engine

compartment● in left-hand drive vehicles, in the

interior behind the storagecompartment, or, in right-handdrive vehicles, behind theglovebox

● behind a cover on the left side ofthe load compartment

Before replacing a fuse, turn off therespective switch and the ignition.

276 Vehicle care

There are different kinds of fuses inthe vehicle.

Depending on the type of fuse, ablown fuse can be recognized by itsmelted wire. Do not replace the fuseuntil the cause of the fault has beenremedied.Some functions are protected byseveral fuses.Fuses may also be inserted withoutexistence of a function.

Fuse extractorA fuse extractor may be located in thefuse box in the engine compartment. Place the fuse extractor on the

various types of fuse from the top orside, and withdraw fuse.

Vehicle care 277

Engine compartment fusebox

The fuse box is in the front left of theengine compartment.Disengage the cover and fold itupwards until it stops. Remove thecover vertically upwards.

No. Circuit

1 Engine control module

2 Lambda sensor

3 Fuel injection/Ignition system

4 Fuel injection/Ignition system

5 –

6 Exterior mirror heating/Anti-theft alarm system

7 Fan control/Engine controlmodule/Transmission controlmodule

8 Lambda sensor/Engine cooling

9 Rear window sensor

10 Battery sensor

11 Tailgate release

12 Adaptive forward lighting/Auto‐matic light control

13 ABS

14 Rear window wiper

15 Engine control module

278 Vehicle care

No. Circuit

16 Starter

17 Transmission control module

18 Heated rear window

19 Front power windows

20 Rear power windows

21 Rear electrical centre

22 Left high beam (Halogen)

23 –

24 Right headlight (LED)

25 Left headlight (LED)

26 Front fog lights

27 Diesel fuel heating

28 Stop-start system

29 Electric parking brake

30 ABS

31 Adaptive cruise control

32 Airbag

No. Circuit

33 Adaptive forward lighting/Auto‐matic light control

34 Exhaust gas recirculation

35 Exterior mirror/Rain sensor

36 Climate control

37 Canister vent solenoid

38 Vacuum pump

39 Central control module

40 Windscreen washer/Rearwindow washer system

41 Right high beam (Halogen)

42 Radiator fan

43 Windscreen wiper

44 Windscreen wiper

45 Radiator fan

46 –

47 Horn

48 Radiator fan

No. Circuit

49 Fuel pump

50 Headlamp levelling/Adaptiveforward lighting

51 Air shutter

52 Auxiliary heater/Diesel engine

53 Transmission control module/Engine control module

54 Vacuum pump/Instrumentpanel cluster/Heating ventila‐tion/Air conditioning system

After having changed defective fuses,close the fuse box cover and pressuntil it engages.If the fuse box cover is not closedcorrectly, malfunctions may occur.

Vehicle care 279

Instrument panel fuse box

In left-hand drive vehicles, the fusebox is behind the storagecompartment in the instrument panel.Open the compartment and push it tothe left to unlock. Fold thecompartment down and remove it.

In right-hand drive vehicles, the fusebox is located behind a cover in theglovebox. Open the glovebox, thenopen the cover and fold it down.

No. Circuit

1 Cruise control/Speed limiter/Adaptive cruise control/Steeringwheel controls

2 Exterior lights/Body controlmodule

3 Exterior lights/Body controlmodule


5 Infotainment system/Instrument

6 Power outlet/Cigarette lighter

7 Power outlet

8 Left low beam/Body controlmodule

9 Right low beam/Body controlmodule/Airbag module

10 Door locks/Body control module

11 Interior fan

12 –

13 –

280 Vehicle care

No. Circuit

14 Diagnostic connector

15 Airbag

16 Power outlet

17 Air conditioning system

18 Logistics

19 Body control module


21 Instrument panel cluster/Anti-theft alarm system

22 Ignition sensor



25 –

26 –

Load compartment fuse boxThe fuse box is on the left side of theload compartment behind a cover.

Remove the cover.

If equipped with tyre repair kit,remove the complete box.

Fuse assignments

Vehicle care 281

No. Circuit

1 –

2 Trailer outlet

3 Parking assist

4 Selective catalytic reductionsystem

5 –

6 –

7 Power seat

8 –


10 Nitrogen oxide sensor

11 Trailer module/Trailer socket

12 Trailer module

13 Trailer outlet

14 –

15 –

No. Circuit

16 Interior mirror/Rear viewcamera

17 Power outlet

18 –

19 Steering wheel heating

20 Sunblind

21 Heated front seats

22 –

23 –


25 –

26 –

27 –

28 –

29 –

30 –

No. Circuit

31 –

32 Active damping system/Lanedeparture warning

282 Vehicle care

Vehicle toolsTools

Some tools, the towing eye and (onlyon vehicles with spare wheel) thevehicle jacking equipment are placedin the rear storage in the loadcompartment floor.Open the cover in front of the tailgate.

Wheels and tyres

Tyre condition, wheel conditionDrive over edges slowly and at rightangles if possible. Driving over sharpedges can cause tyre and wheeldamage. Do not trap tyres on the kerbwhen parking.Regularly check the wheels fordamage. Seek the assistance of aworkshop in the event of damage orunusual wear.

Winter tyresWinter tyres improve driving safety attemperatures below 7 °C and shouldtherefore be fitted on all wheels.All tyre sizes are permitted as wintertyres 3 320.In accordance with country-specificregulations, affix the speed sticker inthe driver's field of view.

Tyre designationsE.g. 215/60 R 16 95 H215 : tyre width, mm60 : cross-section ratio (tyre height

to tyre width), %R : belt type: RadialRF : type: RunFlat16 : wheel diameter, inches95 : load index e.g. 95 is equivalent

to 690 kgH : speed code letter

Speed code letter:Q : up to 160 km/hS : up to 180 km/hT : up to 190 km/hH : up to 210 km/hV : up to 240 km/hW : up to 270 km/h

Choose a tyre appropriate for themaximum speed of your vehicle.The maximum speed is achievable atkerb weight with driver (75 kg) plus125 kg payload. Optional equipmentcould reduce the maximum speed ofthe vehicle.Performance 3 315.

Vehicle care 283

Directional tyresFit directional tyres such that they rollin the direction of travel. The rollingdirection is indicated by a symbol(e.g. an arrow) on the sidewall.

Tyre pressureCheck the pressure of cold tyres atleast every 14 days and before anylong journey. Do not forget the sparewheel. This also applies to vehicleswith tyre pressure monitoring system.

Tyre pressure 3 320.

The tyre pressure information labelon the front left or right door frameindicates the original equipment tyresand the correspondent tyrepressures.The tyre pressure data refers to coldtyres. It applies to summer and wintertyres.Always inflate the spare tyre to thepressure specified for full load.The ECO tyre pressure serves toachieve the smallest amount of fuelconsumption possible.Incorrect tyre pressures will impairsafety, vehicle handling, comfort andfuel economy and will increase tyrewear.Tyre pressures differ depending onvarious options. For the correct tyrepressure value, follow the procedurebelow:1. Identify the engine identifier code.

Engine data 3 313.2. Identify the respective tyre.

The tyre pressure tables show allpossible tyre combinations 3 320.

For the tyres approved for yourvehicle, refer to the EEC Certificate ofConformity provided with your vehicleor other national registrationdocuments.The driver is responsible for correctadjustment of tyre pressure.

9 Warning

If the pressure is too low, this canresult in considerable tyre warm-up and internal damage, leading totread separation and even to tyreblow-out at high speeds.

9 Warning

For specific tyres therecommended tyre pressure asshown in the tyre pressure tablemay exceed the maximum tyrepressure as indicated on the tyre.Never exceed the maximum tyrepressure as indicated on the tyre.

If the tyre pressure must be reducedor increased on a vehicle with tyrepressure monitoring system, switch

284 Vehicle care

off ignition. After adjusting tyrepressure, switch on ignition andselect the appropriate setting on thepage Tyre load in the DriverInformation Centre, 3 117.

Temperature dependencyThe tyre pressure depends on thetemperature of the tyre. Duringdriving, tyre temperature andpressure increase. Tyre pressurevalues provided on the tyreinformation label and tyre pressurechart are valid for cold tyres, whichmeans at 20 °C.The pressure increases by nearly10 kPa for a 10 °C temperatureincrease. This must be consideredwhen warm tyres are checked.The tyre pressure value displayed inthe Driver Information Centre showsthe real tyre pressure. A cooled downtyre will show a decreased value,which does not indicate an air leak.

Tyre pressure monitoringsystemThe tyre pressure monitoring systemchecks the pressure of all four tyresonce a minute when vehicle speedexceeds a certain limit.

Caution

Tyre pressure monitoring systemwarns only about low tyre pressurecondition and does not replaceregular tyre maintenance by thedriver.

All wheels must be equipped withpressure sensors and the tyres musthave the prescribed pressure.NoteIn countries where the tyre pressuremonitoring system is legallyrequired, the use of wheels withoutpressure sensors will invalidate thevehicle operating permit.

The current tyre pressures can beshown in the Driver InformationCentre.

Select the menu by the buttons on theturn signal lever.

Select Tyre pressure page underVehicle Information Menu ?3 117.

Vehicle care 285

System status and pressure warningsare displayed by a messageindicating the corresponding tyre inthe Driver Information Centre.The system considers the tyretemperature for the warnings.

A detected low tyre pressurecondition is indicated by controlindicator w 3 115.If w illuminates, stop as soon aspossible and inflate the tyres asrecommended 3 320.If w flashes for 60-90 seconds andthen illuminates continuously, there isa fault in the system. Consult aworkshop.After inflating, some driving may berequired to update the tyre pressurevalues in the Driver InformationCentre. During this time w mayilluminate.

If w illuminates at lower temperaturesand extinguishes after some driving,this could be an indicator forapproaching a low tyre pressurecondition. Check tyre pressure.Vehicle messages 3 122.If the tyre pressure must be reducedor increased, switch off ignition.Only mount wheels with pressuresensors, otherwise the tyre pressurewill not be displayed and willuminates continuously.A temporary spare wheel is notequipped with pressure sensors. Thetyre pressure monitoring system isnot operational for these wheels.Control indicator w illuminates. Forthe further three wheels the systemremains operational.The use of commercially availableliquid tyre repair kits can impair thefunction of the system. Factory-approved repair kits can be used.Operating electronic devices or beingclose to facilities using similar wavefrequencies could disrupt the tyrepressure monitoring system.

Each time the tyres are replaced, tyrepressure monitoring system sensorsmust be dismounted and serviced.For the screwed sensor: replacevalve core and sealing ring. Forclipped sensor: replace completevalve stem.

Vehicle loading statusAdjust tyre pressure to load conditionaccording to the tyre information labelor tyre pressure chart 3 320, andselect the appropriate setting in theTyre load menu in the DriverInformation Centre 3 117. Thissetting is the reference for the tyrepressure warnings.The Tyre load menu only appears ifthe vehicle is at a standstill and theparking brake is applied. On vehicleswith automatic transmission theselector lever has to be in P.

286 Vehicle care

Select Tyre load page under VehicleInformation Menu ? in the DriverInformation Centre 3 117.Select:● Light for comfort pressure up to

3 people.● Eco for Eco pressure up to

3 people.● Max for full load.

Tyre pressure sensor matchingprocessEach tyre pressure sensor has aunique identification code. Theidentification code must be matchedto a new wheel position after rotating

the wheels or exchanging thecomplete wheel set and if one or moretyre pressure sensors were replaced.The tyre pressure sensor matchingprocess should also be performedafter replacing a spare wheel with aroad wheel containing the tyrepressure sensor.The malfunction light w and thewarning message or code shouldextinguish at the next ignition cycle.The sensors are matched to thewheel positions, using a relearn tool,in the following order: left side frontwheel, right side front wheel, rightside rear wheel and left side rearwheel. The turn signal light at thecurrent active position is illuminateduntil sensor is matched.Consult your workshop for service.There are two minutes to match thefirst wheel position, and five minutesoverall to match all four wheelpositions. If it takes longer, thematching process stops and must berestarted.The tyre pressure sensor matchingprocess is:1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition on.3. On vehicles with automatic

transmission: set the selectorlever to P.On vehicles with manualtransmission: select neutral.

4. Press MENU on the turn signallever to select the VehicleInformation Menu ? in theDriver Information Centre.

5. Turn the adjuster wheel to scroll tothe tyre pressure menu.

Vehicle care 287

6. Press SET/CLR to begin thesensor matching process. Amessage requesting acceptanceof the process should bedisplayed.

7. Press SET/CLR again to confirmthe selection. The horn soundstwice to indicate the receiver is inrelearn mode.

8. Start with the left side front wheel.9. Place the relearn tool against the

tyre sidewall, near the valve stem.Then press the button to activatethe tyre pressure sensor. A hornchirp confirms that the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to this wheel position.

10. Proceed to the right side frontwheel, and repeat the procedurein Step 9.

11. Proceed to the right side rearwheel, and repeat the procedurein Step 9.

12. Proceed to the left side rearwheel, and repeat the procedurein Step 9. The horn sounds twiceto indicate the sensoridentification code has been

matched to the left side rear tyre,and the tyre pressure sensormatching process is no longeractive.

13. Turn off the ignition.14. Set all four tyres to the

recommended air pressure levelas indicated on the tyre pressureinformation label.

15. Ensure the tyre loading status isset according to the selectedpressure 3 117.

Tread depthCheck tread depth at regularintervals.Tyres should be replaced for safetyreasons at a tread depth of 2-3 mm(4 mm for winter tyres).For safety reasons, it isrecommended that the tread depth ofthe tyres on one axle should not varyby more than 2 mm.

The legally permissible minimumtread depth (1.6 mm) has beenreached when the tread has worndown as far as one of the tread wearindicators (TWI). Their position isindicated by markings on thesidewall.If there is more wear at the front thanthe rear, swap round front wheels andrear wheels periodically. Ensure thatthe direction of rotation of the wheelsremains the same.Tyres age, even if they are not used.We recommend tyre replacementevery 6 years.

288 Vehicle care

Changing tyre and wheelsizeIf tyres of a different size than thosefitted at the factory are used, it may benecessary to reprogramme thespeedometer as well as the nominaltyre pressure and make other vehiclemodifications.After converting to a different tyresize, have the label with tyrepressures replaced.3 284

9 Warning

The use of unsuitable tyres orwheels may lead to accidents andwill invalidate the vehicleoperating permit.

Wheel coversWheel covers and tyres that arefactory approved for the respectivevehicle and comply with all of therelevant wheel and tyre combinationrequirements must be used.If the wheel covers and tyres used arenot factory approved, the tyres mustnot have a rim protection ridge.

Wheel covers must not impair brakecooling.

9 Warning

Use of unsuitable tyres or wheelcovers could lead to suddenpressure loss and therebyaccidents.

Vehicles with steel wheels: Whenusing locking wheel nuts, do notattach wheel covers.

Tyre chains

Tyre chains are only permitted on thefront wheels.Always use fine mesh chains that addno more than 10 mm to the tyre treadand the inboard sides (including chainlock).

9 Warning

Damage may lead to tyre blowout.

Tyre chains are only permitted ontyres of size 215/60 R16 and225/50 R17.The use of tyre chains is not permittedon the temporary spare wheel.

Tyre repair kitMinor damage to the tyre tread can berepaired with the tyre repair kit.Do not remove foreign bodies fromthe tyres.Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or thatis at the tyre's sidewall cannot berepaired with the tyre repair kit.

Vehicle care 289

9 Warning

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h.Do not use for a lengthy period.Steering and handling may beaffected.

If you have a flat tyre:Apply the parking brake and engagefirst gear, reverse gear or P.

The tyre repair kit is on the left side inthe load compartment behind a cover.1. Take the tyre repair kit from the

compartment.2. Remove the compressor.

3. Remove the electrical connectioncable and air hose from thestowage compartments on theunderside of the compressor.

4. Screw the compressor air hose tothe connection on the sealantbottle.

5. Fit the sealant bottle into theretainer on the compressor.Set the compressor near the tyrein such a way that the sealantbottle is upright.

6. Unscrew valve cap from defectivetyre.

7. Screw the filler hose to the tyrevalve.

8. The switch on the compressormust be set to J.

290 Vehicle care

9. Connect the compressor plug tothe power outlet or cigarettelighter socket.To avoid discharging the battery,we recommend running theengine.

10. Set the rocker switch on thecompressor to I. The tyre is filledwith sealant.

11. The compressor pressure gaugebriefly indicates up to six barwhilst the sealant bottle isemptying (approx. 30 seconds).Then the pressure starts to drop.

12. All of the sealant is pumped intothe tyre. Then the tyre is inflated.

13. The prescribed tyre pressureshould be obtained within tenminutes. Tyre pressure 3 320.When the correct pressure isobtained, switch off thecompressor.

If the prescribed tyre pressure isnot obtained within ten minutes,remove the tyre repair kit. Movethe vehicle one tyre rotation.Reattach the tyre repair kit andcontinue the filling procedure forten minutes. If the prescribed tyrepressure is still not obtained, thetyre is too badly damaged. Seekthe assistance of a workshop.

Drain excess tyre pressure withthe button over the pressureindicator.Do not run the compressor longerthan ten minutes.

14. Detach the tyre repair kit. Pushcatch on bracket to removesealant bottle from bracket. Screwthe tyre inflation hose to the freeconnection of the sealant bottle.This prevents sealant fromescaping. Stow tyre repair kit inload compartment.

15. Remove any excess sealantusing a cloth.

16. Take the label indicatingmaximum permitted speed fromthe sealant bottle and affix in thedriver's field of view.

17. Continue driving immediately sothat sealant is evenly distributedin the tyre. After driving approx.10 km (but no more than tenminutes), stop and check tyrepressure. Screw compressor airhose directly onto tyre valve andcompressor when doing this.

Vehicle care 291

If tyre pressure is more than1.3 bar, set it to the correct value.Repeat the procedure until thereis no more loss of pressure.If the tyre pressure has fallenbelow 1.3 bar, the vehicle mustnot be used. Seek the assistanceof a workshop.

18. Stow away tyre repair kit in loadcompartment.

NoteThe driving characteristics of therepaired tyre are severely affected,therefore have this tyre replaced.

If unusual noise is heard or thecompressor becomes hot, turncompressor off for at least30 minutes.The built-in safety valve opens at apressure of seven bar.Note the expiry date of the kit. Afterthis date its sealing capability is nolonger guaranteed. Pay attention tostorage information on sealantbottle.Replace the used sealant bottle.Dispose of the bottle as prescribedby applicable laws.The compressor and sealant can beused from approx. -30 °C.The adapters supplied can be usedto pump up other items e.g.footballs, air mattresses, inflatabledinghies etc. They are located on theunderside of the compressor. Toremove, screw on compressor airhose and withdraw adapter.

Wheel changingSome vehicles are equipped with atyre repair kit instead of a spare wheel3 288.

Make the following preparations andobserve the following information:● Park the vehicle on a level, firm

and non-skid surface. The frontwheels must be in the straight-ahead position.

● Apply the parking brake andengage first gear, reverse gear orP.

● Remove the spare wheel 3 294.● Never change more than one

wheel at once.● Use the jack only to change

wheels in case of puncture, notfor seasonal winter or summertyre change.

● The jack is maintenance-free.● If the ground on which the vehicle

is standing is soft, a solid board(max. 1 cm thick) should beplaced under the jack.

● Take heavy objects out of thevehicle before jacking up.

● No people or animals may be inthe vehicle when it is jacked-up.

● Never crawl under a jacked-upvehicle.

292 Vehicle care

● Do not start the vehicle when it israised on the jack.

● Clean wheel nuts and thread witha clean cloth before mounting thewheel.

9 Warning

Do not grease wheel bolt, wheelnut and wheel nut cone.

1. Disengage wheel nut caps with ascrewdriver and remove. For alloywheels, place a soft clothunderneath the screwdriver. Pulloff the wheel cover. Vehicle tools3 282.

2. Fold out the wheel wrench andinstall ensuring that it locatessecurely and loosen each wheelnut by half a turn.The wheels might be protected bylocking wheel nuts. To loosenthese specific nuts first attach theadapter onto the head of the nutbefore installing the wheelwrench. The adapter is located inthe glovebox.

3. Some versions may have coveredthe vehicle jacking point. Pull outthe cover sideways.

4. Ensure the jack is correctlypositioned under the relevantvehicle jacking point.

5. Set the jack to the necessaryheight. Position it directly below

Vehicle care 293

the jacking point in a manner thatprevents it from slipping.

Attach wheel wrench and with thejack correctly aligned rotate wheelwrench until wheel is clear of theground.

6. Unscrew the wheel nuts.7. Change the wheel. Spare wheel

3 2948. Screw on the wheel nuts.9. Lower the vehicle and remove

jack.

10. Install the wheel wrench ensuringthat it is located securely andtighten each nut in a crosswisesequence. Tightening torque is140 Nm.

11. Align the valve hole in the wheelcover with the tyre valve beforeinstalling.Install wheel nut caps.

12. Install vehicle jacking point cover.13. Stow the replaced wheel 3 294,

the vehicle tools 3 282 and theadapter for the locking wheel nuts3 66.

14. Check the tyre pressure of theinstalled tyre and the wheel nuttorque as soon as possible.

Have the defective tyre renewed orrepaired as soon as possible.

Jacking position for lifting platform

Rear arm position of the liftingplatform centrically under the recessof the sill.

294 Vehicle care

Front arm position of the liftingplatform at the underbody.

Spare wheelIf mounting a spare wheel which isdifferent from the other wheels, thiswheel might be classified as atemporary spare wheel and thecorresponding speed limits apply,even though no label indicates this.Seek the assistance of a workshop tocheck the applicable speed limit.The spare wheel has a steel rim.

Caution

The use of a spare wheel that issmaller than the other wheels or incombination with winter tyrescould affect driveability. Have thedefective tyre replaced as soon aspossible.

The spare wheel is located in a holderbeneath the vehicle floor.1. Open the storage in the load

compartment 3 282.

2. Remove both caps above thehexagon bolts.

3. Fit the wheel wrench on onehexagon bolt and turn itanticlockwise until a resistance isnoticeable.

4. Proceed with the other hexagonbolt in the same way.

5. Lift the spare wheel holder andunhook both catches.

6. Lower the spare wheel holder.

7. Detach the safety cable.

Vehicle care 295

8. Lower holder all the way andremove spare wheel.

9. Change the wheel.The damaged wheel must besecured in the load compartment,see below.

10. Lift the empty spare wheel holderand insert the safety cable.

11. Lift the spare wheel holder furtherand engage in both catches. Theopen sides of the catches mustpoint in the direction of travel.

12. Close the empty spare wheelholder by turning both hexagonbolts clockwise using the wheelwrench.

13. Fit the caps above both hexagonbolts.

14. Stow wheel wrench and the jackin the storage in front of thetailgate.

15. Close the storage compartmentcover.

When stowing the spare wheel in thespare wheel holder, note that thewheel is positioned with the tyre valveabove the recess of the wheel holder.

Stowing a damaged full sizewheel in the load compartmentThe spare wheel holder is notdesigned for other tyre sizes than thespare wheel.A damaged wheel wider than thespare wheel must be stowed in theload compartment and secured with astrap. Vehicle tools 3 282.The seats of the third row must befolded down 3 79.1. Position the wheel close to the left

sidewall of the load compartment.

2. Place the loop end of the strapthrough the front lashing eye onthe left side.

3. Place the hook end of the strapthrough the loop and pull it untilthe strap is fastened securely tothe lashing eye.

296 Vehicle care

4. Insert the strap through thespokes of the wheel as shown inthe illustration.

5. Mount the hook to the rear leftlashing eye.

6. Tighten the strap and secure itusing the buckle.

9 Danger

Always drive with folded up andengaged rear seat backrests whenstowing a damaged full size wheelin the load compartment.

9 Warning

Storing a jack, a wheel or otherequipment in the loadcompartment could cause injury ifthey are not fixed properly. Duringa sudden stop or a collision, looseequipment could strike someone.Always store jack and tools in therespective storage compartmentsand secure them by fixing.Damaged wheel placed in the loadcompartment must always besecured with the strap.

Temporary spare wheel

Caution

The use of a spare wheel that issmaller than the other wheels or incombination with winter tyrescould affect driveability. Have thedefective tyre replaced as soon aspossible.

Only mount one temporary sparewheel. Do not drive faster than80 km/h. Take curves slowly. Do notuse for a long period of time.If your vehicle gets a flat tyre on therear while towing another vehicle,mount the temporary spare wheel atthe front and the full tyre at the rear.Tyre chains 3 288.

Spare wheel with directional tyreIf possible, fit directional tyres suchthat they roll in the direction of travel.The rolling direction is indicated by asymbol (e.g. an arrow) on thesidewall.The following applies to tyres fittedopposing the rolling direction:● Driveability may be affected.

Have the defective tyre renewedor repaired as soon as possibleand fit it instead of the sparewheel.

● Drive particularly carefully on wetand snow-covered roadsurfaces.

Vehicle care 297

Jump startingDo not start with quick charger.A vehicle with a discharged batterycan be started using jump leads andthe battery of another vehicle.Do not start with quick charger.

9 Warning

Be extremely careful when startingwith jump leads. Any deviationfrom the following instructions canlead to injuries or damage causedby battery explosion or damage tothe electrical systems of bothvehicles.

9 Warning

Avoid contact of the battery witheyes, skin, fabrics and paintedsurfaces. The fluid containssulphuric acid which can causeinjuries and damage in the eventof direct contact.

● Never expose the vehicle batteryto naked flames or sparks.

● A discharged vehicle battery canalready freeze at a temperatureof 0 °C. Defrost the frozen vehiclebattery before connecting jumpleads.

● Wear eye protection andprotective clothing whenhandling a battery.

● Use a booster vehicle batterywith the same voltage (12 Volt).Its capacity (Ah) must not bemuch less than that of thedischarged vehicle battery.

● Use jump leads with insulatedterminals and a cross section ofat least 16 mm2 (25 mm2 fordiesel engines).

● Do not disconnect the dischargedvehicle battery from the vehicle.

● Switch off all unnecessaryelectrical consumers.

● Do not lean over the batteryduring jump starting.

● Do not allow the terminals of onelead to touch those of the otherlead.

● The vehicles must not come intocontact with each other duringthe jump starting process.

● Apply the parking brake,transmission in neutral,automatic transmission in P.

● Open the positive terminalprotection cap of your vehicle inthe engine compartment and ofthe booster vehicle battery.

298 Vehicle care

Lead connection order:1. Connect the red lead to the

positive terminal of the boosterbattery.

2. Connect the other end of the redlead to the positive terminal of thedischarged battery.

3. Connect the black lead to thenegative terminal of the boosterbattery.

4. Connect the other end of the blacklead to a vehicle grounding pointof your vehicle in the enginecompartment.

Route the leads so that they cannotcatch on rotating parts in the enginecompartment.To start the engine:1. Start the engine of the vehicle

providing the jump.2. After five minutes, start the other

engine. Start attempts should bemade for no longer than15 seconds at an interval of oneminute.

3. Allow both engines to idle forapprox. three minutes with theleads connected.

4. Switch on electrical consumers(e.g. headlights, heated rearwindow) of the vehicle receivingthe jump start.

5. Reverse above sequence exactlywhen removing leads.

TowingTowing the vehicle

Disengage cap at bottom and removedownwards.The towing eye is stowed with thevehicle tools 3 282.

Vehicle care 299

Screw in the towing eye as far as it willgo until it stops in a horizontalposition.Attach a tow rope – or better still a towrod – to the towing eye.The towing eye must only be used fortowing and not for recovering thevehicle.Switch on ignition to release steeringwheel lock and to permit operation ofbrake lights, horn and windscreenwiper.Switch the selector lever to neutral.Release the parking brake.

Caution

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily.Excessive tractive force candamage the vehicle.

When the engine is not running,considerably more force is needed tobrake and steer.To prevent the entry of exhaust gasesfrom the towing vehicle, switch on theair recirculation and close thewindows.Vehicles with automatic transmission:The vehicle must be towed facingforwards, not faster than 80 km/h norfurther than 100 km. In all other casesand when the transmission isdefective, the front axle must beraised off the ground.Seek the assistance of a workshop.After towing, unscrew the towing eye.Insert cap at the bottom and close.

Towing another vehicle

Insert a screwdriver in the slot at thelower edge of the cap. Release thecap by carefully moving thescrewdriver downwards. To preventdamage it is recommended to place acloth between the screwdriver andthe frame.The towing eye is stowed with thevehicle tools 3 282.

300 Vehicle care

Screw in the towing eye as far as it willgo until it stops in a horizontalposition.The lashing eye at the rearunderneath the vehicle must never beused as a towing eye.Attach a tow rope – or even better atow bar – to the towing eye.The towing eye must only be used fortowing and not for recovering avehicle.

Caution

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily.Excessive tractive force candamage the vehicle.

After towing, unscrew the towing eye.Insert cap at the bottom and engage.

Appearance careExterior careLocksThe locks are lubricated at the factoryusing a high quality lock cylindergrease. Use de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, as this has adegreasing effect and impairs lockfunction. After using a de-icing agent,have the locks regreased by aworkshop.

WashingThe paintwork of your vehicle isexposed to environmental influences.Wash and wax your vehicle regularly.When using automatic vehiclewashes, select a programme thatincludes waxing.Bird droppings, dead insects, resin,pollen and the like should be cleanedoff immediately, as they containaggressive constituents which cancause paint damage.

Vehicle care 301

If using a vehicle wash, comply withthe vehicle wash manufacturer'sinstructions. The windscreen wiperand rear window wiper must beswitched off. Remove antenna andexternal accessories such as roofracks etc.If you wash your vehicle by hand,make sure that the insides of thewheel housings are also thoroughlyrinsed out.Clean edges and folds on openeddoors and the bonnet as well as theareas they cover.Clean bright metal mouldings with acleaning solution approved foraluminium to avoid damages.

Caution

Always use a cleaning agent witha pH value of four to nine.Do not use cleaning agents on hotsurfaces.

Do not clean the engine compartmentwith a steam-jet or high-pressure jetcleaner.

Thoroughly rinse and leather-off thevehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Useseparate leathers for painted andglass surfaces: remnants of wax onthe windows will impair vision.Have the door hinges of all doorsgreased by a workshop.Do not use hard objects to removespots of tar. Use tar removal spray onpainted surfaces.

Exterior lightsHeadlight and other light covers aremade of plastic. Do not use anyabrasive or caustic agents, do not usean ice scraper, and do not clean themdry.

Polishing and waxingWax the vehicle regularly (at thelatest when water no longer beads).Otherwise, the paintwork will dry out.Polishing is necessary only if the painthas become dull or if solid depositshave become attached to it.Paintwork polish with silicone forms aprotective film, making waxingunnecessary.

Plastic body parts must not be treatedwith wax or polishing agents.

Windows and windscreen wiperbladesUse a soft lint-free cloth or chamoisleather together with window cleanerand insect remover.When cleaning the rear window frominside, always wipe in parallel to theheating element to prevent damage.For mechanical removal of ice, use asharp-edged ice scraper. Press thescraper firmly against the glass sothat no dirt can get under it andscratch the glass.Remove dirt residues from smearingwiper blades by using a soft cloth andwindow cleaner. Also make sure toremove any residues such as wax,insect residues and similar from thewindow.Ice residues, pollution and continuouswiping on dry windows will damage oreven destroy the wiper blades.

302 Vehicle care

Glass panelNever clean with solvents or abrasiveagents, fuels, aggressive media(e.g. paint cleaner, acetone-containing solutions etc.), acidic orhighly alkaline media or abrasivepads.

Wheels and tyresDo not use high-pressure jetcleaners.Clean rims with a pH-neutral wheelcleaner.Rims are painted and can be treatedwith the same agents as the body.

Paintwork damageRectify minor paintwork damage witha touch-up pen before rust forms.Have more extensive damage or rustareas repaired by a workshop.

UnderbodySome areas of the vehicle underbodyhave a PVC undercoating while othercritical areas have a durableprotective wax coating.

After the underbody is washed, checkthe underbody and have it waxed ifnecessary.Bitumen/rubber materials coulddamage the PVC coating. Haveunderbody work carried out by aworkshop.Before and after winter, wash theunderbody and have the protectivewax coating checked.

Liquid gas system

9 Danger

Liquid gas is heavier than air andcan collect in sink points.Take care when performing workat the underbody in a pit.

For painting work and when using adrying booth at a temperature above60 °C, the liquid gas tank must beremoved.Do not make any modifications to theliquid gas system.

Towing equipmentDo not clean the coupling ball bar witha steam-jet or high-pressure jetcleaner.

Rear carrier systemClean the rear carrier system with asteam-jet or high-pressure jet cleanerat least once a year.Operate the rear carrier systemperiodically if not in regular use, inparticular during winter.

Air shutterClean the shutter system in the frontbumper to maintain correctfunctionality.

Interior careInterior and upholsteryOnly clean the vehicle interior,including the instrument panel fasciaand panelling, with a dry cloth orinterior cleaner.

Vehicle care 303

Clean the leather upholstery withclear water and a soft cloth. In case ofheavy soiling, use leather care.The instrument cluster and thedisplays should only be cleaned usinga soft damp cloth. If necessary use aweak soap solution.Clean fabric upholstery with avacuum cleaner and brush. Removestains with an upholstery cleaner.Clothing fabrics may not becolourfast. This could cause visiblediscolourations, especially on light-coloured upholstery. Removablestains and discolourations should becleaned as soon as possible.Clean seat belts with lukewarm wateror interior cleaner.

Caution

Close Velcro fasteners as openVelcro fasteners on clothing coulddamage seat upholstery.The same applies to clothing withsharp-edged objects, like zips orbelts or studded jeans.

Plastic and rubber partsPlastic and rubber parts can becleaned with the same cleaner asused to clean the body. Use interiorcleaner if necessary. Do not use anyother agent. Avoid solvents and petrolin particular. Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.

304 Service and maintenance

Service andmaintenance

General information ................... 304Service information .................. 304

Recommended fluids, lubricantsand parts .................................... 305

Recommended fluids andlubricants ................................ 305

General informationService informationIn order to ensure economical andsafe vehicle operation and tomaintain the value of your vehicle, itis of vital importance that allmaintenance work is carried out at theproper intervals as specified.The detailed, up-to-date serviceschedule for your vehicle is availableat the workshop.Service display 3 107.

European service intervalsMaintenance of your vehicle isrequired every 30,000 km or after1 year, whichever occurs first, unlessotherwise indicated in the servicedisplay.A shorter service interval can be validfor severe driving behaviour, e.g. fortaxis and police vehicles.The European service intervals arevalid for the following countries:

Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bosnia-Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia,Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark,Estonia, Finland, France, Germany,Greece, Greenland, Hungary,Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia,Liechtenstein, Lithuania,Luxembourg, Macedonia, Malta,Monaco, Montenegro, Netherlands,Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania,San Marino, Serbia, Slovakia,Slovenia, Spain, Sweden,Switzerland, United Kingdom.Service display 3 107.

International service intervalsMaintenance of your vehicle isrequired every 15,000 km or after1 year, whichever occurs first, unlessotherwise indicated in the servicedisplay.Severe operating conditions exist ifone or more of the followingcircumstances occur frequently: Coldstarting, stop and go operation, traileroperation, mountain driving, drivingon poor and sandy road surfaces,increased air pollution, presence ofairborne sand and high dust content,

Service and maintenance 305

driving at high altitude and largevariations of temperature. Underthese severe operating conditions,certain service work may be requiredmore frequently than the regularservice interval.The international service intervals arevalid for the countries which are notlisted in the European serviceintervals.Service display 3 107.

ConfirmationsConfirmation of service is recorded inthe Service and Warranty Booklet.The date and mileage is completedwith the stamp and signature of theservicing workshop.Make sure that the Service andWarranty Booklet is completedcorrectly as continuous proof ofservice is essential if any warranty orgoodwill claims are to be met, and isalso a benefit when selling thevehicle.

Service interval with remainingengine oil life durationThe service interval is based onseveral parameters depending onusage.The service display lets you knowwhen to change the engine oil.Service display 3 107.

Recommended fluids,lubricants and partsRecommended fluids andlubricantsOnly use products that meet therecommended specifications.

9 Warning

Operating materials arehazardous and could bepoisonous. Handle with care. Payattention to information given onthe containers.

Engine oilEngine oil is identified by its qualityand its viscosity. Quality is moreimportant than viscosity whenselecting which engine oil to use. Theoil quality ensures e.g. enginecleanliness, wear protection and oilageing control, whereas viscositygrade gives information on the oil'sthickness over a temperature range.

306 Service and maintenance

Dexos is the newest engine oil qualitythat provides optimum protection forgasoline and diesel engines. If it isunavailable, engine oils of other listedqualities have to be used.Recommendations for gasolineengines are also valid forCompressed Natural Gas (CNG),Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG) andEthanol (E85) fuelled engines.Select the appropriate engine oilbased on its quality and on theminimum ambient temperature3 310.

Topping up engine oil

Caution

In case of any spilled oil, wipe it upand dispose it properly.

Engine oils of different manufacturersand brands can be mixed as long asthey comply with the required engineoil quality and viscosity.

Use of engine oils for all petrolengines with only ACEA quality isprohibited, since it can cause enginedamage under certain operatingconditions.Select the appropriate engine oilbased on its quality and on theminimum ambient temperature3 310.

Additional engine oil additivesThe use of additional engine oiladditives could cause damage andinvalidate the warranty.

Engine oil viscosity gradesThe SAE viscosity grade givesinformation of the thickness of the oil.Multigrade oil is indicated by twofigures, e.g. SAE 5W-30. The firstfigure, followed by a W, indicates thelow temperature viscosity and thesecond figure the high temperatureviscosity.Select the appropriate viscosity gradedepending on the minimum ambienttemperature 3 310.

All of the recommended viscositygrades are suitable for high ambienttemperatures.

Coolant and antifreezeUse only organic acid type-long lifecoolant (LLC) antifreeze approved forthe vehicle. Consult a workshop.The system is factory filled withcoolant designed for excellentcorrosion protection and frostprotection down to approx. -28 °C. Innorthern countries with very lowtemperatures the factory filled coolantprovides frost protection down toapprox. -37 °C. This concentrationshould be maintained all year round.The use of additional coolantadditives that intend to give additionalcorrosion protection or seal againstminor leaks can cause functionproblems. Liability for consequencesresulting from the use of additionalcoolant additives will be rejected.

Service and maintenance 307

Brake and clutch fluidOver time, brake fluid absorbsmoisture which will reduce brakingeffectiveness. The brake fluid shouldtherefore be replaced at the specifiedinterval.

Washer fluidUse only washer fluid approved forthe vehicle to prevent damage ofwiper blades, paintwork, plastic andrubber parts. Consult a workshop.

AdBlueOnly use AdBlue to reduce thenitrogen oxides in the exhaustemission 3 207.

308 Technical data

Technical data

Vehicle identification .................. 308Vehicle Identification Number .. 308Identification plate ................... 308Engine identification ................ 309

Vehicle data ............................... 310Recommended fluids andlubricants ................................ 310

Engine data ............................. 313Performance ............................ 315Vehicle weight ......................... 316Vehicle dimensions ................. 317Capacities ................................ 318Tyre pressures ........................ 320

Vehicle identificationVehicle IdentificationNumber

The Vehicle Identification Numbermay be stamped on the identificationplate and on the floor pan, under thefloor covering, visible under a cover.The Vehicle Identification Numbermay be embossed on the instrumentpanel, visible through the windscreen,or in the engine compartment on theright body panel.

Identification plate

The identification plate is located onthe front left or right door frame.

Technical data 309

Information on identification label:1 : manufacturer2 : operating permit number3 : vehicle identification number4 : permissible gross vehicle weight

rating in kg5 : permissible gross train weight

in kg6 : maximum permissible front axle

load in kg7 : maximum permissible rear axle

load in kg8 : vehicle-specific or country-

specific data

The combined total of front and rearaxle loads must not exceed thepermissible gross vehicle weight. Forexample, if the front axle is bearing itsmaximum permissible load, the rearaxle can only bear a load that is equalto the gross vehicle weight minus thefront axle load.The technical data is determined inaccordance with EuropeanCommunity standards. We reservethe right to make modifications.Specifications in the vehicledocuments always have priority overthose given in this manual.

Engine identificationThe technical data tables show theengine identifier code. Engine data3 313.To identify the respective engine,refer to the engine power in the EECCertificate of Conformity providedwith your vehicle or other nationalregistration documents.

310 Technical data

Vehicle dataRecommended fluids and lubricantsEuropean service schedule

Required engine oil qualityAll European countries with European service interval 3 304

Engine oil quality Petrol engineB14NET

All other petrol engines(including CNG, LPG, E85)

Diesel engines

dexos1 Gen2 ✔ – –

dexos2 – ✔ ✔

All engines except B14NET: In case dexos quality is unavailable, you may not use max. one litre engine oil qualityACEA C3 once between each oil change.

Engine oil viscosity gradesAll European countries with European service interval 3 304

Ambient temperature Petrol and diesel engines

down to -25 °C SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40SAE 5W-30 or SAE 5W-40

below -25 °C SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40

Technical data 311

International service schedule

Required engine oil qualityAll countries with international service interval 3 304



Diesel engines

dexos1 Gen2 ✔ – –

dexos2 – ✔ ✔

In case dexos quality is unavailable you may use the oil qualities listed below:

All countries with international service interval 3 304



Diesel engines

ACEA A3/B4 – ✔ ✔

ACEA C3 – ✔ ✔

312 Technical data

Engine oil viscosity gradesAll countries with international service interval 3 304

Ambient temperature Petrol and diesel engines

down to -25 °C SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40SAE 5W-30 or SAE 5W-40

below -25 °C SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40

down to -20 °C SAE 10W-301) or SAE 10W-401)

1) Permitted, but usage of oils with dexos quality is recommended.

Technical data 313

Engine dataEngine identifier code B14NEL B14NET B14NET B16XNT B16SHLB16SHTSales designation 1.4 1.4 1.4 LPG 1.6 CNG 1.61.6Engineering code B14NET B14NET B14NET B16XNT B16SHTB16SHT

Piston displacement [cm3] 1364 1364 1364 1598 15981598

Engine power [kW] 88 103 103 110 125147

at rpm 4200-6000 4900-6000 4900 5000 4750-60005500

Torque [Nm] 200 200 200 210 260280

at rpm 1850-4200 1850-4900 1850-4900 2300 1650-45001650-5000

Fuel type Petrol Petrol Liquid gas/Petrol Natural gas/Petrol PetrolPetrol

Octane rating RON2)

recommended 95 95 95 95 9898

possible 98 98 98 98 9595

possible 91 91 91 91 9191

Additional fuel type – – Liquid gas (LPG) Natural gas (CNG) ––

2) A country specific label at the fuel filler flap can supersede the engine specific requirement.

314 Technical data

Engine identifier code B16DTJ B16DTH B20DTJ B20DTHSales designation 1.6 Turbo 1.6 Turbo 2.0 Turbo 2.0 TurboEngineering code B16DTH B16DTH B20DTH B20DTH

Piston displacement [cm3] 1598 1598 1956 1956

Engine power [kW] 88 99 96 125

at rpm 4000 3500-4000 3750 4000

Torque [Nm] 320 320 300 400

at rpm 2000 2000 1500-2750 1750-2500

Fuel type Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel

Technical data 315

Performance

Engine B14NEL B14NETB14NETLPG

B16XNTCNG B16SHL B16SHT

Maximum speed3) [km/h]

Manual transmissionwith Stop-start system

190192

200202

195–

200–

––

–220

Automatic transmission – 197 – – 208 –

3) The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerb weight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reducethe specified maximum speed of the vehicle.

Engine B16DTJ B16DTH B20DTJ B20DTH

Maximum speed3) [km/h]

Manual transmissionwith Stop-start system

–186

–191

––

208208

Automatic transmission – – 190 205

3) The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerb weight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reducethe specified maximum speed of the vehicle.

316 Technical data

Vehicle weightKerb weight, basic model without any optional equipment

Engine Manual transmission Automatic transmission

5-seats/7-seats[kg]

B14NEL 1613/1640 –

B14NET 1613/1640 1613/1640

B14NET LPG 1664/1691 –

B16XNT CNG 1701/1728 –

B16SHL – 1701/1728

B16SHT 1664/1691 –

B16DTJ 1701/1728 –

B16DTH 1701/1728 –

B20DTJ – 1788/1815

B20DTH 1733/1760 1788/1815

Optional equipment and accessories increase the kerb weight.Loading information 3 94.

Technical data 317

Vehicle dimensionsLength [mm] 4666

Width with folded exterior mirrors [mm] 1928

Width with two exterior mirrors [mm] 2100

Height (without antenna) [mm] 1620 - 1710

Length of load compartment floor with folded third row [mm] 1094

Length of load compartment with folded second and third row [mm] 1842

Load compartment width [mm] 1057

Load compartment height [mm] 840

Wheelbase [mm] 2760

Turning circle diameter [m] 11.9

318 Technical data

CapacitiesEngine oil

Engine B14NEL B14NET,B14NET LPG

B16XNT CNG B16SHL,B16SHT

including Filter [l] 4.0 4.0 4.5 5.5

between MIN and MAX [l] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

Engine B16DTJ,B16DTH

B20DTJ B20DTH

including Filter [l] 5.0 5.25 5.25

between MIN and MAX [l] 1.0 1.0 1.0

Fuel tank

Petrol/diesel, refilling quantity [l] 58

Natural gas CNG, refilling quantity [kg] or [l]Petrol, refilling quantity [l]

25 kg4) or 144 l14

Liquid gas LPG, refilling quantity [l] 60

4) At 20 MPa/200 bar/2900 psi and 15 °C.

Technical data 319

AdBlue tank

AdBlue, refilling quantity [l] 7.5

320 Technical data

Tyre pressuresComfort with up to3 people ECO with up to 3 people

With full load

Engine Tyres front rear front rear front rear[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

B14NEL,B14NET

215/60 R16, 220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 260/2.6 (38) 260/2.6 (38) 230/2.3(33)

300/3.0(43)

225/50 R17,

235/45 R18,

235/40 R19

B14NET LPG 225/50 R17, 220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 260/2.6 (38) 260/2.6 (38) 230/2.3(33)

300/3.0(43)

235/45 R18,

235/40 R19

B16XNT CNG 225/50 R17 220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 260/2.6 (38) 260/2.6 (38) 230/2.3(33)

280/2.8(41)

Technical data 321

Comfort with up to3 people ECO with up to 3 people

With full load


[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

B16SHL,B16SHT

225/50 R17, 260/2.6 (38) 240/2.4 (35) 280/2.8 (41) 280/2.8 (41) 270/2.7(39)

320/3.2(46)

235/45 R18,

235/40 R19

B16DTJ,B16DTH

215/60 R16, 240/2.4 (35) 240/2.4 (35) 280/2.8 (41)5)

280/2.8 (41)5)

260/2.6(38)

300/3.0(43)

225/50 R17,

235/45 R18,

235/40 R19

322 Technical data

Comfort with up to3 people ECO with up to 3 people

With full load


[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

B20DTJ,B20DTH

225/50 R17, 260/2.6 (38) 240/2.4 (35) 280/2.8 (41) 280/2.8 (41) 280/2.8(41)

320/3.2(46)

235/45 R18,

235/40 R19

All Temporary sparewheel125/70 R17

420/4.2 (61) 420/4.2 (61) – – 420/4.2(61)

420/4.2(61)

5) In combination with ultra low rolling resistance tyres: 300/3.0 (43).

Customer information 323

Customerinformation

Customer information ................ 323Declaration of conformity ......... 323REACH .................................... 328Collision damage repair ........... 328Software acknowledgement .... 328Registered trademarks ............ 330

Vehicle data recording and pri‐vacy ........................................... 331

Event data recorders ............... 331Radio Frequency Identification(RFID) ..................................... 331

Customer informationDeclaration of conformityTransmission systemsThis vehicle has systems thattransmit and / or receive radio wavessubject to Directive 1999/5/EC or2014/53/EU. The manufacturers ofthe systems listed below declareconformity with Directive 1999/5/ECor 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EUdeclaration of conformity for eachsystem is available at the followinginternet address: www.opel.com/conformityImporter isOpel / Vauxhall, Bahnhofsplatz,65423 Ruesselsheim am Main,Germany.

Infotainment system R 4.0 / Navi 4.0LGELG Electronics European SharedService Center B.V., Krijgsman 1,1186 DM Amstelveen, TheNetherlands

Operationfrequency (MHz)

Maximum output(dBm)

2402.0 - 2480.0 4

2400.0 - 2483.5 13

5725.0 - 5850.0 13

2400.0 - 2483.5 4

DAB+ ModulePanasonic Automotive & IndustrialSystems Europe GmbH, Robert-Bosch-Straße 27-29, 63225 Langen,GermanyOperation frequency: N/AMaximum output: N/A

Antenna LairdLaird8100 Industrial Park Drive, GrandBlanc, MI, 48439 USAOperation frequency: N/AMaximum output: N/A

Antenna KathrainKathrein Automotive GmbH

324 Customer information

Roemerring 1, 31137 Hildesheim,GermanyOperation frequency: N/AMaximum output: N/A

OnStar moduleLGELG Electronics European SharedService Center B.V., Krijgsman 1,1186 DM Amstelveen, TheNetherlands

Operationfrequency (MHz)

Maximum output(dBm)

2402 - 2480 4

2412 - 2462 18

880 - 915 33

1710 - 1785 24

1850 - 1910 24

1920 - 1980 24

2500 - 2570 23

Front radar unitDelphi

Delphiplatz 1, 42119 Wuppertal,GermanyOperation frequency: 76 – 77 GHzMaximum output: 55 EIRP dBm

ImmobiliserContinental Automotive GmbHSiemensstrasse 12, 93055Regensburg, GermanyOperation frequency: 125 kHzMaximum output:5.1 dBuA/m @ 10m

Radio remote control receiverContinental Automotive GmbHSiemensstrasse 12, 93055Regensburg, GermanyOperation frequency: 433.92 MHzMaximum output: N/A

Radio remote control transmitterContinental Automotive GmbHSiemensstrasse 12, 93055Regensburg, GermanyOperation frequency: 433.92 MHzMaximum output: -5,7 dBm

Tyre pressure sensorsSchrader Electronics Ltd.11 Technology Park, Belfast Road,Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland,United KingdomOperation frequency: 433.92 MHzMaximum output: 10 dBm

Parking heater remote controlreceiverWebasto Thermo & Comfort SEFriedrichshafener Str. 9, 82205 D-Gilching, GermanyOperation frequency: N/AMaximum output: N/A

Parking heater remote controltransmitterWebasto Thermo & Comfort SEFriedrichshafener Str. 9, 82205 D-Gilching, GermanyOperation frequency: 869 MHzMaximum output: 14 dBm


Radar systemsCountry-specific Declarations ofConformity for radar systems areshown on the following page:



Jack


Translation of the original declarationof conformityDeclaration of conformity accordingto EC Directive 2006/42/ECWe declare that the product:Product designation: JackType/GM part number: 13348505,13504504is in compliance with the provisions ofDirective 2006/42/EC.Applied technical standards:GMN9737 : jackingGM 14337 : standard equipment

jack – hardwaretests

GMN5127 : vehicle integrity –hoisting and servicestation jacking

GMW15005 : standard equipmentjack and spare tire,vehicle test

ISO TS 16949 : qualitymanagementsystems

The signatory is authorised tocompile the technical documentation.Rüsselsheim, 31st January 2014signed byHans-Peter MetzgerEngineering Group Manager Chassis& StructureAdam Opel AGD-65423 Rüsselsheim

REACHRegistration, Evaluation,Authorisation and Restriction ofChemicals (REACH) is a EuropeanUnion regulation adopted to improvethe protection of human health andthe environment from the risks thatcan be posed by chemicals. Visitwww.opel.com/reach for furtherinformation and for access to theArticle 33 communication.

Collision damage repairPaint thicknessDue to production techniques, thethickness of the paint can varybetween 50 and 400 µm.Therefore, different paint thickness isno indicator for a collision damagerepair.

Software acknowledgementCertain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated withlibcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://www.lg.com/global/support/opensource/index.

libcurlCopyright and permission noticeCopyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.All rights reserved.


Permission to use, copy, modify, anddistribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee is herebygranted, provided that the abovecopyright notice and this permissionnotice appear in all copies.The software is provided "as is",without warranty of any kind, expressor implied, including but not limited tothe warranties of merchantability,fitness for a particular purpose andnoninfringement of third party rights.In no event shall the authors orcopyright holders be liable for anyclaim, damages or other liability,whether in an action of contract, tortor otherwise, arising from, out of or inconnection with the software or theuse or other dealings in the software.Except as contained in this notice, thename of a copyright holder shall notbe used in advertising or otherwise topromote the sale, use or otherdealings in this Software without priorwritten authorization of the copyrightholder.

unzipThis is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.htmlindefinitely.Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.For the purposes of this copyright andlicense, “Info-ZIP” is defined as thefollowing set of individuals:Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth,Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, RobertHeath, Jonathan Hudson, PaulKienitz, David Kirschbaum, JohnnyLee, Onno van der Linden, IgorMandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, SergioMonesi, Keith Owens, GeorgePetrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai UweRommel, Steve Salisbury, DaveSmith, Steven M. Schweda, ChristianSpieler, Cosmin Truta, AntoineVerheijen, Paul von Behren, RichWales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind, expressor implied. In no event shall Info-ZIPor its contributors be held liable forany direct, indirect, incidental, specialor consequential damages arising outof the use of or inability to use thissoftware.Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute it freely,subject to the following restrictions:1. Redistributions of source code

must retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exception tothis condition is redistribution of astandard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that is


permitted without inclusion of thislicense, as long as the normalSFX banner has not beenremoved from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions--including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces, anddynamic, shared, or static libraryversions--must be plainly markedas such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as being Info-ZIPreleases--including, but notlimited to, labeling of the alteredversions with the names “Info-ZIP” (or any variation thereof,including, but not limited to,different capitalizations), “PocketUnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip” withoutthe explicit permission of Info-ZIP.Such altered versions are furtherprohibited from misrepresentative

use of the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail addresses or of the Info-ZIPURL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,” and“MacZip” for its own source andbinary releases.

Registered trademarksApple Inc.Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark ofApple Inc.App Store® and iTunes Store® areregistered trademarks of Apple Inc.iPhone®, iPod®, iPod touch®, iPodnano®, iPad® and Siri® are registeredtrademarks of Apple Inc.Aupeo! GmbHAUPEO® is a registered trademark ofthe Aupeo! GmbH.Bluetooth SIG, Inc.Bluetooth® is a registered trademarkof Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

DivX, LLCDivX® and DivX Certified® areregistered trademarks of DivX, LLC.EnGIS Technologies, Inc.BringGo® is a registered trademark ofEnGIS Technologies, Inc.Google Inc.Android™ and Google Play™ Storeare trademarks of Google Inc.Stitcher Inc.Stitcher™ is a trademark of Stitcher,Inc.Verband der Automobilindustrie e.V.AdBlue® is a registered trademark ofthe VDA.


Vehicle data recordingand privacyEvent data recordersData storage modules in thevehicleA large number of electroniccomponents of your vehicle containdata storage modules temporarily orpermanently storing technical dataabout the condition of the vehicle,events and errors. In general, thistechnical information documents thecondition of parts, modules, systemsor the environment:● operating conditions of system

components (e.g. filling levels)● status messages of the vehicle

and its single components (e.g.number of wheel revolutions /rotational speed, deceleration,lateral acceleration)

● dysfunctions and defects inimportant system components

● vehicle reactions in particulardriving situations (e.g. inflation ofan airbag, activation of thestability regulation system)

● environmental conditions (e.g.temperature)

These data are exclusively technicaland help identifying and correctingerrors as well as optimising vehiclefunctions.Motion profiles indicating travelledroutes cannot be created with thesedata.If services are used (e.g. repairworks, service processes, warrantycases, quality assurance),employees of the service network(manufacturer included) are able toread out this technical informationfrom the event and error data storagemodules applying special diagnosticdevices. If required, you will receivefurther information at theseworkshops. After an error has beencorrected, the data are deleted fromthe error storage module or they areconstantly overwritten.

When using the vehicle, situationsmay occur in which these technicaldata related to other information(accident report, damages on thevehicle, witness statements etc.) maybe associated with a specific person -possibly, with the assistance of anexpert.Additional functions contractuallyagreed upon with the client (e.g.vehicle location in emergency cases)allow the transmission of particularvehicle data from the vehicle.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tyrepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security. It is also used inconnection with conveniences suchas radio remote controls for doorlocking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage dooropeners. RFID technology in Opelvehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother Opel system containingpersonal information.

332

Index AAccessories and vehicle

modifications .......................... 260Activating Bluetooth music......... 161Activating phone......................... 184Activating radio........................... 154Activating the navigation system 167Activating USB audio.................. 161Activating USB movie................. 163Activating USB picture................ 162Active Emergency Braking......... 234Active head restraints................... 37Adaptive cruise control....... 117, 223AdBlue........................ 115, 207, 305Adjustable air vents ................... 196Airbag and belt tensioners ......... 111Airbag deactivation .............. 59, 112Airbag label................................... 54Airbag system .............................. 54Air conditioning regular

operation ................................ 197Air conditioning system .............. 191Air intake .................................... 197Air vents...................................... 196Antilock brake system ................ 214Antilock brake system (ABS) ..... 113Anti-theft alarm system ................ 26Anti-theft locking system .............. 26Appearance care........................ 300Armrest......................................... 42

Armrest storage ........................... 69Ashtrays ..................................... 102Audio files................................... 159Automatic anti-dazzle .................. 30Automatic light control ............... 131Automatic locking ........................ 24Automatic transmission ............. 210Autostop..................................... 202Auto volume................................ 151Auxiliary heater........................... 196

BBasic operation........................... 148Battery discharge protection ...... 139Battery voltage ........................... 123Bicycle rack.................................. 70BlueInjection............................... 207Bluetooth

Bluetooth connection.............. 181Bluetooth music menu............ 161Connecting device.................. 159General information................ 159Pairing..................................... 181Phone...................................... 184

Bluetooth connection.................. 181Bonnet ....................................... 261Brake and clutch fluid................. 305Brake and clutch system ........... 112Brake assist ............................... 216Brake fluid .................................. 265

333

Brakes ............................... 214, 265Breakdown.................................. 298BringGo...................................... 164Bulb replacement ....................... 268

CCall

Functions during a call............ 184Incoming call........................... 184Initiating a phone call.............. 184Ring tone................................. 184

Call history.................................. 184Capacities .................................. 318Cargo management system ........ 88Car Pass ...................................... 21Catalytic converter ..................... 206Central locking system ................ 22Centre console lighting .............. 138Centre console storage ............... 69Changing tyre and wheel size . . . 288Charging system ........................ 112Child locks ................................... 25Child restraint installation

locations ................................... 63Child restraints.............................. 60Child restraint systems ................ 60Cigarette lighter ......................... 102Climate control ............................. 16Climate control systems............. 190Clock........................................... 100

CNG.................................... 105, 248Code........................................... 122Collision damage repair.............. 328Contacts..................................... 171Control elements

Infotainment system................ 142Steering wheel........................ 142

Control elements overview......... 142Control indicators........................ 108Control of the vehicle ................. 199Controls........................................ 97Convex shape .............................. 29Coolant and antifreeze............... 305Cruise control .................... 116, 220Cupholders .................................. 66Curtain airbag system .................. 58Curve lighting.............................. 134

DDAB............................................ 158Danger, Warnings and Cautions . . . 4Daytime running lights ............... 133Declaration of conformity............ 323DEF............................................ 207Destination input ........................ 171Diesel exhaust fluid.................... 207Diesel fuel system bleeding ....... 267Diesel particle filter............. 115, 205Digital audio broadcasting.......... 158Displaying pictures..................... 162

Display settings.................. 162, 163Door open .................................. 117Door panel storage....................... 68Doors............................................ 25Driver assistance systems.......... 220Driver Information Centre........... 117Driving characteristics and

towing tips .............................. 255Driving hints................................ 199

EElectric adjustment ...................... 29Electrical system......................... 275Electric parking brake......... 113, 214Electric parking brake fault......... 113Electronic climate control system 192Electronic driving programmes . . 211Electronic Stability Control.......... 218Electronic Stability Control and

Traction Control system.......... 114Electronic Stability Control off..... 114Emergency call........................... 183End-of-life vehicle recovery ....... 261Engine compartment fuse box ... 277Engine coolant ........................... 263Engine coolant temperature

gauge ..................................... 107Engine data ............................... 313Engine exhaust .......................... 205Engine identification................... 309

334

Engine oil ................... 262, 305, 310Engine oil pressure .................... 115Entry lighting .............................. 138Event data recorders.................. 331Exit lighting ................................ 138Exterior care .............................. 300Exterior light ............................... 116Exterior lighting .................... 13, 130Exterior mirrors............................. 29

FFault ........................................... 212Favourite lists............................. 156

Retrieving stations................... 156Storing stations....................... 156

Favourites................................... 171File formats

Audio files................................ 159Movie files............................... 159Picture files.............................. 159

First aid kit ................................... 92Fixed air vents ........................... 197Flex-Fix system............................ 70Fog light ..................................... 116Fog lights ................................... 270Folding mirrors ............................. 29Folding tray .................................. 92Following distance...................... 114Following distance indication...... 233Forward collision alert................. 230

Front airbag system ..................... 57Front fog lights ........................... 135Front seats.................................... 38Front storage................................ 68Fuel............................................. 246Fuel consumption - CO2-

Emissions ............................... 253Fuel for diesel engines .............. 247Fuel for liquid gas operation....... 248Fuel for natural gas operation . . . 248Fuel for petrol engines ............... 246Fuel gauge ................................. 104Fuel selector .............................. 105funnel.......................................... 248Fuses ......................................... 275

GGauges....................................... 103Gear shifting............................... 114General information... 159, 166,

180, 254Bluetooth................................. 159DAB......................................... 158Infotainment system................ 140Navigation............................... 166Phone...................................... 180Smartphone applications........ 159USB......................................... 159

Glass panel .................................. 34

Glovebox ..................................... 66Guidance ................................... 176

HHalogen headlights .................... 268Hand brake................................. 214Hazard warning flashers ............ 135Headlight flash ........................... 132Headlight range adjustment ...... 132Headlights................................... 130Headlights when driving abroad 133Head restraint adjustment ............. 8Head restraints ............................ 36Heated mirrors ............................. 30Heated rear window ..................... 33Heated steering wheel ................. 97Heating ........................................ 43Heating and ventilation system . 190High beam ......................... 116, 131High beam assist................ 116, 131Hill start assist ........................... 216Home menu................................ 148Horn ....................................... 14, 98

IIdentification plate ..................... 308Ignition switch positions ............. 199Immobiliser .......................... 28, 116Indicators.................................... 103Info display................................. 121Information displays.................... 117

335

Infotainment control panel.......... 142Instrument cluster ...................... 103Instrument panel fuse box ......... 279Instrument panel illumination ..... 275Instrument panel illumination

control .................................... 137Instrument panel overview ........... 10Intellitext..................................... 158Interactive driving system........... 219Interior care ............................... 302Interior lighting............................ 137Interior lights ...................... 137, 275Interior mirrors.............................. 30Interruption of power supply ...... 212Introduction .................................... 3

JJump starting ............................. 297

KKeys ............................................. 20Keys, locks................................... 20

LLane departure warning..... 114, 245Lashing eyes ............................... 88LED headlights........... 116, 134, 270Lighting features......................... 138Light switch ................................ 130Load compartment ................ 25, 79Load compartment cover ............. 81

Load compartment fuse box ...... 280Loading information ..................... 94Load rails and hooks ................... 88Low fuel ..................................... 116LPG............................ 105, 248, 310

MMalfunction indicator light .......... 112Manual anti-dazzle ...................... 30Manual mode ............................. 211Manual seat adjustment............... 39Manual transmission .................. 213Manual windows .......................... 31Maps........................................... 167Maximum startup volume........... 151Memorised settings...................... 22Menu operation.......................... 148Mirror adjustment ........................... 8Misted light covers ..................... 136Mobile phones and CB radio

equipment .............................. 188Movie files................................... 159Mute............................................ 145

NNavigation

Contacts.................................. 171Current location....................... 167Destination input..................... 171Favourites............................... 171Map display............................. 167

Map manipulation.................... 167Map update............................. 166Recent destinations................ 171Route guidance....................... 176TMC stations................... 166, 176Traffic incidents....................... 176Turn list................................... 176

New vehicle running-in .............. 199Number plate light ..................... 274

OObject detection systems........... 235Odometer ................................... 103Oil, engine.................. 262, 305, 310OnStar........................................ 125Operate pedal............................. 113Operation.................................... 184

External devices...................... 159Menu....................................... 148Navigation system................... 167Phone...................................... 184Radio....................................... 154

Outside temperature .................. 100Overhead console ....................... 68Overrun cut-off ........................... 201

PPairing........................................ 181Parking ................................ 19, 204Parking assist ............................ 235Parking brake ............................ 214

336

Parking lights ............................. 136Particulate filter........................... 205Performance .............................. 315Performing work ........................ 261Phone

Bluetooth................................. 180Bluetooth connection.............. 181Call history.............................. 184Emergency calls...................... 183Entering a number.................. 184Functions during a call............ 184General information................ 180Incoming call........................... 184Phone book............................. 184Phone main menu................... 184Selecting the ring tone............ 184Speed dial number.................. 184

Phone book................................ 184Phone projection........................ 164Picture files................................. 159Playing audio.............................. 161Playing movies........................... 163POIs............................................ 171Pollen filter ................................. 197Power outlets ............................. 101Power seat adjustment ................ 41Power steering............................ 114Power steering fluid.................... 264Power windows ............................ 31

Preheating ................................. 115Puncture..................................... 291

QQuickheat................................... 196

RRadio

Activating................................. 154Configuring DAB..................... 158Configuring RDS..................... 157DAB announcements.............. 158Digital audio broadcasting(DAB)...................................... 158Favourite lists.......................... 156Intellitext.................................. 158Radio data system (RDS)....... 157Regional.................................. 157Regionalisation....................... 157Retrieving stations................... 156Selecting the waveband.......... 154Station search......................... 154Station tuning.......................... 154Storing stations....................... 156Usage...................................... 154

Radio data system (RDS) .......... 157Radio Frequency Identification

(RFID)..................................... 331Radio remote control ................... 21RDS............................................ 157REACH....................................... 328

Reading lights ............................ 138Rear carrier system...................... 70Rear floor storage cover .............. 83Rear fog light ..................... 116, 136Rear seats.................................... 44Rear storage................................. 81Rear view camera ...................... 240Rear window wiper/washer .......... 99Recommended fluids and

lubricants ........................ 305, 310Refuelling ................................... 248Regional..................................... 157Regionalisation........................... 157Registered trademarks............... 330Retained power off..................... 200Retrieving stations...................... 156Reversing lights ......................... 136Ride control system.................... 217Ring tone

Changing the ring tone............ 184Ring tone volume.................... 151

Roller blinds ................................. 34Roof.............................................. 34Roof load...................................... 94Roof rack ..................................... 93Route guidance.......................... 176

SSafety net .................................... 90Seat adjustment ............................. 6

337

Seat belt ........................................ 8Seat belt reminder ..................... 111Seat belts ..................................... 50Seat heating................................. 43Seat position ................................ 38Second row seats ........................ 44Selective catalytic reduction....... 207Selector lever ............................. 210Service ............................... 197, 304Service display .......................... 107Service information .................... 304Side airbag system ...................... 58Side blind spot alert.................... 238Sidelights.................................... 130Side turn signal lights ................ 274Smartphone................................ 159

Phone projection..................... 164Software acknowledgement....... 328Spare wheel ............................... 294Speech recognition..................... 180Speed dial numbers................... 184Speed limiter....................... 117, 222Speedometer ............................. 103Starting and operating................ 199Starting off ................................... 17Starting the engine .................... 200Station search............................. 154Steering...................................... 199Steering wheel adjustment ...... 9, 97Steering wheel audio controls.... 142

Steering wheel controls ............... 97Stop-start system........................ 202Storage......................................... 66Storage compartments................. 66Storing stations........................... 156Sunvisor lights ........................... 138Sun visors .................................... 33Switching the Infotainment

system on................................ 145Symbols ......................................... 4System settings.......................... 152

TTachometer ............................... 104Tail lights ................................... 271Theft-deterrent feature .............. 141Third row seats ............................ 48Three-point seat belt .................... 51TMC stations.............................. 166Tone settings.............................. 150Tools .......................................... 282Touch beep volume.................... 151Tow bar....................................... 254Towing................................ 254, 298Towing another vehicle ............. 299Towing equipment ..................... 256Towing the vehicle ..................... 298TP volume.................................. 151Traction Control system ............. 217Traction Control system off......... 114

Traffic incidents.......................... 176Traffic sign assistant........... 117, 241Trailer coupling........................... 254Trailer stability assist ................. 258Trailer towing ............................. 255Transmission ............................... 16Transmission display ................. 210Tread depth ............................... 287Trip odometer ............................ 103Turn and lane-change signals ... 135Turn list....................................... 176Turn signal ................................. 110Tyre chains ................................ 288Tyre designations ...................... 282Tyre pressure ............................ 283Tyre pressure monitoring

system............................. 115, 284Tyre pressures ........................... 320Tyre repair kit ............................. 288

UUltrasonic parking assist............. 235Underseat storage ....................... 68Upholstery.................................. 302Usage................. 145, 154, 167, 180

Bluetooth................................. 159Menu....................................... 148Navigation system................... 167Phone...................................... 184

338

Radio....................................... 154USB......................................... 159

USBConnecting device.................. 159General information................ 159USB audio menu..................... 161USB movie menu.................... 163USB picture menu................... 162

Using smartphone applications. . 164Using this manual .......................... 3

VVehicle battery ........................... 265Vehicle checks............................ 261Vehicle data................................ 310Vehicle data recording and

privacy..................................... 331Vehicle detected ahead.............. 117Vehicle dimensions .................... 317Vehicle Identification Number .... 308Vehicle jack................................ 282Vehicle messages ..................... 122Vehicle personalisation ............. 124Vehicle security............................ 26Vehicle specific data ...................... 3Vehicle storage........................... 260Vehicle tools............................... 282Vehicle unlocking ........................... 6Vehicle weight ........................... 316Ventilation................................... 190

Voice guidance........................... 167Voice recognition........................ 180Volume

Auto volume............................ 151Maximum startup volume........ 151Mute function........................... 145Ring tone volume.................... 151Setting the volume.................. 145Speed compensated volume. . 151Touch beep volume................ 151TP volume............................... 151Volume limitation at hightemperatures........................... 145

Volume settings.......................... 151

WWarning chimes ......................... 123Warning lights............................. 103Warning triangle .......................... 92Washer and wiper systems ......... 14Washer fluid ............................... 265Waveband selection................... 154Wheel changing ......................... 291Wheel covers ............................. 288Wheels and tyres ....................... 282Windows....................................... 31Windscreen................................... 31Windscreen wiper/washer ........... 98Winter tyres ............................... 282Wiper blade replacement .......... 267

www.opel.com

Copyright by ADAM OPEL GmbH, Rüsselsheim, Germany.

The information contained in this publication is effective as of the date indicated below. Adam Opel GmbH reserves the right to make changes to the technical specifications, features anddesign of the vehicles relative to the information in this publication as well as changes to the publication itself.

Edition: August 2017, ADAM OPEL GmbH, Rüsselsheim.

Printed on chlorine-free bleached paper.

*ID-OZACOBSE1708-EN*

ID-OZACOBSE1708-en

Date post:	23-Sep-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	1 times
Download:	0 times

Zafira-C, v.34 (rev 2), en-GB · 6 In brief In brief Initial drive information Vehicle unlocking...

Documents